Professional Documents
Culture Documents
Powerflex 750-Series Ac Drives: Programming Manual
Powerflex 750-Series Ac Drives: Programming Manual
Original Instructions
Activities including installation, adjustments, putting into service, use, assembly, disassembly, and maintenance are
required to be carried out by suitably trained personnel in accordance with applicable code of practice.
If this equipment is used in a manner not specified by the manufacturer, the protection provided by the equipment may
be impaired.
In no event will Rockwell Automation, Inc. be responsible or liable for indirect or consequential damages resulting from
the use or application of this equipment.
The examples and diagrams in this manual are included solely for illustrative purposes. Because of the many variables and
requirements associated with any particular installation, Rockwell Automation, Inc. cannot assume responsibility or
liability for actual use based on the examples and diagrams.
No patent liability is assumed by Rockwell Automation, Inc. with respect to use of information, circuits, equipment, or
software described in this manual.
Reproduction of the contents of this manual, in whole or in part, without written permission of Rockwell Automation,
Inc., is prohibited
Throughout this manual, when necessary, we use notes to make you aware of safety considerations.
WARNING: Identifies information about practices or circumstances that can cause an explosion in a hazardous
environment, which may lead to personal injury or death, property damage, or economic loss.
ATTENTION: Identifies information about practices or circumstances that can lead to personal injury or death, property
damage, or economic loss. Attentions help you identify a hazard, avoid a hazard, and recognize the consequence.
IMPORTANT Identifies information that is critical for successful application and understanding of the product.
SHOCK HAZARD: Labels may be on or inside the equipment, for example, a drive or motor, to alert people that dangerous
voltage may be present.
BURN HAZARD: Labels may be on or inside the equipment, for example, a drive or motor, to alert people that surfaces may
reach dangerous temperatures.
ARC FLASH HAZARD: Labels may be on or inside the equipment, for example, a motor control center, to alert people to
potential Arc Flash. Arc Flash will cause severe injury or death. Wear proper Personal Protective Equipment (PPE). Follow ALL
Regulatory requirements for safe work practices and for Personal Protective Equipment (PPE).
Table of Contents
Summary of Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7
Preface
Who Should Use This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
What Is Not In This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Recommended Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Product Certification. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Manual Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
General Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Chapter 1
Startup Start-Up Check List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Start-Up Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Drive Status Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Establishing A Connection With EtherNet/IP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Chapter 2
Parameter Organization About Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Parameter Access Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
How Drive Parameters are Organized . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
How Option Module Parameters are Organized . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Chapter 3
Drive Port 0 Parameters Drive (Port 0) Monitor File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Drive (Port 0) Motor Control File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Drive (Port 0) Feedback & I/O File. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Drive (Port 0) Cfg File. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Drive (Port 0) Protection File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Drive (Port 0) Speed Control File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Drive (Port 0) Torque Control File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Drive (Port 0) Position Control File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Drive (Port 0) Communication File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Drive (Port 0) Diagnostics File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Drive (Port 0) Applications File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Chapter 4
Port 10 and Port 11 Parameters Inverter (Port 10) Common Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Inverter n (Port 10) Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Converter (Port 11) Common Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Converter n (Port 11) Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Precharge (Port 11) Common Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Precharge n (Port 11) Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Chapter 5
Embedded Feature and Option Embedded EtherNet/IP (Port 13) Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Module Parameters Communication Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
Embedded DeviceLogix (Port 14) Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
11-Series I/O Module Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
22-Series I/O Module Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Single Incremental Encoder Module Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Dual Incremental Encoder Module Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Universal Feedback Module Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
Safe Speed Monitor Module Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting Faults, Alarms, and Configurable Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
Drive Status Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
HIM Indication. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
Manually Clearing Faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
Power Layer Interface (PLI) Board 7-Segment Display . . . . . . . . . . 306
Setting Factory Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
System Resource Allocation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Hardware Service Manual. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
Integrated Motion Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
Fault and Alarm Display Codes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
Parameter Access Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
Drive Fault and Alarm Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
Inverter (Port 10) Faults and Alarms (Frame 8 and Larger) . . . . . . 324
Converter (Port 11) Faults and Alarms (Frame 8 and Larger) . . . . 329
Precharge (Port 11) Faults and Alarms (Frame 8 and Larger). . . . . 334
N-1 and Re-Rate Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
Embedded EtherNet/IP (Port 13) Events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
I/O Faults and Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
Safe Torque Off Fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
ATEX Faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
Single Incremental Encoder Faults and Alarms. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
Dual Incremental Encoder Faults and Alarms. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
Universal Feedback Faults and Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
Port Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
Common Symptoms and Corrective Actions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
PowerFlex 755 Lifting/Torque Proving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
External Brake Resistor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
Technical Support Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
Appendix A
PowerFlex 753 Control Block Diagram Conventions and Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
Diagrams
Appendix B
PowerFlex 755 Control Block Diagram Conventions and Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396
Diagrams
Appendix C
Application Notes Voltage Tolerance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
PowerFlex 755 Lifting/Torque Proving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440
Crane Set up with Encoder Feedback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442
Crane Setup - Encoderless. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451
Pump Off Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459
Predictive Maintenance with Logix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471
Appendix D
Using DeviceLogix Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479
Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 481
Function Block Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 481
Bit and Analog I/O Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 482
Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 484
Program Examples. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 486
Appendix E
Permanent Magnet Motors Compatible Allen-Bradley Servo Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 497
Appendix F
Integrated Motion on EtherNet/ Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 501
IP Feedback Configuration Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 503
Torque Prove and Brake Slip Detect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507
PowerFlex 755 Integrated Motion Using Firmware
Revision 12.001 or Later . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 511
Parameter / Instance Attribute Mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 513
Enhanced Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 520
Faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 527
Additional Resources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 530
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 531
Notes:
Notes:
The purpose of this manual is to provide you with the basic information
required to install, start-up, and troubleshoot PowerFlex® 750-Series Adjustable
Frequency AC Drives.
Topic Page
Who Should Use This Manual 9
What Is Not In This Manual 9
Recommended Documentation 9
Product Certification 10
Manual Conventions 11
General Precautions 12
Who Should Use This Manual This manual is intended for qualified personnel. You must be able to program
and operate Adjustable Frequency AC Drive devices. In addition, you must
have an understanding of the parameter settings and functions.
What Is Not In This Manual The PowerFlex 750-Series AC Drives Quick Start, publication 750-QS001, is
designed to provide only basic start-up information.
Product Certification Product Certifications and Declarations of Conformity are available on the
Internet at:
http://www.rockwellautomation.com/global/certification/overview.page.
Personal Safety
ATTENTION: To avoid an electric shock hazard, verify that the voltage on the
bus capacitors has discharged before servicing.
Frames 1…7: Measure the DC bus voltage at the power terminal block by
measuring between the +DC and -DC terminals or between the +DC and -DC
test point sockets if equipped. Also measure between the +DC terminal or test
point and the chassis, and between the -DC terminal or testpoint and the
chassis. The voltage must be zero for all three measurements.
Frames 8…10: Measure the DC bus voltage at the DC+ and DC- TESTPOINT
sockets on the front of the power module.
See the PowerFlex 750-Series AC Drives Installation Instructions, publication
750-IN001, for terminal and testpoint socket locations.
Product Safety
Notes:
Startup
This chapter provides the information that is required to start up the PowerFlex®
750-Series drive.
Topic Page
Start-Up Check List 15
Start-Up Menu 17
Drive Status Indicators 18
Establishing A Connection With EtherNet/IP 19
Start-Up Check List • This check list supports the Start-Up menu option.
• A Human Interface Module (HIM) is required to run the Start-Up
routine.
For detailed information on by using the HIM, refer to the Enhanced
PowerFlex 7-Class Human Interface Module (HIM) User Manual,
publication 20HIM-UM001.
• The Start-Up routine can modify parameter values for Analog and Digital
I/O.
ATTENTION: Power must be applied to the drive to perform the following start-up
procedure. Some of the voltages present are at incoming line potential. To avoid electric
shock hazard or damage to equipment, it is recommended that only qualified service
personnel perform the following procedure. Thoroughly read and understand the
procedure before beginning.
❏ 2. Confirm that all inputs are connected to the correct terminals and are
secure.
❏ 3. Verify that AC line power at the disconnect device is within the rated value
of the drive.
If any digital inputs are configured to Stop – CF, Run, or Enable, verify
that signals are present or the drive does not start. See Chapter 6 for a
list of potential digital input conflicts.
If the STS light-emitting diode is not flashing green, refer to Drive Status
Indicators on page 18.
❏ 10. Press the Enter key. Follow the menu by using the Enter key, which steps
you through the Start-Up routine.
The Start-Up routine asks simple questions and prompts you to input
required information.
Start-Up Menu The Human Interface Module (HIM) displays the General Start-Up menu by
default upon initial power-up of the drive. To navigate to the Start-Up menu after
the initial power-up of the drive, press the (Folders) key.
General Startup
Motor Control Motor Data Feedback Limits Tests Reference I/O Done
Motor Ctrl Motor Data Feedback Limits Tests Ref, Ramp, I/O Return to
Config Stop Main Menu
Motor Ctrl Motor Data Fdbk Cnfg Limits Tests Ref, Ramp, I/O
Return Return Return Return Return Stop Return
Return
Return to
Main Menu
IMPORTANT If a start-up routine is initiated, but must be terminated before the routine is
completed, be sure to press the Abort soft key to exit the routine.
IMPORTANT The Status Indicator light-emitting diodes on the HIM cradle do not indicate the
status of an installed Communication Adapter option. If an optional Communication
Adapter is installed, refer to the option module user manual for a description of light-
emitting diode location and indication.
Establishing A Connection With There are three methods for configuring the embedded EtherNet/IP adapter IP
address:
EtherNet/IP
• Adapter Rotary Switches – Use the switches when working on a simple,
isolated network (for example, 192.168.1.xxx) that has other products
with switches to set their IP addresses, does not need to be accessed from
outside the network, and you prefer a simplified node addressing method.
The three adapter switches are read when the drive powers up, and
represent three decimal digits from top to bottom (see Figure 2). If set to a
valid address (001…254), the adapter uses that value as the lower octet of
its IP address (192.168.1.xxx, where xxx = rotary switch settings), along
with a subnet mask of 255.255.255.0 and there a gateway is not
configured. Also, the setting for adapter P36 [BOOTP] is automatically
ignored.
See Figure 2 and its accompanying table for all possible switch settings and
their related descriptions.
IMPORTANT When using the adapter rotary switches, set the IP address before power is applied
because the adapter uses the IP address it detects when it first receives power.
4 56
Hundreds
23
78
Position 1 9
0
4 56
Tens Position
23
78
1 9
0
4 56
Ones
23
78
Position 9
1
0
Parameter Organization
This chapter lists and describes the PowerFlex® 750-Series Port 0 drive
parameters. The parameters can be programmed (viewed/edited) using a Human
Interface Module (HIM). Refer to Enhanced PowerFlex 7-Class Human
Interface Module (HIM) User Manual, publication 20HIM-UM001, for
information on using the HIM to view and edit parameters. As an alternative,
programming can also be performed using DriveTools™ software and a personal
computer.
Topic Page
About Parameters 22
Parameter Access Level 23
How Drive Parameters are Organized 24
How Option Module Parameters are Organized 44
About Parameters To configure a drive module to operate in a specific way, certain drive parameters
may have to be configured appropriately. Three types of parameters exist:
• Numeric Parameters
These parameters have a single numeric value (such as 1750.0 RPM).
• ENUM Parameters
These parameters allow a selection from 2 or more items. The LCD HIM
displays a text message for each item.
• Indirect Parameters
These parameters, represented by a maximum value of 159999 or
159999.15, are used to create assignments or to select either a data source
or destination. The first two digits are used to select a port. The next four
digits select a parameter number. If applicable, the two digits following the
decimal point select a bit. For example, to assign an I/O option module in
port 4 using a run contact on digital input 0, parameter 163 [DI Run] is set
to 040001.00.
• Bit Parameters
These parameters have individual bits associated with features or
conditions. If the bit is 0, the feature is off or the condition is false. If the
bit is 1, the feature is on or the condition is true.
The following table shows how each parameter type is presented in this manual.
Read-Write
No. Display Name Values
Data Type
Full Name
Description
Digin Functions Vector Regulator Motor Data
Digital In 2
Digital In 1
Digital In 0
Options
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
0 = Condition False
Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
1 = Condition True
Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Parameter Access Level Three parameter access level options are selectable by P301 [Access Level].
• Option 0 “Basic” is the most limited view that only displays commonly
utilized parameters and options.
• Option 1 “Advanced” is an expanded view that may be required to access
more advanced drive features.
• Option 2 “Expert” provides a comprehensive view of the drive’s entire
parameter set.
How Drive Parameters are DriveExecutive™ programming software displays parameters in “Linear List” or
“File Group Parameter” format. Viewing the parameters in “File Group
Organized Parameter” format simplifies programming by grouping parameters that are used
for similar functions. There are eleven files. Each file is divided into multiple
groups of parameters.
Motor Control Motor Data Motor NP Volts 25 Motor NP Hertz 27 Mtr NP Pwr Units 29 Motor Poles 31
Motor
Control
Motor NP Amps 26 Motor NP RPM 28 Motor NP Power 30
Mtr Ctrl Options Motor Ctrl Mode 35 Maximum Freq 37 PWM Frequency 38 IPM Stc OfsTst K (1) 1660
Maximum Voltage 36 (1) Frames 1…7 Only
Speed Control Speed Limits Max Fwd Speed 520 Max Rev Speed 521 Min Fwd Speed 522 Min Rev Speed 523
Speed
Control Speed Ramp Rates Accel Time 1 535 Decel Time 1 537 Jog Acc Dec Time 539
Accel Time 2 536 Decel Time 2 538
Speed Reference Spd Ref A Sel 545 Spd Ref B Stpt 551 MOP Init Select 566 Preset Speed 4 574
Spd Ref A Stpt 546 Spd Ref B AnlgHi 552 MOP Init Stpt 567 Preset Speed 5 575
Spd Ref A AnlgHi 547 Spd Ref B AnlgLo 553 Preset Speed 1 571 Preset Speed 6 576
Spd Ref A AnlgLo 548 Jog Speed 1 556 Preset Speed 2 572 Preset Speed 7 577
Spd Ref B Sel 550 Jog Speed 2 557 Preset Speed 3 573
Torque Control Torque Reference Trq Ref A Sel 675 Trq Ref A AnlgLo 678 Trq Ref B Stpt 681 Trq Ref B Mult 684
Torque
Control Trq Ref A Stpt 676 Trq Ref A Mult 679 Trq Ref B AnlgHi 682 Selected Trq Ref 685
Trq Ref A AnlgHi 677 Trq Ref B Sel 680 Trq Ref B AnlgLo 683
Diagnostics Status Speed Ref Source 930 Last Stop Source 932 Last StrtInhibit 934 Drive Status 2 936
Diagnos
tics
Last StartSource 931 Start Inhibits 933 Drive Status 1 935 Condition Sts 1 937
Fault/Alarm Info Minor Flt Cfg 950 Last Fault Code 951 Fault Status A 952 Fault Status B 953
Inverter Common parameters are only used by PowerFlex 755 Frame 8 and larger
drives.
Parameter descriptions begin on page 212.
File Group Parameters
Inverter Common System Ratings Sys Rated Amps 1 I1 Rated Amps 3 I3 Rated Amps 5
Inverter
Comm
Sys Rated Volts 2 I2 Rated Amps 4
on
Status Online Status 10 Fault Status 12 Alarm Status 13
Metering Ground Current 18 Recfg Acknowledg 20 Effctv I Rating 21
Testpoints Testpoint Sel 1 30 Testpoint Val 1 31 Testpoint Sel 2 32 Testpoint Val 2 33
Inverter n parameters are only used by PowerFlex 755 Frame 8 and larger drives.
Parameter descriptions begin on page 214.
File Group Parameters
Inverter n Status I1 Fault Status 105 I2 Fault Status 205 I3 Fault Status 305
Inverter
n
I1 Alarm Status 107 I2 Alarm Status 207 I3 Alarm Status 307
Metering I1 U Phase Curr 115 I2 U Phase Curr 215 I3 U Phase Curr 315
I1 V Phase Curr 116 I2 V Phase Curr 216 I32 V Phase Curr 316
I1 W Phase Curr 117 I2 W Phase Curr 217 I3 W Phase Curr 317
I1 Gnd Current 118 I2 Gnd Current 218 I3 Gnd Current 318
I1 DC Bus Volt 119 I2 DC Bus Volt 219 I3 DC Bus Volt 319
I1 Heatsink Temp 120 I2 Heatsink Temp 220 I3 Heatsink Temp 320
I1 IGBT Temp 121 I2 IGBT Temp 221 I3 IGBT Temp 321
I1 HSFan Speed 124 I2 HSFan Speed 224 I3 HSFan Speed 324
I1 InFan 1 Speed 125 I2 InFan 1 Speed 225 I3 InFan 1 Speed 325
I1 InFan 2 Speed 126 I2 InFan 2 Speed 226 I3 InFan 2 Speed 326
Predictive Main I1 PredMainReset 127 I2 PredMainReset 227 I3 PredMainReset 327
I1 HSFanElpsdLif 128 I2 HSFanElpsdLif 228 I3 HSFanElpsdLif 328
I1 InFanElpsdLif 129 I2 InFanElpsdLif 229 I3 InFanElpsdLif 329
Testpoints I1 Testpt Sel 1 140 I2 Testpt Sel 1 240 I3 Testpt Sel 1 340
I1 Testpt Val 1 141 I2 Testpt Val 1 241 I3 Testpt Val 1 341
I1 Testpt Sel 2 142 I2 Testpt Sel 2 242 I3 Testpt Sel 2 342
I1 Testpt Val 2 143 I2 Testpt Val 2 243 I3 Testpt Val 2 343
Converter Common parameters are only used by AC input PowerFlex 755 Frame
8 and larger drives.
Parameter descriptions begin on page 217.
File Group Parameters
Converter System Ratings Sys Rated Amps 1 C1 Rated Amps 3 C3 Rated Amps 5
Common Sys Rated Volts 2 C2 Rated Amps 4
Conver
ter Com
mon Status Online Status 10 Fault Status 12 Alarm Status 13
Configuration Gnd Cur Flt Lvl 16 Converter Actn 17
Metering L1 Phase Curr 20 L3 Phase Curr 22 SCR Temp 24
L2 Phase Curr 21 Heatsink Temp 23 Gate Board Temp 25
Testpoints Testpoint Sel 1 30 Testpoint Sel 2 32
Testpoint Val 1 31 Testpoint Val 2 33
Converter n parameters are only used by AC input PowerFlex 755 Frame 8 and
larger drives.
Parameter descriptions begin on page 220.
File Group Parameters
Converter n Status C1 Fault Status1 105 C2 Fault Status1 205 C3 Fault Status1 305
Convert
er n
C1 Fault Status2 106 C2 Fault Status2 206 C3 Fault Status2 306
C1 Alarm Status1 107 C2 Alarm Status1 207 C3 Alarm Status1 307
Metering C1 L1 Phase Curr 115 C2 L1 Phase Curr 215 C3 L1 Phase Curr 315
C1 L2 Phase Curr 116 C2 L2 Phase Curr 216 C3 L2 Phase Curr 316
C1 L3 Phase Curr 117 C2 L3 Phase Curr 217 C3 L3 Phase Curr 317
C1 Gnd Current 118 C2 Gnd Current 218 C3 Gnd Current 318
C1 DC Bus Volt 119 C2 DC Bus Volt 219 C3 DC Bus Volt 319
C1 Heatsink Temp 120 C2 Heatsink Temp 220 C3 Heatsink Temp 320
C1 SCR Temp 121 C2 SCR Temp 221 C3 SCR Temp 321
C1 GateBoardTemp 122 C2 GateBoardTemp 222 C3 GateBoardTemp 322
C1 AC Line Freq 123 C2 AC Line Freq 223 C3 AC Line Freq 323
C1 L12 Line Volt 125 C2 L12 Line Volt 225 C3 L12 Line Volt 325
C1 L23 Line Volt 126 C2 L23 Line Volt 226 C3 L23 Line Volt 326
C1 L31 Line Volt 127 C2 L31 Line Volt 227 C3 L31 Line Volt 327
Predictive Main C1 PredMainReset 137 C2 PredMainReset 237 C3 PredMainReset 337
C1 CbFanElpsdLif 138 C2 CbFanElpsdLif 238 C3 CbFanElpsdLif 338
Testpoints C1 Testpt Sel 1 140 C2 Testpt Sel 1 240 C3 Testpt Sel 1 340
C1 Testpt Val 1 141 C2 Testpt Val 1 241 C3 Testpt Val 1 341
C1 Testpt Sel 2 142 C2 Testpt Sel 2 242 C3 Testpt Sel 2 342
C1 Testpt Val 2 143 C2 Testpt Val 2 243 C3Testpt Val 2 343
Precharge Common parameters are only used by DC input PowerFlex 755 Frame
8 and larger drives.
Parameter descriptions begin on page 223.
File Group Parameters
Precharge System Ratings Sys Rated Amps 1 P1 Rated Amps 3 P3 Rated Amps 5
Common Sys Rated Volts 2 P2 Rated Amps 4
Precha
rge Comm
on Status Online Status 10 Fault Status 12 Alarm Status 13
Metering Gate Board Temp 25 Main DC Bus Volt 18
Testpoints Testpoint Sel 1 30 Testpoint Val 1 31 Testpoint Sel 2 32 Testpoint Val 2 33
Precharge n parameters are only used by DC input PowerFlex 755 Frame 8 and
larger drives.
Parameter descriptions begin on page 225.
File Group Parameters
Precharge n Status P1 Board Status 104 P2 Board Status 204 P3 Board Status 304
Prechar
g en
P1 Fault Status1 105 P2 Fault Status1 205 P3 Fault Status1 305
P1 Fault Status2 106 P2 Fault Status2 206 P3 Fault Status2 306
P1 Alarm Status1 107 P2 Alarm Status1 207 P3 Alarm Status1 307
Metering P1 DC Bus Volts 110 P2 DC Bus Volts 210 P3 DC Bus Volts 310
P1 Main DC Volts 111 P2 Main DC Volts 211 P3 Main DC Volts 311
P1 240VSplyVolts 112 P2 240VSplyVolts 212 P3 240VSplyVolts 312
P1 GateBoardTemp 122 P2 GateBoardTemp 222 P3 GateBoardTemp 322
Predictive Main P1 PredMainReset 137 P2 PredMainReset 237 P3 PredMainReset 337
P1 CbFanElpsdLif 138 P2 CbFanElpsdLif 238 P3 CbFanElpsdLif 338
Testpoints P1 Testpt Sel 1 140 P2 Testpt Sel 1 240 P3 Testpt Sel 1 340
P1 Testpt Val 1 141 P2 Testpt Val 1 241 P3 Testpt Val 1 341
P1 Testpt Sel 2 142 P2 Testpt Sel 2 242 P3 Testpt Sel 2 342
P1 Testpt Val 2 143 P2 Testpt Val 2 243 P3 Testpt Val 2 343
How Option Module Option module parameters are only available when that option is installed in a
host drive. To view and edit option module parameters, select the port number of
Parameters are Organized the device you want to access from the Status Screen.
This chapter lists and describes the PowerFlex 750-Series Port 0 drive parameters.
The parameters can be programmed (viewed/edited) using a Human Interface
Module (HIM). Refer to Enhanced PowerFlex 7-Class Human Interface Module
(HIM) User Manual, publication 20HIM-UM001, for information on using the
HIM to view and edit parameters. As an alternative, programming can also be
performed using DriveTools™ software and a personal computer.
Parameter File Page
Drive (Port 0) Monitor File 50
Drive (Port 0) Motor Control File 52
Drive (Port 0) Feedback & I/O File 66
Drive (Port 0) Cfg File 82
Drive (Port 0) Protection File 96
Drive (Port 0) Speed Control File 109
Drive (Port 0) Torque Control File 124
Drive (Port 0) Position Control File 131
Drive (Port 0) Communication File 146
Drive (Port 0) Diagnostics File 153
Drive (Port 0) Applications File 171
Read-Write
No. Display Name Values
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
Amount of current that is out of phase with the fundamental voltage component. Min/Max: –/+P21 [Rated Amps] x 2
7 Output Current Units: Amps RO Real
Output Current Default: Based on Drive Rating
The total output current present at terminals T1, T2, and T3 (U, V & W). Min/Max: 0.00 / P21 [Rated Amps] x 2
8 Output Voltage Units: V AC RO Real
Output Voltage Default: Based on Drive Rating
Output voltage present at terminals T1, T2, and T3 (U, V & W). Min/Max: 0.00 / P20 [Rated Volts] x 1.15
9 Output Power Units: kW RO Real
Output Power Default: 0.00
Output power present at terminals T1, T2, and T3 (U, V & W). Min/Max: 0.00 / 3000.00
10 Output Powr Fctr Default: 0.00 RO Real
Output Power Factor Min/Max: 0.00 / 1.00
Output power factor.
11 DC Bus Volts Units: V DC RO Real
Direct Current Bus Volts Default: Based on Drive Rating
DC bus voltage. Min/Max: 0.00 / P20 [Rated Volts] x 2
12 DC Bus Memory Units: V DC RO Real
Direct Current Bus Memory Default: Based on Drive Rating
A six-minute average of P11 [DC Bus Volts] used to estimate the DC equivalent of the Min/Max: 0.00 / P20 [Rated Volts] x 2
input voltage. Automatically initialized upon power-up or precharge, continually
updated during normal operation, and is used to trigger a power loss condition. Use
P464 [DC Bus Mem Reset] to reset this parameter.
13 Elapsed MWH Units: MWh RO Real
Elapsed Megawatt Hour Default: 0.000
Accumulated output energy of the drive. Use P336 [Reset Meters] to reset this Min/Max: 0.000 / 4294967296.000
parameter.
Read-Write
No. Display Name Values
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
Read-Write
No. Display Name Values
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
Read-Write
No. Display Name Values
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
Rated RPM shown on the motor nameplate. Note: The value of this parameter must Min/Max: 1.0 / 40000.0
Motor Data
reflect the slip speed of the motor. For example, for a 60 Hz, 4 pole motor, a value of
1800 is synchronous speed, and 1750 is slip speed.
29 Mtr NP Pwr Units Default: Based on Drive Rating RW 32-bit
Motor Nameplate Power Units Options: 0 – HP Integer
Power units shown on the motor nameplate. 1 – kW
Read-Write
No. Display Name Values
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
Read-Write
No. Display Name Values
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
AsyncPWMLock
Common Mode
EnclsTrqProv (2)
Options
PWM FreqLock
Xsistor Diag (1)
Trq ModeStop
DB WhileStop
Trq ModeJog
Zero TrqStop
RS Adaption
Jerk Select
Elect Stab
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Not Used
Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 1
Bit 32 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
(1) 753 drive default is 1 = Enabled.
755 drive default is 0 = Disabled.
Bit 0 “Zero TrqStop” – Configures stopped condition when in torque mode. 0 = wait for zero speed before shutting off drive output, 1 = wait for zero torque before
shutting off drive output.
MOTOR CONTROL
Mtr Ctrl Options
Bit 1 “Trq ModeStop” – Configures stopping behavior when in torque mode. 0 = remain in torque mode, 1 = switch to speed mode
Bit 2 “Trq ModeJog” – Configures jogging behavior when in torque mode. 0 = remain in torque mode, 1 = switch to speed mode
Bit 3 “EnclsTrqProv” – Enables encoderless mode when using the torque prove function. 0 = Disabled, 1 = Enabled. Bits 0 and 1 of P1100 [Trq Prove Cfg] must also
be set to use this mode.
Bit 4 “Mtr Lead Rev” – Reverses the phase rotation of the applied voltage, effectively reversing the motor leads. 0 = Not Reversed, 1 = Reversed
Bit 5 “Reflect Wave” – Enables reflected wave voltage protection for long motor cables. 0 = Disabled, 1 = Enabled
Bit 6 “RS Adaption” – Adapts for changes in motor stator resistance due to motor temperature. Active only in FV motor control mode with feedback. 0 = Disabled, 1
= Enabled
Bit 7 “PWM Type Sel” – Configures 3 Phase / 2 Phase switching of the power devices. 0 = 3 Phase modulation with auto switchover to 2 phase modulation. 1 = Full
time 3 phase modulation (no switchover)
Bit 8 “AsyncPWMLock” – Configures Synchronous / Asynchronous switching of the power devices. 0 = Automatically changes between synchronous and
asynchronous. 1 = Asynchronous switching only.
Bit 9 “PWM FreqLock” – Configures switching frequency of the power devices while in FV motor control mode without feedback. 0 = switching frequency
automatically reduces to 2 kHz at low speeds (best performance), 1 = switching frequency does not reduce (setting used when switching frequency reduction is
undesirable)
Bit 10 “DB WhileStop” – Enables operation of the dynamic brake transistor while the drive is stopped. 0 = Disabled, 1 = Enabled
Bit 11 “Elect Stab” – Enables stability control for Sensorless Vector and V/Hz motor control modes. 0 = Disabled, 1 = Enabled
Bit 12 “Xsistor Diag” – Enables power transistor diagnostic test at each start command. Recommended to set to Disabled if an output filter is installed with the
drive. Refer to publication PFLEX-AT002 for additional information. 0 = Disabled, 1 = Enabled
Bit 13 “Common Mode” – Enables the common mode reduction modulator to reduce the common mode voltage generated by the pulse width modulated inverter.
Bit 15 “Jerk Select” – Limits the rate of change to the velocity reference for improved current limiting. This setting applies only to Sensorless Vector and V/Hz motor
control modes. 0 = Disabled (0.0 second ramp time achievable), 1 = Enabled (0.0 second ramp time prevented)
Read-Write
No. Display Name Values
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
The proportional term used in the voltage regulator which controls the removal of flux in
the motor.
47 Econ At Ref Ki Default: 305.0 RW Real
Economize At Reference Ki Min/Max: 0.0 / 100000.0
Integral gain that determines the response of the output voltage when P35 [Motor Ctrl
Mode] option 2 “Induct Econ” is selected and the output frequency is at its reference.
48 Econ AccDec Ki Default: 200.0 RW Real
Economize Acceleration/Deceleration Ki Min/Max: 0.0 / 100000.0
Integral gain that determines the response of the output voltage when P35 [Motor Ctrl
Mode] option 2 “Induct Econ” is selected and the output frequency is either accelerating
or decelerating to a reference.
49 Econ AccDec Kp Units: V/A RW Real
Economize Acceleration/Deceleration Kp Default: 100.0
Proportional gain that determines the response of the output voltage when P35 [Motor Min/Max: 0.0 / 1000000.0
Ctrl Mode] option 2 “Induct Econ” is selected and the output frequency is either
accelerating or decelerating to a reference.
50 Stability Filter Units: Secs RW Real
Stability Filter Default: 5162.22
The filter time constant for the angle and voltage stability control. Min/Max: 0.00 / 1000000.00
51 Stab Volt Gain Default: 5322.22 RW Real
Stability Voltage Gain Min/Max: 0.00 / 10000000.00
The gain of the voltage stability control function. Not active when any FV motor control
mode is selected with speed feedback.
52 Stab Angle Gain Default: 790.43 RW Real
Stability Angle Gain Min/Max: 0.00 / 10000000.00
The gain of the electrical angle stability control function. Not active when any FV motor
control mode is selected in P35 [Motor Ctrl Mode] with speed feedback.
Read-Write
No. Display Name Values
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
Read-Write
No. Display Name Values
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
Read-Write
No. Display Name Values
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
Read-Write
No. Display Name Values
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
Inertia Tune (4) – A temporary command that initiates an inertia test of the motor/load
combination. The motor will ramp up and down while the drive measures the amount of
inertia. This option only applies to FV modes selected in P35 [Motor Ctrl Mode]. Final
test results should be obtained with load coupled to the motor.
71 Autotune Torque Units: % RW Real
Autotune Torque Default: 50.00
The motor torque applied to the motor during the flux current and inertia tests. Min/Max: 0.00 / 200.00
73 IR Voltage Drop Units: Volt RW Real
IR Voltage Drop Default: Based on Drive Rating
Value of voltage drop across the resistance of the motor stator at rated motor current. Min/Max: 0.00 / Based on Drive Rating and Voltage
Used only when P35 [Motor Ctrl Mode] is set to 1 “Induction SV”, 2 “Induct Econ”, or 3 Class
“Induction FV.” This parameter cannot be changed unless P70 [Autotune] is set to 0
“Ready.”
74 Ixo Voltage Drop Units: V AC RW Real
Ixo Voltage Drop Default: Based on Drive Rating and Voltage Class
Value of voltage drop across the leakage inductance of the motor at rated motor current. Min/Max: 0.00 / P25 [Motor NP Volts]
Used only when P35 [Motor Ctrl Mode] is set to 3 “Induction FV.” This parameter cannot
be changed unless P70 [Autotune] is set to 0 “Ready.”
75 Flux Current Ref Units: Amps RW Real
Flux Current Reference Default: P21 [Rated Amps] x 0.35
Value of amps for full motor flux. This parameter cannot be changed unless P70 Min/Max: 0.00 / P21 [Rated Amps] x 0.995
[Autotune] is set to 0 “Ready.”
76 Total Inertia Units: Secs RW Real
Total Inertia Default: 2.00
Time in seconds for a motor coupled to a load to accelerate from zero to base speed at Min/Max: 0.01 / 600.00
rated motor torque. Calculated during auto-tune. Only use this parameter when P35
[Motor Ctrl Mode] is set to 3 “Induction FV.”
Read-Write
No. Display Name Values
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
This parameter also includes two options for PM FV mode selected by P35 [Motor Ctrl Mode].
IdsCmdFFwdEn(1)
Options
VCmdPhShftEn
PMStabAnglEn
AutoOfstTest
IPM Vqs Disa
IPMTqTrmEn
StaticTestEn
Vqs Reg En
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
0 = Disable
Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 = Enable
Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
(1) 755 drives only.
Bit 0 “AutoOfstTest” – Enables the PM Offset test to be executed before the drive runs normally after a power cycle or drive reset. Required when the feedback
device is not an absolute feedback device. Cannot be enabled if Bit 2 is enabled. Allow for up to 90° of shaft rotation. The value set in P83 [PM Ofst Tst Cur] may need
to be increased to complete the test. If shaft rotation is not possible, set Bits 0 and 1 to perform a static test at every start.
Bit 1 “Vqs Reg En” – Enables the Vqs regulator.
Bit 2 “StaticTestEn” – Enables the Static test to be executed before the drive starts. Cannot be enabled if Bit 0 is enabled.
Bit 3 “PMStabAnglEn” – Enables the Permanent Magnet Stability Angle regulator. Used for PM FV Encoderless when P35 [Motor Ctrl Mode] = 6 “PM FV” and P125
[Pri Vel Fdbk Sel] = Open Loop.
Bit 4 “IPM Vqs Disa” – Disables Vqs regulator when P35 [Motor Ctrl Mode] = 10 “IPM FV.”
Bit 5 “IPMTqTrmEn” – Enables Torque Trim when P35 [Motor Ctrl Mode] = 10 “IPM FV.”
Bit 6 “VCmdPhShftEn” – Enables the enhancement function on the voltage command calculation in all control modes.
Bit 7 “IdsCmdFFwdEn” – Enables the feed forward term calculation for the Vqs regulator in PM with feedback mode.
81 PM PriEnc Offset Default: 0 RW 32-bit
Permanent Magnet Motor Primary Encoder Offset Min/Max: 0 / 1023 Integer
The amount of offset between the primary feedback encoder counts, and the rotor flux
center position of the PM motor. A value of 1024 is equal to 360 electrical degrees. This
parameter is updated during the PM Offset test which runs at the first start after a power
cycle/ system reset (P80 [PM Cfg] Bit 0 = 1) and during autotune in PM FV mode.
Read-Write
No. Display Name Values
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
Read-Write
No. Display Name Values
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
Read-Write
No. Display Name Values
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
Proportional gain of the current regulator. Can be adjusted when P95 is set to zero. The 0.0 / 50000.0 755
default values for P95, P96, and P97 typically provide excellent performance, and do not
normally need to be adjusted.
97 VCL Cur Reg Ki Default: 60.0 RW Real
Vector Closed Loop Current Regulator Integral Gain Min/Max: 0.0 / 50000.0 753
Integral gain of the current regulator. Can be adjusted when P95 is set to zero. The 0.0 / 50000.0 755
default values for P95, P96, and P97 typically provide excellent performance, and do not
normally need to be adjusted.
98 VEncdls FReg Kp Units: Hz/A RW Real
Encoderless Vector Frequency Regulator Proportional Gain Default: 524.0
Represents electrical angle compensation dependent on motor cable and PWM Min/Max: 0.0 / 100000.0
Frequency. Determined during autotuning when P35 [Motor Ctrl Mode] is set to one of
the FV modes without speed feedback.
99 VEncdls FReg Ki Units: Hz/A RW Real
Vector Regulator
MOTOR CONTROL
Read-Write
No. Display Name Values
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
Read-Write
No. Display Name Values
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
Read-Write
No. Display Name Values
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
selected by P125 [Pri Vel Fdbk Sel]. The purpose of this filter is to reduce the level of 2 – 100R/S Noise
Feedback
Read-Write
No. Display Name Values
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
Read-Write
No. Display Name Values
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
Read-Write
No. Display Name Values
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
ATTENTION: Equipment damage and/or personal injury may result if this parameter is used in an inappropriate
application. Do not use this function without considering applicable local, national and international codes, standards,
regulations, or industry guidelines.
Read-Write
No. Display Name Values
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
Assigns a digital input used to jog the drive in the reverse direction at the speed of P557
[Jog Speed 2].
172 DI Manual Ctrl Default: 0.00 RW 32-bit
Digital Input Manual Control Min/Max: 0.00 / 159999.15 Integer
Assigns a digital input used to command manual control. Start, jog, and direction are
under the digital input’s exclusive control. P563 [DI ManRef Sel] is the source of the
speed reference unless overwritten by P328 [Alt Man Ref Sel].
173 DI Speed Sel 0 Default: 0.00 RW 32-bit
174 DI Speed Sel 1 Min/Max: 0.00 / 159999.15 Integer
175 DI Speed Sel 2
Digital Input Speed Select n
Assigns digital inputs used to select between speed references as follows:
Input Status (1 = Input Actuated) Auto Reference Source
DI Speed Sel 2 DI Speed Sel 1 DI Speed Sel 0 (Parameter)
0 0 0 Reference A (P545)
0 0 1 Reference A (P545)
0 1 0 Reference B (P550)
0 1 1 Preset Speed 3 (P573)
1 0 0 Preset Speed 4 (P574)
1 0 1 Preset Speed 5 (P575)
1 1 0 Preset Speed 6 (P576)
1 1 1 Preset Speed 7 (P577)
Read-Write
No. Display Name Values
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
P311 1 0
P312 1 1
Read-Write
No. Display Name Values
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
Read-Write
No. Display Name Values
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
position regulator. The mode of operation is indicated by parameter 935 [Drive Status 1]
Bit 21 “Speed Mode,” Bit 22 “PositionMode” and Bit 23 “Torque Mode.”
When the drive is operating as a speed regulator, the resulting action is to override the
speed reference and decelerate to Preset Speed 1. This function is usually used with a
limit switch and initiates the slowing down process prior to encountering the End Limit.
When the drive is operating as a torque regulator, the drive ignores this signal and
continues operating at its torque reference.
When the drive is operating as a position regulator, the drive ignores this signal and
continues moving towards its position reference.
200 DI PHdwr OvrTrvl Default: 0.00 RW 32-bit
Digital Input Positive Hardware Over Travel Min/Max: 0.00 / 159999.15 Integer
Assigns a digital input used to trigger a Positive Hardware Over-travel.
The resulting action is to immediately fault and produce zero torque. After the drive is
stopped, the condition will need to be cleared and the fault will need to be reset. The
drive will restart (if given a new start command), and continue operation. It will follow
any speed reference, position reference or torque reference. The drive’s direction is not
modified or limited after the restart.
201 DI NHdwr OvrTrvl Default: 0.00 RW 32-bit
Digital Input Negative Hardware Over Travel Min/Max: 0.00 / 159999.15 Integer
Assigns a digital input used to trigger a Negative Hardware Over-travel.
The resulting action is to immediately fault and produce zero torque. After the drive is
stopped, the condition will need to be cleared and the fault will need to be reset. The
drive will restart (if given a new start command), and continue operation. It will follow
any speed reference, position reference or torque reference. The drive’s direction is not
modified or limited after the restart.
Read-Write
No. Display Name Values
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
Digital In 0
Options
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 = Condition False
1 = Condition True
Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Read-Write
No. Display Name Values
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
Options
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Options
Input 2
Input 1
Read-Write
No. Display Name Values
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
Relay Out 0
Trans Out 0
Options
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
0 = Condition False
Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
1 = Condition True
Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Relay Out 0
Trans Out 0
Options
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
0 = Condition False
Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
1 = Condition True
Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
FEEDBACK & I/O
Digital Outputs
Options
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Read-Write
No. Display Name Values
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
AbsGrtThanEq
Abs Less Than
Options
Bit 0 “Less Than” – Level source is less than the level value.
Bit 1 “Grt Than Equ” – Level source is greater than or equal to the level value.
Bit 2 “Abs Less Than” – Absolute value of the level source is less than the absolute value of the level value.
Bit 3 “AbsGrtThanEq” – Absolute value of the level source is greater than or equal to the absolute value of the level value.
234 753 RO0 On Time Units: Secs RW Real
Relay Output 0 On Time Default: 0.00
Sets the “ON Delay” time for the digital outputs. This is the time between the occurrence Min/Max: 0.00 / 600.00
of a condition and activation of the relay.
235 753 RO0 Off Time Units: Secs RW Real
Relay Output 0 Off Time Default: 0.00
Sets the “OFF Delay” time for the digital outputs. This is the time between the Min/Max: 0.00 / 600.00
disappearance of a condition and de-activation of the relay.
FEEDBACK & I/O
Digital Outputs
Options
Grt Than Equ
Less Than
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Bit 0 “Less Than” – Level source is less than the level value.
Bit 1 “Grt Than Equ” – Level source is greater than or equal to the level value.
Bit 2 “Abs Less Than” – Absolute value of the level source is less than the absolute value of the level value.
Bit 3 “AbsGrtThanEq” – Absolute value of the level source is greater than or equal to the absolute value of the level value.
Read-Write
No. Display Name Values
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
Sets the “ON Delay” time for the digital outputs. This is the time between the occurrence Min/Max: 0 / 159999
of a condition and activation of the relay or transistor.
245 753 TO0 Off Time Units: Secs RW Real
Transistor Output 0 Off Time Default: 0.0
Sets the “OFF Delay” time for the digital outputs. This is the time between the Min/Max: –/+1000000.0
disappearance of a condition and de-activation of the relay or transistor.
Read-Write
No. Display Name Values
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
Options
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
PTC Ok
0 = Condition False
Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
1 = Condition True
Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Full Name
Group
Description
File
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Options
Analog
Read-Write
No. Display Name Values
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
Reserved
Options
Loss 0
Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 = Loss not Present
1 = Loss Present
Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0.000 / 20.000 mA
261 753 Anlg In0 Hi Units: Volt RW Real
Analog Input 0 High mA
Sets the highest input value to the analog input scaling block. Default: 10.000 Volts
20.000 mA
Min/Max: –/+10.000 Volts
0.000 / 20.000 mA
262 753 Anlg In0 Lo Units Volts RW Real
Analog Input 0 Low mA
Sets the lowest input value to the analog input scaling block. Default: 0.000 Volts
0.000 mA
Min/Max: –/+10.000 Volts
0.000 / 20.000 mA
263 753 Anlg In0 LssActn Default: 0 = “Ignore” RW 32-bit
Analog Input 0 Loss Action Options: 0 = “Ignore” Integer
Selects drive action when an analog signal loss is detected. Signal loss is defined as an 1 = “Alarm”
analog signal less than 1V or 2mA. The signal loss event ends and normal operation 2 = “Flt Minor”
resumes when the input signal level is greater than or equal to 1.5V or 3mA. 3 = “FltCoastStop”
“Ignore” (0) – No action is taken. 4 = “Flt RampStop”
“Alarm” (1) – Type 1 alarm indicated. 5 = “Flt CL Stop”
“Flt Minor” (2) – Minor fault indicated. If running, drive continues to run. 6 = “Hold Input”
Enable with P950 [Minor Flt Cfg]. If not enabled, acts like a major fault.
7 = “Set Input Lo”
“FltCoastStop” (3) – Major fault indicated. Coast to Stop.
8 = “Set Input Hi”
“Flt RampStop” (4) – Major fault indicated. Ramp to Stop.
“Flt CL Stop” (5) – Major fault indicated. Current Limit Stop.
“Hold Input” (6) – Holds input at last value.
“Set Input Lo” (7) – Sets input to P262 [Anlg In0 Lo].
“Set Input Hi” (8) – Sets input to P261 [Anlg In0 Hi].
Read-Write
No. Display Name Values
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
0.000 / 20.000 mA
265 753 Anlg In0 Filt Gn Default: 1.00 RW Real
Analog Input 0 Filter Gain Min/Max: –/+5.00
Sets the analog input filter gain. The default setting represents no filtering.
266 753 Anlg In0 Filt BW Default: 0.0 RW Real
Analog Input 0 Filter Bandwidth Min/Max: 0.0 / 500.0
Sets the analog input filter bandwidth. The default setting represents no filtering.
Read-Write
No. Display Name Values
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
Options
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Options
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Analog Outputs
FEEDBACK & I/O
0 = Signed
Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
1 = Absolute
Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Read-Write
No. Display Name Values
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
Read-Write
No. Display Name Values
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
Relay Out 0
Options
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Master
0 = Condition False
Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
1 = Condition True
Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Read-Write
No. Display Name Values
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
This parameter is only reset when Set Defaults “All” (not recommended) is executed.
302 Language Default: 0 = “Not Selected” RW 32-bit
Language Options: 0 = “Not Selected” Integer
Select display language. 1 = “English”
This parameter is only reset when Set Defaults “All” (not recommended) is executed. 2 = “French”
3 = “Spanish”
4 = “Italian”
5 = “German”
6 = “Japanese”
7 = “Portuguese”
8 = “Chinese”
9 = “Reserved”
10 = “Reserved”
11 = “Korean”
Read-Write
No. Display Name Values
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
If the setting of this parameter is changed, check the setting of P422 [Current Limit 1]
and 423 [Current Limit 2].
This parameter is only reset when Set Defaults “All” (not recommended) is executed.
For Frame 2 drives rated under 7.5 kW (10 Hp) this parameter only displays the normal
duty rating but will have heavy duty overload ratings.
Changing the setting of this parameter will limit the motor current rating so the drive
can supply this overload for the motor.
308 Direction Mode Default: 0 = “Unipolar” RW 32-bit
Direction Mode Options: 0 = “Unipolar” Integer
Selects method for changing direction. 1 = “Bipolar”
2 = “Rev Disable”
Mode Direction Change
Unipolar Drive Logic (Forward/Reverse bit.)
Bipolar Sign of Reference
Rev Disable Not Changeable
ATTENTION: Enabling the Bipolar Direction Mode can cause unexpected direction changes. Equipment damage and/or
personal injury can result if this parameter is used in an inappropriate application. Do Not use this function without
considering all applicable local, national, and international codes standards, regulations, or industry guidelines.
Read-Write
No. Display Name Values
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
In P935 [Drive Status 1] three bits are provided that indicate the regulation mode of the 9 = “Psn PLL” 755
drive when it is running. Bit 21 “Speed Mode” will become set when the drive is running 10 = “Psn Direct”
with the speed regulator active. Similarly, Bit 22 “PositionMode” and Bit 23 “Torque 11 = “Psn SpdlOrnt” 755
Mode” indicate when their respective regulation modes are active.
Under some conditions, the active torque mode may be forced into speed mode (1) All options, except “Speed Reg,” require
regardless of the setting of Speed/Torque/Position. The P313 [Actv SpTqPs Mode] the drive to be set to a Flux Vector motor
parameter will indicate this and will reflect the mode selection that is in use. control mode. See P35 [Motor Ctrl Mode].
Possible selections for Speed/Torque/Position are:
“Zero Torque” (0) – Drive operates as a torque regulator with P685 [Selected Trq Ref]
forced to a constant value of zero torque.
“Speed Reg” (1) – Drive operates as a speed regulator. P685 [Selected Trq Ref] comes
from P660 [SReg Output] plus P699 [Inertia Comp Out].
“Torq Reg” (2) – Drive operates as a torque regulator. P685 [Selected Trq Ref] comes
from P4 [Commanded Trq]. Under some conditions such as jogging or performing a
ramp to stop operation, the drive will automatically bypass this selection and
temporarily switch to speed regulation mode.
“SLAT Min” (3) – Drive operates in “Speed Limited Adjustable Torque – Minimum select”
Control Cfg
mode. This is a special mode of operation used primarily in web handling applications.
DRIVE CFG
The drive will typically operate as a torque regulator, provided that the P4 [Commanded
Trq] value is algebraically smaller in value than the speed regulator’s output. The drive
may automatically enter speed regulation mode, based on conditions within the speed
regulator and the magnitude of the speed regulator’s output relative to the torque
reference.
“SLAT Max” (4) – Drive operates in “Speed Limited Adjustable Torque – Maximum
select” mode. This is a special mode of operation used primarily in web handling
applications. The drive will typically operate as a torque regulator, provided that the P4
[Commanded Trq] value is algebraically larger in value than the speed regulator’s
output. The drive may automatically enter speed regulation mode, based on conditions
within the speed regulator and the magnitude of the speed regulator’s output relative to
the torque reference.
“Sum” (5) – Drive operates as a speed regulator. P685 [Selected Trq Ref] comes from
P660 [SReg Output] plus torque adders summed with P4 [Commanded Trq].
“Profilier” (6) – Drive uses the Speed Profiler / Position Indexer function. The drive
operates as either a speed or position regulator. Mode of operation will depend on the
configuration of the Step Types in the Profiler / Indexer table. See page 413.
“Psn PTP” (7) – Drive operates as a position regulator. P685 [Selected Trq Ref] has the
same source as in Sum mode. The position control is active in Point-to-Point mode and
uses its Point-to-point position reference. To jog in the Position mode, set P635 [Spd
Options Ctrl] Bit 6.
“Psn Camming” (8) – Drive operates as a position regulator. P685 [Selected Trq Ref] has
the same source as in Sum mode. The position control is active in Position CAM mode
and uses its PCAM Planner position and speed reference.
“Psn PLL” (9) – Drive operates as a position regulator. P685 [Selected Trq Ref] has the
same source as in Sum mode. The position control is active in Position Phase Lock Loop
mode and uses its PLL Planner position and speed reference.
“Psn Direct” (10) – Drive operates as a position regulator. P685 [Selected Trq Ref] has
the same source as in Sum mode. The position control is active in Direct mode and uses
its Direct Position Reference.
“Psn SpdlOrnt” (11) – Drive operates in the positioning mode to position the load side of
a machine to P1582 [SO Setpoint]
Read-Write
No. Display Name Values
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
Read-Write
No. Display Name Values
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
Port 11 (1)
Port 10 (1)
Options
Reserved
Reserved
Digital In
Port 14
Port 13
Port 9
Port 8
Port 7
Port 6
Port 5
Port 4
Port 3
Port 2
Port 1
0 = Disabled
Default 0 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
1 = Enabled
Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
(1) 755 Frame 8 drives and larger only.
Options
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Digital In
Port 14
Port 6
Port 5
Port 4
Port 3
Port 2
Port 1
Default 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
(1) 755 drives only.
Auto Manual Ctrl
Options
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Digital In
Port 14
Port 6
Port 5
Port 4
Port 3
Port 2
Port 1
Default 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
(1) 755 drives only.
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Digital In
Options
Port 14
Port 13
Port 6
Port 5
Port 4
Port 3
Port 2
Port 1
Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Read-Write
No. Display Name Values
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
Reserved
Options
Port 3
Port 2
Port 1
0 = Disabled
Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
1 = Enabled
Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Read-Write
No. Display Name Values
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
Resets selected meters to zero. The value will automatically be returned to 0. 1 = “MWH and kWh”
“MWH and kWh” (1) – Resets P13 [Elapsed MWH], P14 [Elapsed kWH], P16 [Elpsd Mtr 2 = “Elapsed Time”
MWHrs], P17 [Elpsd Rgn MWHrs], P18 [Elpsd Mtr kWHrs], and P19 [Elpsd Rgn kWHrs].
“Elapsed Time” (2) – Resets P15 [Elapsed Run Time].
Read-Write
No. Display Name Values
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
ATTENTION: Equipment damage and/or personal injury may result if this parameter is used in an inappropriate
application. Do not use this function without considering applicable local, national and international codes, standards,
regulations or industry guidelines.
Read-Write
No. Display Name Values
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
AttmpsExhstd
Options
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 = Condition False
Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 1 = Condition True
Start Features
DRIVE CFG
ATTENTION: Equipment damage and/or personal injury may result if this parameter is used in an inappropriate
application. Do not use this function without considering applicable local, national and international codes, standards,
regulations or industry guidelines.
Read-Write
No. Display Name Values
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
ATTENTION: Enabling the Sleep/Wake function can cause unexpected machine operation during the Wake mode.
Equipment damage and/or personal injury can result if this parameter is used in an inappropriate application. Do Not use
this function without considering the information below. In addition, all applicable local, national, and international
codes, standards, regulations, or industry guidelines must be considered.
New Start or Run Cmd.(5) New Start or Run Cmd.(5) SleepWake RefSel Signal > Sleep Level(7)
Invert Mode:
SleepWake RefSel Signal < Sleep Level(8)
New Start or Run Command(5)
Enable Enable Closed Enable Closed Enable Closed Enable Closed
Wake Signal Wake Signal Wake Signal Direct Mode:
New Start or Run Cmd.(5) SleepWake RefSel Signal > Sleep Level(7)
Invert Mode:
SleepWake RefSel Signal < Sleep Level(8)
New Start or Run Command(5)
Run Run Closed New Run Cmd.(6) Run Closed New Run Command
Run Fwd Wake Signal Wake Signal Wake Signal Direct Mode:
Run Rev SleepWake RefSel Signal > Sleep Level(7)
Invert Mode:
SleepWake RefSel Signal < Sleep Level(8)
(1) When power is cycled, if all conditions are present after power is restored, restart will occur.
(2) If all conditions are present when [Sleep-Wake Mode] is “enabled,” the drive will start.
(3) The active speed reference. The Sleep/Wake function and the speed reference may be assigned to the same input.
(4) Cannot use P159 [DI Cur Lmt Stop] or P160 [DI Coast Stop] as the only Stop Input. This will cause the drive to go into a Sleep Cfg Alarm - Event No. 161.
(5) Command must be issued from HIM, terminal block, or network.
(6) Run Command must be cycled.
(7) SleepWake Ref Sel signal does not need to be greater than the wake level.
(8) SleepWake Ref Sel signal does not need to be less than the wake level.
Read-Write
No. Display Name Values
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
Read-Write
No. Display Name Values
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
reconnect function.
DRIVE CFG
P356 [FlyingStart Mode] = 2 “Sweep”: Proportional term used to control initial output
voltage.
363 FS Reconnect Dly Units: mSec RW Real
Flying Start Reconnect Delay Default: 50.00
Delay time used between the issued start command and the start of the reconnect Min/Max: 0.10 / 10000.00
function.
364 FS Msrmnt CurLvl Default: 44.97 RW Real
Flying Start Measurement Current Level Min/Max: 0.00 / 4096.00
P356 [FlyingStart Mode] = 1 “Enhanced”: Level of the current used during the
measurement stage of the reconnect function.
P356 [FlyingStart Mode] = 2 “Sweep”: Adjustment for the V/Hz end point. Used to
change the slope of the V/Hz curve during the frequency sweep.
Note: A value of 4096 is equal to drive rated current.
Read-Write
No. Display Name Values
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
5 = “Current Lmt”
“Coast” (0) – Power removed from motor, motor coasts to zero.
DRIVE CFG
6 = “Fast Brake”
“Ramp” (1) – Decelerates to zero speed at the decel rate. Power is removed when zero
speed is reached.
“Ramp to Hold” (2) – Decelerates to zero speed at the decel rate, followed by DC braking
until the next start sequence.
“DC Brake” (3) – DC braking is immediately applied (does not follow programmed decel
ramp). May have to adjust parameter 397 [DC Brake Kp].
“DCBrkAutoOff” (4) – Applies DC braking until zero speed is reached or DC brake time is
reached, whichever is shorter.
“Current Lmt” (5) – Max torque / current applied until zero speed.
“Fast Brake” (6) – High slip braking for maximum braking performance above base
speed.
Read-Write
No. Display Name Values
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
ATTENTION: The drive does not offer protection for externally-mounted brake resistors. A risk of fire exists if external
braking resistors are not protected. External resistor packages must be self-protected from over-temperature or the
protective circuit shown in Figure 5 on page 356 (or equivalent) must be supplied.
regulator level parameter P375 [Bus Reg Level]. If coordinated operation of the dynamic
brakes of a common bus system is desired, use this selection and set the P375 [Bus Reg
DRIVE CFG
Read-Write
No. Display Name Values
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
ATTENTION: Equipment damage may result if a drive mounted (internal) resistor is installed and this parameter is set to
“External.” Thermal protection for the internal resistor will be disabled, resulting in possible device damage.
ATTENTION: The drive does not offer protection for externally-mounted brake resistors. A risk of fire exists if external
braking resistors are not protected. External resistor packages must be self-protected from over-temperature or the
protective circuit shown in Figure 5 on page 356 (or equivalent) must be supplied.
Read-Write
No. Display Name Values
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
ATTENTION: If a hazard of injury due to movement of equipment or material exists, an auxiliary mechanical braking
device must be used.
ATTENTION: This feature should not be used with synchronous or permanent magnet motors. Motors may be
demagnetized during braking.
Read-Write
No. Display Name Values
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
Sets the integral term used in the speed regulator which controls the Fast Braking
function.
Functional in all motor control modes.
401 Fast Braking Kp Default: 0.0015 RW Real
Fast Braking Proportional Gain Min/Max: 0.0000 / 10.0000
Sets the proportional term used in the speed regulator which controls the Fast Braking
function.
Functional in all motor control modes.
402 Brake Off Adj 1 Default: 1.00 RW Real
Brake Off Adjustment 1 Min/Max: 0.01 / 5.00
When Fast Braking is the selected Stop Mode, this parameter sets the power sensitivity
to transition from Fast Braking to DC Brake. When DC Brake w/Auto ShutOff is selected,
this parameter sets the level sensitivity for shut off.
403 Brake Off Adj 2 Default: 1.00 RW Real
Brake Off Adjustment 2 Min/Max: 0.01 / 5.00
When Fast Braking is the selected Stop Mode, this parameter sets the frequency
sensitivity to transition from Fast Braking to DC Brake. When DC Brake w/Auto ShutOff is
selected, this parameter sets the time sensitivity for shut off.
409 Dec Inhibit Actn Default: 3 = “FltCoastStop” RW 32-bit
Deceleration Inhibit Action Options: 0 = “Ignore” Integer
Configures the response to a Decel Inhibit condition, which occurs when the drive is not 1 = “Alarm”
decelerating. One possible cause could be bus voltage regulation. 2 = “Flt Minor”
“Ignore” (0) – No action is taken. 3 = “FltCoastStop”
“Alarm” (1) – Type 1 alarm indicated.
“Flt Minor” (2) – Minor fault indicated. If running, drive continues to run.
Enable with P950 [Minor Flt Cfg]. If not enabled, acts like a major fault.
“FltCoastStop” (3) – Major fault indicated. Coast to Stop.
Read-Write
No. Display Name Values
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
Read-Write
No. Display Name Values
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
Accumulated percentage of motor overload. Continuously operating the motor over Min/Max: 0.00 / 100.00
PROTECTION
100% of the motor overload setting will increase this value to 100% and cause the
action selected in P410 [Motor OL Actn] to be taken.
419 Mtr OL Trip Time Units: Secs RO 32-bit
Motor Overload Trip Time Default: 99999 Integer
Displays the inverse of the motor overload time, equal to the number of seconds before Min/Max: 0 / 99999
P418 [Mtr OL Counts] reaches 100%, and the motor overload action is taken.
Read-Write
No. Display Name Values
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
Displays the current that is actively being used, including the automatic foldback effect Min/Max: –/+P21 [Rated Amps] x 8
from the drive overload function (see P420 [Drive OL Mode]).
425 Current Rate Lmt Units: % RW Real
Current Rate Limit Default: 400.00
Sets the largest allowable rate of change for the torque producing current reference (Iq). Min/Max: 1.00 / 800.00
This number is scaled in percent of rated motor current for every 250 microseconds.
426 Regen Power Lmt Units: % RW Real
Regenerative Power Limit Default: –50.00
Sets the limit for power flow from the motor to the drive (regenerating). Only active in Min/Max: –800.00 / 0.00
Flux Vector (FV) control modes.
427 Motor Power Lmt Units: % RW Real
Motor Power Limit Default: 200.00
Sets the limit for power flow from the drive to the motor (motoring). Only active in Flux Min/Max: 0.00 / 800.00
Vector (FV) control modes.
428 Current Limit Kd Units: Secs RW Real
Current Limit Derivative Gain Default: 760.0
Derivative gain for the current limit function. This parameter is not functional when any Min/Max: 0.0 / 1000000.0
of the FV motor control modes are selected.
429 Current Limit Ki Default: 680.0 RW Real
Current Limit Integral Gain Min/Max: 0.0 / 10000.0
Integral gain for the current limit function. This parameter is not functional when any of
the FV motor control modes are selected.
Read-Write
No. Display Name Values
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
PROTECTION
Load Limits
Read-Write
No. Display Name Values
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
Read-Write
No. Display Name Values
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
percentage of the bus voltage derived from the high voltage setting for the voltage
class. The trip level is calculated as:
P7 [DC Bus Memory] - P451 [Pwr Loss A Level] or P454 [Pwr Loss B Level]
For example: on a 400/480V drive, 0.3913 x 480 VAC x √2 = 265.62 VDC
452 Pwr Loss A Time Units: Secs RW Real
455 Pwr Loss B Time Default: 2.00
Power Loss Mode A, B Time Min/Max: 0.00 / 60.00
Sets the time that the drive will remain in power loss mode before a fault is detected.
456 PwrLoss RT BusKp Units: A/V RW Real
Power Loss Ride Through Bus Kp Default: 585.0
Proportional gain that adjusts the response of the bus regulator when power loss ride Min/Max: 0.0 / 1000000.0
through is enabled and detected. This parameter is not functional when any of the FV
motor control modes are selected.
457 PwrLoss RT BusKd Units: Secs RW Real
Power Loss Ride Through Bus Kd Default: 50.0
Derivative gain that adjusts the response of the bus regulator when power loss ride Min/Max: 0.0 / 1000000.0
through is enabled and detected. This parameter is not functional when any of the FV
motor control modes are selected.
458 PwrLoss RT ACRKp Units: Hz/A RW Real
Power Loss Ride Through Active Current Regulator Kp Default: 524.0
Proportional gain that adjusts the response of the active current regulator portion of the Min/Max: 0.0 / 100000.0
bus regulator when power loss ride through is enabled and detected. This parameter is
not functional when any of the FV motor control modes are selected.
459 PwrLoss RT ACRKi Units: Hz/A RW Real
Power Loss Ride Through Active Current Regulator Ki Default: 2045.0
Integral gain that adjusts the response of the active current regulator portion of the bus Min/Max: 0.0 / 50000.0
regulator when power loss ride through is enabled and detected. This parameter is not
functional when any of the FV motor control modes are selected.
Read-Write
No. Display Name Values
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
4 = “Flt RampStop”
Power Loss
Important: Operating in a phase loss condition will seriously degrade the reliability of 5 = “Flt CL Stop”
the drive.
“Alarm” (1) – Type 1 alarm indicated.
“Flt Minor” (2) – Minor fault indicated. If running, drive continues to run.
Enable with P950 [Minor Flt Cfg]. If not enabled, acts like a major fault.
“FltCoastStop” (3) – Major fault indicated. Coast to Stop.
“Flt RampStop” (4) – Major fault indicated. Ramp to Stop.
“Flt CL Stop” (5) – Major fault indicated. Current Limit Stop.
463 InPhase Loss Lvl Default: 325 RW 32-bit
Input Phase Loss Level Min/Max: 10 / 32767 Integer
Sets the threshold at which the DC bus voltage ripple triggers an Input Phase Loss fault.
Input phase loss is assumed when the DC bus voltage ripple exceeds the tolerance set by
this parameter. Setting a larger value permits a higher bus voltage ripple without
causing the drive to fault. The default value of 325 is equal to the expected ripple level
for a full rated motor running at half load with single phase input.
464 DC Bus Mem Reset Default: 0 = “Disabled” RW 32-bit
Direct Current Bus Memory Reset Options: 0 = “Disabled” Integer
Forces a manual update to P12 [DC Bus Memory], which is automatically initialized upon 1 = “Enabled”
power-up or precharge and continually updated during normal operation.
A transition from 0 to 1 will cause a bus memory update. However, the update will be
ignored if the command cannot be acted upon within 30 seconds because the drive is
regenerating or is firing the dynamic brake.
A manual reset is rarely required, but may occur when input voltage is abnormally high
or low for an extended period of time followed by a fast return to a nominal value.
Read-Write
No. Display Name Values
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
Read-Write
No. Display Name Values
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
Heatsink Fan
Mch Bearing
Options
Internal Fan
Mtr Bearing
Mch Lube
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Mtr Lube
Master
Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 = False
1 = True
Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Read-Write
No. Display Name Values
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
“Flt Minor” (2) – Minor fault indicated. If running, drive continues to run. 5 = “Flt CL Stop”
Enable with P950 [Minor Flt Cfg]. If not enabled, acts like a major fault.
PROTECTION
Read-Write
No. Display Name Values
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
Configures the response to a heatsink fan event, which occurs when P492 [HSFan 1 = “Alarm”
EventLevel] is met or exceeded. 2 = “Flt Minor”
PROTECTION
Read-Write
No. Display Name Values
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
stirring fan. The value of this parameter reflects the remaining life of that
internal fan.
Frame 9 drives have two inverters, and therefore two internal fans.
Frame 10 drives have three inverters, and therefore three internal fans.
For frame 9 and 10 drives, the value of this parameter reflects the
shortest remaining life of all the internal fans.
499 InFan EventLevel Units: % RW Real
Internal Fan Event Level Default: 80.000
Percent of total expected internal stirring fan life for which an early warning alarm or Min/Max: 0.000 / 100.000
fault can be programmed.
500 InFan EventActn Default: 0 = “Ignore” RW 32-bit
Internal Fan Event Action Options: 0 = “Ignore” Integer
Configures the response to an internal stirring fan event, which occurs when P499 [InFan 1 = “Alarm”
EventLevel] is met or exceeded. 2 = “Flt Minor”
“Ignore” (0) – No action is taken. 3 = “FltCoastStop”
“Alarm” (1) – Type 1 alarm indicated. 4 = “Flt RampStop”
“Flt Minor” (2) – Minor fault indicated. If running, drive continues to run. 5 = “Flt CL Stop”
Enable with P950 [Minor Flt Cfg]. If not enabled, acts like a major fault.
“FltCoastStop” (3) – Major fault indicated. Coast to Stop.
“Flt RampStop” (4) – Major fault indicated. Ramp to Stop.
“Flt CL Stop” (5) – Major fault indicated. Current Limit Stop.
501 InFan ResetLog Default: 0 RO 32-bit
Internal Fan Reset Log Min/Max: 0 / 255 (unsigned 8 bits) Integer
Total number of resets performed on the P497 [InFan ElpsdLife] parameter.
Note: This parameter is not used by PowerFlex 755 Frame 8 drives and larger.
Read-Write
No. Display Name Values
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
“Flt Minor” (2) – Minor fault indicated. If running, drive continues to run. 5 = “Flt CL Stop”
Enable with P950 [Minor Flt Cfg]. If not enabled, acts like a major fault.
PROTECTION
Read-Write
No. Display Name Values
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
“Flt Minor” (2) – Minor fault indicated. If running, drive continues to run. 5 = “Flt CL Stop”
Enable with P950 [Minor Flt Cfg]. If not enabled, acts like a major fault.
PROTECTION
Read-Write
No. Display Name Values
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
Limit].
Speed Limits
Read-Write
No. Display Name Values
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
Skip Speed n Min/Max: P521 [Max Rev Speed] / P520 [Max Fwd
Speed Limits
Sets a frequency at which the drive will not operate. Parameters are disabled if set to 0. Speed]
529 Skip Speed Band Units: Hz RW Real
Skip Speed Band RPM
Sets the bandwidth around a skip speed. [Skip Speed Band] is split, applying 1/2 above Default: 0.00
and 1/2 below the skip speed. The same bandwidth applies to all skip speeds. Parameter Min/Max: 0.00 / Based on P27 [Motor NP Hertz]/P28
is disabled if set to 0. [Motor NP RPM] and Voltage Class
Read-Write
No. Name Values
Data Type
Description
Group
File
30.0
20.0
10.0
0.0
0.0 1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 6.0
Seconds
Read-Write
No. Display Name Values
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
[Spd Ref n Sel]. Sets the speed that corresponds to P51/61 [Anlg Inn Hi] on an I/O
module. This establishes scaling throughout the range.
548 Spd Ref A AnlgLo Units: Hz RW Real
553 Spd Ref B AnlgLo Default: 0.00
Speed Reference A, B Analog Low Min/Max: P521 [Max Rev Speed] / P520 [Max Fwd
Used only when an analog input is selected as a speed reference according to P545/550 Speed]
[Spd Ref n Sel]. Sets the speed that corresponds to P51/61 [Anlg Inn Lo] on an I/O
module. This establishes scaling throughout the range.
549 Spd Ref A Mult Default: 1.00 RW Real
554 Spd Ref B Mult Min/Max: –/+22000.00
Speed Reference A, B Multiplier
Applies multipliers to speed references A and B respectively.
555 Spd Ref Scale Default: 1.000 RW Real
Speed Reference Scale Min/Max: 0.000 / 1000.000
Applies only in Flux Vector (FV) modes according to P35 [Motor Ctrl Mode]. Applies a
multiplier to P595 [Filtered Spd Ref] after it has been offset by the PID function (P1093
[PID Output Meter]). The scaled result, once limited, will become the primary
component of the value of P597 [Final Speed Ref].
556 Jog Speed 1 Units: Hz RW Real
557 Jog Speed 2 Default: Based on P27 [Motor NP Hertz]/P28 [Motor
Jog Speed n NP RPM] and Voltage Class
The speed used for jogging when the Jog 1 or Jog 2 function (respectively) is activated Min/Max: –/+P27 [Motor NP Hertz] x 8
by a digital input function or by Logic Command (sent over a communication network). –/+P28 [Motor NP RPM] x 8
558 MOP Reference Units: % RO Real
Motor Operated Potentiometer Reference Default: 0.00
Value of the MOP (Motor Operated Potentiometer) Reference to be used as a possible Min/Max: –/+800.00
source for P545/550 [Spd Ref n Sel]. The MOP Reference is activated (incremented or
decremented) by digital input functions.
Read-Write
No. Display Name Values
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
At Pwr Down
Options
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
At Stop
Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 = False
1 = True
Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Read-Write
No. Display Name Values
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
Read-Write
No. Display Name Values
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
MicroPsnMult
Decel Lmt Sw
Options
Unipolar Ref
Sel Override
Rev Disable
Preset Auto
Bipolar Ref
Ref A Auto
Ref A Mult
Ref B Auto
Ref B Mult
Skip Band
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Trim Ref
Manual
Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 = False
1 = True
Displays the operating status of the speed referencing section of the drive. Individual bits are provided to represent the following conditions:
Bit 0 “Ref A Auto” – When set, the Reference A Auto path is active.
Control Logic has selected the Speed Reference source A. The exact origin of this speed reference is determined by the parameter specified in P545 [Spd Ref A Sel].
This parameter should also be reported in P930 [Speed Ref Source].
Bit 1 “Ref B Auto” – When set, the Reference B Auto path is active.
Control Logic has selected the Speed Reference source B. The exact origin of this speed reference is determined by the value specified in P550 [Spd Ref B Sel]. This
parameter should also be reported in P930 [Speed Ref Source].
Bit 2 “Ref A Mult” – When set, speed reference A is being modified by P549 [Spd Ref A Mult]. When clear, either the multiplier is 1 or is not affecting the speed
Speed Reference
Bit 3 “Ref B Mult” – When set, the speed reference B is being modified by P554 [Spd Ref B Mult]. When clear, either the multiplier is 1 or is not affecting the speed
reference because the “Ref B Auto” path is inactive.
Bit 4 “MicroPsnMult” – When set, P592 [Selected Spd Ref] is being multiplied by P1112 [MicroPsnScalePct].
Bit 5 “Trim Pct Ref” – When set, the speed reference is summed with a portion of the reference that results from multiplying the reference by the value of the
parameter indicated in P616 [SpdTrimPrcRefSrc].
Bit 6 “Trim Ref” – When set, the speed reference is being offset by the value of the parameter indicated in P617 [Spd Trim Source].
Bit 7 “Preset Auto” – When set, Control Logic has selected a preset auto speed reference. The P930 [Speed Ref Source] parameter will indicate the source of this
reference.
Bit 8 “Manual” – When set, the speed reference selection is in one of the Manual positions due to P879 [Drive Logic Rslt] Bit 6 “Manual” being set. When P879, Bit
6 is clear, the speed reference selection is in one of the Auto positions. The result of the Auto/Manual speed reference selection can be seen in P592 [Selected Spd
Ref].
Bit 9 “Sel Override” – The Selected Speed Reference parameter has been overridden by another reference. Refer to P930 [Speed Ref Source] for the cause of the
override.
Bit 10 “Bipolar Ref” – When set, P308 [Direction Mode] = 1 “Bipolar.” When in bipolar mode, the sign of the speed reference value will determine the direction of
motor rotation.
Bit 11 “Rev Disable” – When set, P308 [Direction Mode] = 2 “Rev Disable.” When in reverse disable mode, negative speed reference values are rejected and a zero
speed value is used in their place.
Bit 12 “Unipolar Ref” – When set, P308 [Direction Mode] = 0 “Unipolar.” When in unipolar mode, the sign of the speed reference value (and therefore direction of
motor rotation) is determined by P879 [Drive Logic Rslt] Bit 4 “Forward” and Bit 5 “Reverse.”
Bit 13 “Decel Lmt Sw” – When set, the Torque Proving function’s control logic has detected a decel limit switch active and has selected P571 [Preset Speed 1] for the
speed reference value.
Bit 14 “End Lim Sw” – When set, the Torque Proving function’s control logic has detected an end limit switch active and has selected zero speed for the speed
reference value.
Bit 15 “Skip Band” – When set, the Skip Band function has modified P2 [Commanded SpdRef]. When clear, the Skip Band function has not changed P2
[Commanded SpdRef].
Read-Write
No. Display Name Values
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
Displays the output of the filter that is applied by P588 [Spd Ref Filter]. Default: 0.00
Min/Max: –/+P27 [Motor NP Hertz]
–/+P28 [Motor NP RPM]
596 Speed Rate Ref Units: Hz RW Real
Speed Rate Reference RPM
This parameter is shared by both the Inertia Compensation and Speed Compensation Default: 0.00
functions. These functions are only available in the Flux Vector selections for P35 [Motor Min/Max: –/+P27 [Motor NP Hertz]
Ctrl Mode]. –/+P28 [Motor NP RPM]
A value shared by both the Inertia Compensation and Speed Compensation functions
(active only in FV motor control modes), typically supplied by an external controller that
is also providing a rate limited speed reference. The Speed Rate Reference corresponds
to the derivative with respect to time of the speed reference signal. Units of time are in
seconds.
For example, if the controller provides a 10 second reference ramp, the controller would
also supply a Speed Rate Ref value of 1 pu / 10 sec = 0.1 sec-1 while the reference is
accelerating. When the reference is constant, Speed Rate Ref should be zero.
597 Final Speed Ref Units: Hz RO Real
Final Speed Reference RPM
Displays the speed reference value, after all reference modifications (including ramps), Default: 0.00
that is used as a final reference by the speed regulator. In Open Loop, Sensorless Vector Min/Max: –/+P27 [Motor NP Hertz]
mode, this value represents the anticipated motor operating speed, and may differ –/+P28 [Motor NP RPM]
slightly from the output frequency value due to slip compensation.
Read-Write
Full Name
Group
Description
File
600 Trim Ref A Sel Default: P601 [Trim Ref A Sel] RW 32-bit
604 Trim Ref B Sel P605 [Trim Ref B Stpt] Integer
Trim Reference A, B Select Min/Max: 0 / 159999
SPEED CONTROL
Selects a trim source (in Hz or RPM) for Speed Reference A or Speed Reference B,
Speed Trim
respectively. For trim in % instead of Hz or RPM, use P608/612 (TrimPct Refn Sel).
601 Trim Ref A Stpt Units: Hz RW Real
605 Trim Ref B Stpt RPM
Trim Reference A, B Setpoint Default: 0.00
A digital value to be used as a possible trim source for P600 or P604, respectively Min/Max: –/+P27 [Motor NP Hertz]
–/+P28 [Motor NP RPM] x 8
Read-Write
No. Display Name Values
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
A digital value to be used a possible trim source for P608 or P612, respectively.
610 TrmPct RefA AnHi Units: % RW Real
614 TrmPct RefB AnHi Default: 100.00
Trim Percent Reference A, B Analog High Min/Max: –/+800.00
Used only when an analog input is selected as a percent trim source according to P608 or
P612. Sets the amount of trim that corresponds to P51/61 [Anlg Inn Hi] on an I/O
module or on the main control (product dependent). This establishes scaling throughout
the range.
611 TrmPct RefA AnLo Units: % RW Real
615 TrmPct RefB AnLo Default: 0.00
Trim Percent Reference A, B Analog Low Min/Max: –/+800.00
Used only when an analog input is selected as a percent trim source according to P608 or
P612. Sets the amount of trim that corresponds to P52/62 [Anlg Inn Lo] on an I/O
module or on the main control (product dependent). This establishes scaling throughout
the range.
616 SpdTrimPrcRefSrc Default: 0 RO 32-bit
Speed Trim Percent Reference Source Min/Max: 0 / 159999 Integer
Displays the source of Motor Speed Reference Trim Percent, in the format SSPPPP, where
SS indicates the source port number other than Port 0 and PPPP indicates the source
parameter number. A value of zero indicates that a source has not been assigned.
617 Spd Trim Source Default: 0 RO 32-bit
Speed Trim Source Min/Max: 0 / 159999 Integer
Displays the source of Motor Speed Reference Trim, in the format SSPPPP, where SS
indicates the source port number other than Port 0 and PPPP indicates the source
parameter number. A value of zero indicates that a source has not been assigned.
Read-Write
No. Display Name Values
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
used in closed loop modes with encoder feedback). If the value of P70 [Autotune] is set
SPEED CONTROL
to “Calculate”, this value (in addition to others) is automatically calculated, and cannot
be manually adjusted. This parameter cannot be changed unless P70 [Autotune] is set to
0 “Ready.”
622 Slip Comp BW Units: R/S RW Real
Slip Compensation Bandwidth Default: 10.00
Adjusts the bandwidth of a low pass filter used for slip compensation. The response time Min/Max: 1.00 / 50.00
of slip compensation will vary inversely with the setting of this filter.
623 VHzSV SpdTrimReg Units: Hz RO Real
Volts per Hertz Sensorless Vector Speed Trim Regulator RPM
Displays the amount of trim that the slip compensation function dynamically adds Default: 0.00
(based on load) to final speed reference for improved open loop speed control. Not used Min/Max: –/+P27 [Motor NP Hertz] x 8
in Flux Vector (FV) modes. –/+P28 [Motor NP RPM] x 8
Read-Write
No. Display Name Values
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
SpdRegIntRes
SpdRegIntHld
StpNoSCrvAcc
Ramp Disable
Auto Tach SW
Options
Jog No Integ
Delayed Ref
SpdErrFilter
Ramp Hold
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 = False
1 = True
Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
jogging.
SPEED CONTROL
Bit 7 “Auto Tach SW” – This bit is used to enable the Automatic Tach Switchover feature. This feature is used to switch motor velocity feedback sources from the
Primary (P125) to Alternate (P128) source in the event that the primary source fails. This switchover can take place while the drive is running. The P936 [Drive
Status 2] Bit 5 “FdbkLoss SwO” will indicate clear when the Primary source is active and set when the alternate source is active.
• When using the Automatic Tach Switchover feature, the Feedback Loss Configuration parameter on the feedback module should be set to something other than
fault.
• When using induction motors, clearing this bit when the alternate source is active will restore control to the Primary source, provided that the primary source is
functioning.
• When using permanent magnet motors, cycling power to the drive will restore control to the Primary source, provided that the primary source is functioning. If
this bit remains off, then the Automatic Tach Switchover feature will be disabled.
Important: The Primary feedback source uses the P126 [Pri Vel FdbkFltr] filter setting and tuning gains set in P636 [Speed Reg BW], P645 [Speed Reg Kp], and
P647 [Speed Reg Ki]. The Alternate feedback sources uses the P129 [Alt Vel FdbkFltr] filter setting and tuning gains set in P648 [Alt Speed Reg BW], P649 [Alt Speed
Reg Kp], and P650 [Alt Speed Reg Ki].
Bit 8 “Delayed Ref” – When this bit is set, an additional processor scan delay period is inserted between the P594 [Ramped Spd Ref] and the input to the Speed
Reference filter. This delay is intended to be used in applications where multiple, coordinated drives are used. A drive that supplies the speed reference for use by
other drives to follow would typically use this delay. The delay would allow time for the speed reference to reach the other units before it is acted upon by the
sourcing unit, thereby synchronizing the speed reference among all units. When this bit is clear, no speed reference delay is inserted.
Bit 9 “NoSCrvSpdChg” – Set this bit to discontinue the S Curve acceleration/deceleration profile immediately when the actual speed reference changes while
completing the desired S Curve. The S Curve profile restarts on the new acceleration/deceleration ramp.
636 Speed Reg BW Units: R/S RW Real
Speed Regulator Bandwidth Default: Calculated
Sets the speed loop bandwidth and determines the dynamic behavior of the speed loop. Min/Max: 0.00 / Calculated
As bandwidth increases, the speed loop becomes more responsive and can track a faster
changing speed reference. A change to this parameter will cause an automatic update of
P645 [Speed Reg Kp], P647 [Speed Reg Ki] and P644 [Spd Err Fltr BW]. The configuration
settings for Inertia Adaption (product dependent) will also be automatically selected
when this feature is enabled. To disable the automatic gain and filter update, set this
parameter to a value of zero.
The maximum allowable value of this parameter will be limited by the ratio of P646
[Speed Reg Max Kp] to P76 [Total Inertia], and the type of speed feedback source in use
(encoder vs. open loop). For operation following an Automatic Tach Switchover, the
bandwidth specified in P648 [Alt Speed Reg BW] will be used.
Read-Write
No. Display Name Values
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
Reference Error
Feedback, SpdReg AntiBckup = 0.0
Feedback, SpdReg AntiBckup = 0.3
Under-Shoot
Under-Shoot
Read-Write
No. Display Name Values
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
Read-Write
No. Display Name Values
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
normally set to at least 3 to 5 times the value of P648 [Alt Speed Reg BW]. Units for the
error filter are radians/second (R/S).
The rules that are used to set the error filter bandwidth in automatic mode are as
follows:
1. If the alternate motor velocity feedback is Open Loop, then the error filter is set to 5
times P648 [Alt Speed Reg BW].
2. If an alternate motor velocity feedback device has been selected and P704 [InAdp
LdObs Mode] = 1 “InertiaAdapt,” then the error filter is set to 3 times P648 [Alt Speed
Reg BW].
3. If an alternate motor velocity feedback device has been selected and P704 [InAdp
LdObs Mode] 0 “Disabled” or 2 “LoadObserver” then the error filter is using a table
look up value determined by the setting of P129 [Alt Vel FdbkFltr].
652 SReg Trq Preset Units: % RW Real
Speed Regulator Torque Preset Default: 0.00
Sets the initial value of P654 [Spd Reg Int Out]. This is the output of the vector speed Min/Max: –/+800.00
regulator’s integral channel, and will be present in P654 [Spd Reg Int Out] when the
regulator is first enabled (for example, upon rise of start or jog). The normal, default
setting for this parameter is zero. In some applications, it may be necessary to preset the
speed regulator integrator to a non-zero setting. This will result in the regulator’s output
reaching its final steady state value sooner than it would if the integrator started from
zero.
653 Spd Loop Damping Default: 1.0000 RW Real
Speed Loop Damping Min/Max: 0.5000 / 65.0000
Sets the damping factor of the vector speed loop’s characteristic equation. Damping will
affect the integral gain when a non-zero bandwidth has been entered. A damping factor
of 1.0 is considered critical damping. Lowering the damping will produce faster load
disturbance rejection, but may cause a more oscillatory response. When the speed
regulator bandwidth is zero, gains are set manually and damping factor has no effect.
Read-Write
No. Display Name Values
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
Sets the gain of the vector speed regulator’s output filter when P657 [SReg OutFltr Sel] is
set to one of the “Custom” settings (3, 4, or 5).
A gain value of zero results in a filter characteristic that behaves as a first order low pass.
A gain value ranging between zero and one results in a lag type filter. A gain value
greater than one results in a lead type filter. A gain value of one will disable (bypass) the
filter.
659 SReg OutFltr BW Units: R/S RW Real
Speed Regulator Output Filter Bandwidth Default: 35.00
Sets the bandwidth of the speed regulator’s output filter when P657 [SReg OutFltr Sel] is Min/Max: 0.00 / 3760.00
set to one of the “Custom” settings (3, 4, or 5).
A value of zero will disable (bypass) the filter.
660 SReg Output Units: % RO Real
Speed Regulator Output Default: 0.00
Displays the output of the vector speed regulator. This signal will be routed to the P685 Min/Max: –/+ 800.00
[Selected Trq Ref] when P313 [Actv SpTqPs Mode] has selected the output of the speed
regulator.
A value of 100% represents rated motor torque.
663 VHzSV Spd Reg Kp Default: 20.00 RW Real
Volts per Hertz Sensorless Vector Speed Regulator Proportional Gain Min/Max: 0.00 / 3000.00
Adjusts the proportional gain of the Speed Regulator used in non-vector modes
according to P35 [Motor Ctrl Mode]. The output of this regulator will adjust P623 [VHzSV
SpdTrimReg] when P131 [Active Vel Fdbk] originates from a feedback device.
664 VHzSV Spd Reg Ki Units: /Sec RW Real
Volts per Hertz Sensorless Vector Speed Regulator Integral Gain Default: 50.00
Adjusts the integral gain of the Speed Regulator used in non-vector modes according to Min/Max: 0.00 / 100000.00
P35 [Motor Ctrl Mode]. The output of this regulator will adjust P623 [VHzSV
SpdTrimReg] when P131 [Active Vel Fdbk] originates from a feedback device.
Read-Write
No. Display Name Values
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
“Rate Ref” (2) – Speed compensation function is enabled and uses an externally
Speed Comp
generated speed rate signal. The rate of change or derivative of the speed reference is
supplied by P596 [Speed Rate Ref]. This signal is typically supplied by an external
controller when the speed reference ramp is generated external to the drive.
666 Speed Comp Gain Default: –2.50 RW Real
Speed Compensation Gain Min/Max: –/+32767.00
Adjusts the magnitude of P667 [Speed Comp Out]. This gain can be either manually set
or automatically determined as part of automatic gain mode for Vector speed control.
Automatic mode can be activated by selecting a motor speed feedback device in P125
[Pri Vel Fdbk Sel] and setting a non-zero speed regulator bandwidth in P636 [Speed Reg
BW]. In automatic mode, the gain is calculated internally using a table lookup from the
interrupt times and delays of the speed feedback FIR filter. For any other case – non-
vector control, open loop speed feedback, or zero bandwidth setting, the speed
compensation gain must be manually adjusted.
667 Speed Comp Out Units: Hz RO Real
Speed Compensation Output RPM
Displays the output of the Speed Compensation function. This value will be summed Default: 0.00
with the speed reference, following the application of P555 [Spd Ref Scale]. Min/Max: –/+P27 [Motor NP Hertz] x 8
–/+P28 [Motor NP RPM] x 8
Read-Write
No. Display Name Values
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
Read-Write
No. Display Name Values
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
Read-Write
No. Display Name Values
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
section. Attenuation is the ratio of the notch filter input signal to its output at the P687
TORQUE CONTROL
[Notch Fltr Freq]. An attenuation of 30 means that the notch output is 1/30th of the
input at the specified frequency.
Only active in Flux Vector (FV) motor control modes (P35).
Attenuation
Freq (Hz)
Read-Write
No. Display Name Values
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
Read-Write
No. Display Name Values
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
response. The output of the Load Observer function is similar to P707 [Load Estimate],
Inertia Adaption
but has a filter setting determined by P711 [Load Observer BW]. The Load Observer’s
output signal will add to the motor torque reference.
705 755 Inertia Adapt BW Units: R/S RW Real
Inertia Adapt Bandwidth Default: 10.00
Sets the bandwidth of a low pass filter located in the output of the Inertia Adaption Min/Max: 1.00 / 1000.00
function. This parameter should typically be set to match the bandwidth of the drive’s
speed regulator. This matching setting is automatically made when the Inertia Adaption
function is active and the speed regulator bandwidth (P636 [Speed Reg BW]), is set to a
non-zero value. If the speed regulator bandwidth is set to zero, then this filter setting
must be manually adjusted.Only active in Flux Vector (FV) motor control modes (P35).
706 755 InertiaAdaptGain Default: 0.500 RW Real
Inertia Adaption Gain Min/Max: 0.300 / 1.000
Sets a multiplier of system inertia used when the Inertia Adaption function is selected
P704 [InAdp LdObs Mode] = 1 “InertiaAdapt.” This gain has no effect on the parameter
P707 [Load Estimate]. Higher gain values may cause high frequency ringing, while
smaller values may cause fundamental load instability. This gain should typically range
from 0.3 to 1.0 with 0.5 nominal best. The gain setting of 0.5 is automatically made
when the speed regulator bandwidth (P636 [Speed Reg BW]), is set to a non-zero value.
If the speed regulator bandwidth is set to zero, then this gain setting must be manually
adjusted.Only active in Flux Vector (FV) motor control modes (P35).
707 755 Load Estimate Units: % RO Real
Load Estimate Default: 0.00
Displays an estimated load torque value for the drive. This value is only available in Min/Max: –/+800.00
Vector Control mode when using a motor speed feedback device. The load estimate does
not include any torque required to accelerate or decelerate the motor. In order to be
accurate, the parameter P76 [Total Inertia] must contain a reasonably accurate
value.Only active in Flux Vector (FV) motor control modes (P35).
Read-Write
No. Display Name Values
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
This is moving average type filter that has a delay setting of N, where N is an integer 7 = “3R/S Noise”
number (0, 1, 2 …). A setting of zero provides no filtering and no delay. Larger values of
N result in more filtering and more delay. The best setting for this filter will depend on
the level of noise present in the feedback signal and the bandwidth setting of the
velocity regulator. Only active in Flux Vector (FV) motor control modes (P35).
710 755 InertAdptFltrBW Units: R/S RW Real
Inertia Adaption Filter Bandwidth Default: 50.00
Sets the bandwidth of a low pass filter located in the output of the vector control speed Min/Max: 0.00 / 1000.00
regulator and used in connection with the Inertia Adaption function. The bandwidth of
this filter should typically be set to five times the bandwidth of the speed regulator. This
setting is automatically made when the Inertia Adaption function is active and the
speed regulator bandwidth (P636 [Speed Reg BW]), is set to a non-zero value. If the
speed regulator bandwidth is set to zero, then this filter setting must be manually
adjusted. Only active in Flux Vector (FV) motor control modes (P35).
711 755 Load Observer BW Units: R/S RW Real
Load Observer Bandwidth Default: 40.00
Sets the bandwidth of a low pass filter located in the output of the Load Observer Min/Max: 1.00 / 1000.00
function. Typical filter settings range from 10 radians/second to 150 radians/second
with the higher values being more responsive to disturbances but with increased system
noise. There is no nominal best setting, but 40 radians/second is a suggested starting
point. This selection may not function well in sloppy geared systems. Only active in Flux
Vector (FV) motor control modes (P35).
Read-Write
No. Display Name Values
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
Sets the starting speed or trigger speed at which the friction compensation will be Default: 0.15
applied when leaving the region near zero speed. The initial value for P1567 [FrctnComp Min/Max: 0.00 / 7.94
Out] at this speed will be P1564 [FrctnComp Stick]. Friction compensation will remain
active until the speed reference drops below the trigger speed minus P1562 [FrctnComp
Hyst] speed. At these low speeds, 1567 [FrctnComp Out] returns to zero.
1562 755 FrctnComp Hyst Units: Hz RW Real
Friction Compensation Hysteresis RPM
This parameter together with 1561 [FrctnComp Trig] establishes a speed band around Default: 0.06
zero speed. Friction compensation will be inactive (zero output) when the speed Min/Max: 0.00 / 7.94
reference is inside this band and active when outside. The points at which friction comp
becomes active and inactive differ by the amount of speed set in this parameter.
1563 755 FrctnComp Time Units: mSec RW 32-bit
Friction Compensation Time Default: 6 Integer
Sets the time interval that the stiction torque will be applied. When initially leaving the Min/Max: 0 / 18
zero speed region, the value in P1564 [FrctnComp Stick] will be used for the non-viscous
friction term. After the time period set in this parameter, the non-viscous friction will
ramp down to the value set in P1565 [FrctnComp Slip]. For the remainder of the time
that [FrctnComp Out] remains non-zero, the non-viscous friction will remain constant at
the value of [FrctnComp Slip].
1564 755 FrctnComp Stick Units: % RW Real
Friction Compensation Stiction Default: 15.00
Sets the level for the stiction or static friction torque. This is the torque level required to Min/Max: 0.00 / 800.00
break away from zero speed. When initially leaving the zero speed region, this level will
be used for the non-viscous friction term. After the time period set in P1563 [FrctnComp
Time], the non-viscous friction will ramp down to the value set in P1565 [FrctnComp
Slip].
Read-Write
No. Display Name Values
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
Read-Write
No. Display Name Values
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
ZeroFFSpdRef
Options
Ref Complete
SpdFFRef En
PTP Int Hold
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 = False
1 = True
Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Bit 0 “ZeroFFSpdRef” – Indicates the speed feed forward reference P783 [PTP Speed FwdRef] is zero.
Bit 1 “Ref Complete” – Indicates the position point-to-point feedback P777 [PTP Feedback] reaches the position point-to-point reference P784 [PTP Command],
and the speed forward reference P783 [PTP Speed FwdRef] reaches zero.
Bit 2 “P2P Int Hold” – Indicates the position point-to-point planner integrator is holding. Read back of the point-to-point integral hold bit P770 [PTP Control] Bit 4
“Intgrtr Hold.”
Bit 3 “SpdFFRef En” – Indicates the speed feed forward reference P783 [PTP Speed FwdRef] is active.
721 Position Control RW 32-bit
Position Control Integer
Sets bits to enable various position control functions.
PsnWtch2Arm (1)
PsnWtch1Arm (1)
PsnWatch2Dir (1)
PsnWatch1Dir (1)
Options
POSITION CONTROL
Position Cfg/Sts
Offset ReRef
Add Spd Ref
OffsetVel En
Intgrtr Hold
Intgrtr En
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Zero Psn
Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
(1) 755 drives only. 0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
Bit 1 “Intgrtr En” – Enables integrator operation. Resetting it resets the integrator.
Bit 2 “Offset ReRef” – Permits changing the value of position offsets without changing actual position. The position offsets are the values that are selected by P820
[Psn Offset 1 Sel] and P822 [Psn Offset 2 Sel]. The default position offsets are P821 [Psn Offset 1] and P823 [Psn Offset 2].
Bit 3 “OffsetVel En” – Uses the offset velocity P824 [Psn Offset Vel] for the position offset integrator. Sets the offset integrator bit, P724 [Psn Reg Status] Bit 0
“OffsetIntgtr” when this bit is on.
Bit 4 “Zero Psn” – Puts P836 [Psn Actual] in absolute mode (no differential) with zero position offset. P836 [Psn Actual] sets the value of P847 [Psn Fdbk] - the
position P725 [Zero Position]. With Bit 4 “Zero Psn” disabled, P836 [Psn Actual] accumulates the difference in P847 [Psn Fdbk] at each position control scan. P836
[Psn Actual] and P847 [Psn Fdbk] are not always the same and therefore, P836 [Psn Actual] is reset. With Bit 4 “Zero Psn” set, P836 [Psn Actual] directly loads the
raw value of P847 after subtracting P725 [Zero Position].
Bit 5 “Intgrtr Hold” – Holds the position integrator in present state.
Bit 6 “PsnWtch1Arm” – Enables the position watch 1. Resetting this bit clears the position watch 1 detection P724 [Psn Reg Status] Bit 9 “PsnW1Detect.”
Bit 7 “PsnWatch1Dir” – Causes the position watch 1 output to be set when P746 [PsnWatch1 DtctIn] is greater than a set-point selected by the position watch 1
selection P745 [PsnWatch1 Select]. Resetting this bit causes the position watch 1 output to be set when P746 [PsnWatch1 DtctIn] is less than a set-point selected
by the position watch 1 selection P745 [PsnWatch1 Select].
Bit 8 “PsnWtch2Arm” – Enables the position watch 2. Resetting this bit clears the position watch 2 detection P724 [Psn Reg Status] Bit 10 “PsnW2Detect.”
Bit 9 “PsnWatch2Dir” – Causes the position watch 2 output to be set when P749 [PsnWatch2 DtctIn] is greater than a set-point selected by the position watch 2
selection P748 [PsnWatch2 DtctIn]. Resetting this bit causes the position watch 2 output to be set when P749 [PsnWatch2 DtctIn] is less than a set-point selected
by the position watch 2 selection P748 [PsnWatch2 DtctIn].
Bit 10 “Add Spd Ref” – Adds the speed reference to the output of the position control, when in position control mode.
Read-Write
No. Display Name Values
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
PsnW2Detect (1)
PsnW1Detect (1)
Options
Integ Lmt Lo
InPsn Detect
Integ Lmt Hi
Offset ReRef
Intgrtr Hold
OffsetIntgtr
Spd Lmt Lo
Spd Lmt Hi
Psn Intgrtr
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
(1) 755 drives only. 0 = False
POSITION CONTROL
Position Cfg/Sts
1 = True
Bit 0 “OffsetIntgtr” – Indicates the position offset Integrator is active with the position offset integrator bit P721 [Position Control] Bit 3 “OffsetVel En” is on.
Bit 1 “Offset ReRef” – Indicates the position offset re-referencing is active with the position offset re-referencing bit P721 [Position Control] Bit 2 “Offset ReRef” is
on.
Bit 2 “Psn Intgrtr” – Indicates the position integrator is active with the position integrator bit P721 [Position Control] Bit 1 “Intgrtr En” is on.
Bit 3 “Integ Lmt Lo” – Indicates the position integrator is at the low limit.
Bit 4 “Integ Lmt Hi” – Indicates the position integrator is at the high limit.
Bit 5 “Spd Lmt Lo” – Indicates the position regulator output (speed) is at the low limit.
Bit 6 “Spd Lmt Hi” – Indicates the position regulator output (speed) is at the high limit.
Bit 7 “Psn Reg Actv” – Indicates the position regulator is active
Bit 8 “Intgrtr Hold” – Indicates the position Integrator is held in present state
Bit 9 “PsnW1Detect” – Indicates the position watch 1 has detected motor position equal to its setpoint, from the proper direction.
Bit 10 “PsnW2Detect” – Indicates the position watch 2 has detected motor position equal to its setpoint, from the proper direction.
Bit 11 “InPsn Detect” – Indicates P835 [Psn Error] is within the position band specified by the in-position band P726 [In Pos Psn Band]
725 Zero Position Default: 0 RW 32-bit
Zero Position Min/Max: –2147483648 / 2147483647 Integer
Sets the absolute user zero position. When the zero position bit P721 [Position Control]
Bit 4 “Zero Psn” is set, P836 [Psn Actual] accumulates the value of P847 [Psn Fdbk] - the
P725 [Zero Position], and P836 [Psn Actual] becomes zero when P847 [Psn Fdbk] is at
the zero position. The homing function also sets the value after homing process is
completed.
726 In Pos Psn Band Default: 200 RW 32-bit
In Positive Position Bandwidth Min/Max: 0 / 2147483647 Integer
Sets the overall bandwidth of the in position detector. The detector sets the in-position
detect bit P724 [Psn Reg Status] Bit 11 “InPsn Detect” when P835 [Psn Error] is within
this position band for a sufficient time specified by the in-position dwell time P727 [In
Pos Psn Dwell]. A modest hysteresis count is added to the position bandwidth after the
position error is within specified limits.
Read-Write
No. Display Name Values
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
POSITION CONTROL File
Read-Write
No. Display Name Values
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
Home Request
Home Enabled
Options
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
At Home
Homing
Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Bit 0 “Home Request” – Indicates the homing function is requested. The homing function is requested by the homing configuration bits in P731 [Homing Control].
This bit turns off when homing is complete.
Bit 1 “Home Enabled” – Indicates the homing function is enabled. This bit is set when the homing function is requested and the drive starts.
Bit 2 “Homing” – Indicates the drive is heading to home position. This bit is set when the drive is running.
Bit 3 “At Home” – Indicates when the difference between P847 [Psn Fdbk] and P737 [Actual Home Psn] is less than P726 [In Pos Psn Band].
731 Homing Control RW 16-bit
Homing Control Integer
Sets bits to configure the homing function.
POSITION CONTROL
Homing Alarm
Options
Hold At Home
Position Homing
Home Marker
Return Home
Psn Redefine
Home DI Inv
Find Home
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Home DI
Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Important: To enable the homing control, Bit 1 or Bit 2 (configuration bits) must be set to go into the Find Home mode. With the drive stopped, verify that a stop
command has not been issued and toggle Bit 0 to 1. The drive will go to the home position at the ensuing startup.
Bit 0 “Find Home” – Puts the drive in the homing mode. Setting this bit requests the homing function and sets homing request bit P730 [Homing Status] Bit 0
“Home Request.” Toggle this bit with the drive stopped to reset the homing function. If the drive is issued a stop command while in Find Home mode, and before
the At Home limit switch is reached, toggle this bit to put the drive back in Find Home mode. Once the At Home limit switch is hit, whether it is wired to the encoder
option or a digital input, the drive will revert to mode selected by P313 [Actv SpTqPs Mode]. Movement may result.
Bit 1 “Home DI” – Configures the homing function to use a switch (digital input). When this bit is on and Bit 2 “Home Marker” is off, the homing function is
configured as home switch mode. When this bit is on and Bit 2 “Home Marker” is on, the homing function is configured as home marker-switch mode.
Bit 2 “Home Marker” – Configures the homing function to use a marker input. When this bit is on and Bit 1 “Home DI” is off, the homing function is configured as
home marker mode. When this bit is on and Bit 1 “Home DI” is on, the homing function is configured as home marker-switch mode. When using this function verify
that the Z Channel of the encoder module is enabled (Bit 0 “Z Chan Enbl” = 1).
Bit 3 “Return Home” – Configures the homing function as return to home through software. The drive returns to the actual home position set by P737 [Actual Home
Psn]. A start command is required to set this bit.
Same as other homing mode, the drive will resume normal operation after the return home procedure.
Bit 4 “Psn Redefine” – Sets the position feedback P847 [Psn Fdbk] to the actual home position P737 [Actual Home Psn].
Bit 5 “Homing Alarm” – Enables the home running alarm when the homing function is active.
Bit 6 “Home DI Inv” – Changes polarity of the switch input (digital input).
Bit 7 “Hold At Home” – Configures the drive to hold the home position after completing the homing function. A new start command is required for the drive to
resume normal operation.
Read-Write
No. Display Name Values
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
Read-Write
No. Display Name Values
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
function is enabled and configured by the position control configuration P721 [Position
Control]. The position watch function compares this value to the position watch set
point P747 [PsnWatch1 Stpt], P750 [PsnWatch2 Stpt] when this parameter P746, P749
is selected by the position watch select P745 [PsnWatch1 Select], P748 [PsnWatch2
Select]. The position detect bit P724 [Psn Reg Status] Bit 9 “PsnW1Detect”, Bit 10
“PsnW2Detect” is set when the appropriate condition is satisfied.
747 755 PsnWatch1 Stpt Default: 0 RW 32-bit
750 755 PsnWatch2 Stpt Min/Max: –2147483648 / 2147483647 Integer
Position Watch n Setpoint
Provides set point for the position watch function. The position watch function is
enabled and configured by P721 [Position Control]. The position watch function
compares this value to the position feedback source selected by the position watch
select P745 [PsnWatch1 Select], P748 [PsnWatch2 Select]. The position detect bit P724
[Psn Reg Status] Bit 9 “PsnW1Detect”, Bit 10 “PsnW2Detect” is set when the appropriate
condition is satisfied.
Read-Write
No. Display Name Values
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
Read-Write
No. Display Name Values
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
Read-Write
No. Display Name Values
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
Reverse Move
Options
Vel Override
Intgrtr Hold
Preset Psn
Ref Pause
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Ref Sync
Move
0 = False
Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
1 = True
Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Bit 0 “Vel Override” – Applies the velocity override P788 [PTP Vel Override] to the forward velocity limit P785 [PTP Fwd Vel Lmt] and the reverse velocity limit P786
[PTP Rev Vel Lmt] as a gain. When the velocity override P788 [PTP Vel Override] is 1.1 and the forward velocity limit P785 [PTP Fwd Vel Lmt] is 30 Hz, the bit sets the
maximum forward velocity to 33 Hz.
Bit 1 “Move” – Sets scaled point-to-point position reference to the point-to-point position command P784 [PTP Command]. When the point-to-point mode
selection P771 [PTP Mode] is absolute mode (Option 0), the absolute position is set to the point-to-point position command P784 when the bit rises. When the
point-to-point mode selection P771 [PTP Mode] is index mode (Option 1), the index position is set to the point-to-point position command P784 when the bit rises.
Bit 2 “Reverse Move” – Changes direction of the index position when the point-to-point mode selection P771 [PTP Mode] is index mode (Option 1). Set the
direction with this bit, then set Bit 1 “Move” to 1 to move.
Bit 3 “Preset Psn” – Sets index preset P779 [PTP Index Preset] to the point-to-point position command P784 [PTP Command] when the point-to-point mode
selection P771 [PTP Mode] is index mode (Option 1).
Bit 4 “Intgrtr Hold” – Holds integrator in the velocity control.
Bit 5 “Ref Pause” – Pauses functioning of the point-to-point control. The point-to-point speed forward reference becomes zero, and the position selected reference
P722 [Psn Selected Ref] keeps current position.
Bit 6 “Ref Sync” – Sets initial value to the point-to-point feedback P777 [PTP Feedback]. When motor feedback reaches zero speed, P776 [PTP Reference] and P777
[PTP Feedback] are reset to P836 [Psn Actual].
POSITION CONTROL
Point to Point
Read-Write
No. Display Name Values
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
Provides set point for the point-to-point position control. The value applies to the point-
to-point control when the point-to-point reference selection P775 [PTP Ref Sel] is
P780.When P771 [PTP Mode] is set to 1 “Index,” the value of this parameter represents
the amount of index.
781 PTP Accel Time Units: Secs RW Real
Point-To-Point Acceleration Time Default: 10.00
Provides the ramp time for acceleration (time to go from zero to speed limit). The speed Min/Max: 0.00 / 3600.00
limit is set by P785 [PTP Fwd Vel Lmt] and P786 [PTP Rev Vel Lmt].
782 PTP Decel Time Units: Secs RW Real
Point-To-Point Deceleration Time Default: 10.00
Provides the ramp time for deceleration (time to go from speed limit to zero). The speed Min/Max: 0.00 / 3600.00
limit is set by P785 [PTP Fwd Vel Lmt] and P786 [PTP Rev Vel Lmt].
783 PTP Speed FwdRef Units: Hz RO Real
Point-To-Point Speed Forward Reference RPM
Indicates speed reference output from the point-to-point position control. Typically this Default: 0.00
parameter is used by the drive speed loop. Min/Max: –/+P27 [Motor NP Hertz] x 8
–/+P28 [Motor NP RPM] x 8
784 PTP Command Default: 0 RO 32-bit
Point-To-Point Command Min/Max: –2147483648 / 2147483647 Integer
Indicates position command for the point-to-point position control. The source of the
position command is selected by the speed/torque/position mode P313 [Actv SpTqPs
Mode].
785 PTP Fwd Vel Lmt Units: Hz RW Real
Point-To-Point Forward Velocity Limit RPM
Provides the maximum forward speed reference limit from the PTP regulator. Default: P27 [Motor NP Hertz] x 0.5
P28 [Motor NP RPM] x 0.5
Min/Max: 0.00/P27 [Motor NP Hertz]
0.00/P28 [Motor NP RPM] x 8
Read-Write
No. Display Name Values
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
Provides the amount of time that is applied to the S Curve from the PTP regulator. Min/Max: 0.000 / 4.000
Point to Point
Read-Write
No. Display Name Values
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
Options
Accel Comp
Prof Enable
PTP Enable
PLL Enable
Velocity FF
Ext Vel FF
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 = False
1 = True
Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
POSITION CONTROL
Phase Lock Loop
Read-Write
No. Display Name Values
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
input devices could range upwards of 100 (r/s). Higher bandwidths will quickly resolve
Phase Lock Loop
tracking errors while the lower bandwidths will take longer to settle into a steady state.
Some adjustment will be necessary for the best compromise between noise and
tracking response.
802 755 PLL LPFilter BW Units: R/S RW Real
Phase Locked Loop Low Pass Filter Bandwidth Default: 50.00
Sets low pass filter bandwidth. The filter has two functions: Min/Max: 0.00 / 8000.00
• Basic noise reduction of input velocity.
• Timed delay of input when feed forward is provided to an external master reference
other than an input encoder.
The filter low pass bandwidth should be set for best tracking which occurs when the
filter output coincides with the loop filter output of PLL. Usually that means setting its
bandwidth to the bandwidth of the master reference drive.
803 755 PLL Virt Enc RPM Units: RPM RW Real
Phase Locked Loop Virtual Encoder Revolutions Per Minute Default: 1750.00
Sets RPM of the virtual output device. The value determines the 1 P.U. velocity for the Min/Max: 1.00 / 40000.00
speed out P807 [PLL Speed Out] and does not affect performance.
804 755 PLL EPR Input Default: 1048576 RW 32-bit
Phase Locked Loop Edges Per Revolution Input Min/Max: 1 / 67108864 Integer
Sets edges per revolution of the physical input device. Using the highest line count
device possible smooths PLL operation.
805 755 PLL Rvls Input Default: 1 RW 32-bit
Phase Locked Loop Revolutions Input Min/Max: 1 / 1000000 Integer
Sets revolution of the input encoder. This parameter must be coordinated with the
revolution of the output encoder P812 [PLL Rvls Output] to resolve the gear-ratio
between input revolutions and output (virtual) revolutions. The ratio of input to output
revolutions can always be resolved into integer values and should be reduced to their
lowest common factor.
Read-Write
No. Display Name Values
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
Read-Write
No. Display Name Values
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
Read-Write
No. Display Name Values
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
2 “Offset ReRef.”
Position Offset
Read-Write
No. Display Name Values
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
feedback divider P826 [LdPsn Fdbk Div] to reflect the load pulse count to the motor
Ld Psn Fdbk Scal
(effectively removing the gear box ratio). The accumulated position values P836 [Psn
Actual] and the position load actual P837 [Psn Load Actual] - will be equal if the ratio is
set properly. There may be some difference due to lost motion in the gear train, but
there should not be an accumulated difference. It is often necessary to count gear teeth
as gear box manufacturers often approximate exact ratios with decimal numbers. Enter
a negative value in the numerator to account for reversed motor rotation.
826 755 LdPsn Fdbk Div Default: 1 RW 32-bit
Load Position Feedback Division Min/Max: 1 / 2000000 Integer
Sets denominator of the load EGR function.
Read-Write
No. Display Name Values
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
Read-Write
No. Display Name Values
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
Sets positive limit of the position regulator integral output. Min/Max: 0.00 / 800.00
A value of 100% is equal to parameter 28 [Motor NP RPM].
841 PReg Neg Int Lmt Units: % RW Real
Position Regulation Negative Integral Limit Default: –100.00
Sets negative limit of the position regulator integral output. Min/Max: –800.00 / 0.00
A value of 100% is equal to parameter 28 [Motor NP RPM].
842 PsnReg IntgrlOut Units: Hz RO Real
Position Regulation Integral Output RPM
Indicates output of the position regulator integral channel after the limit function. Default: 0.00
Min/Max: –/+P27 [Motor NP Hertz] x 8
–/+P28 [Motor NP RPM] x 8
843 PsnReg Spd Out Units: Hz RO Real
Position Regulation Speed Output RPM
Indicates final output of the position regulator. Default: 0.00
Min/Max: –/+P27 [Motor NP Hertz] x 8
–/+P28 [Motor NP RPM] x 8
844 PReg Pos Spd Lmt Units: % RW Real
Position Regulation Positive Speed Limit Default: 10.00
Sets positive speed limit of total position regulator output. Min/Max: 0.00 / 800.00
A value of 100% is equal to parameter 28 [Motor NP RPM].
845 PReg Neg Spd Lmt Units: % RW Real
Position Regulation Negative Speed Limit Default: –10.00
Sets negative speed limit of total position regulator output. Min/Max: –800.00 / 0.00
A value of 100% is equal to parameter 28 [Motor NP RPM].
Read-Write
No. Display Name Values
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
Indicates the accumulated pulse count of the position feedback selected by the position
Position Reg
Drive (Port 0)
Communication File
Read-Write
No. Display Name Values
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
“Zero Data” (2) – Type 2 alarm indicated. If running, drive continues to run, speed
reference goes to zero.
“Hold Last” (3) – Type 2 alarm indicated. If running, drive continues to run at the last
value entered from the HIM.
“Send Flt Cfg” (4) – Type 2 alarm indicated. If running, drive continues to run at [DPI Ptn
Flt Ref].
868 DPI Pt1 Flt Ref Default: 0.00 RO Real
869 DPI Pt2 Flt Ref Min/Max: –/+220000000.00
870 DPI Pt3 Flt Ref
DPI Port n Fault Reference
Sets a constant value for the speed reference when [DPI Ptn Flt Actn] option 4 “Send Flt
Cfg” is set and a HIM communication loss is detected.
Read-Write
No. Display Name Values
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
Decel Time 2
Decel Time 1
Accel Time 2
Accel Time 1
SpdRef Sel 2
SpdRef Sel 1
SpdRef Sel 0
Options
Clear Faults
Climit Stop
Coast Stop
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Forward
Reverse
Manual
Jog 2
Jog 1
Start
Stop
Run
Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 = False, 1 = True
880 DPI Ref Rslt Units: Hz RO 32-bit
DPI Reference Result RPM Integer
Present speed reference scaled as a DPI reference for peer to peer communications. The Default: 0.000
COMMUNICATION
value shown is the value prior to the accel/decel ramp and the corrections supplied by Min/Max: –2147483.648 / 2147483.624
Comm Control
slip comp, PI, etc. Used for peer to peer communication with 20-COMM communication
modules.
881 DPI Ramp Rslt Units: Hz RO 32-bit
DPI Ramp Result RPM Integer
Displays the speed reference value, after the limit function. This is the input to the error Default: 0.000
calculator and speed regulator. Used for peer-to-peer communication with 20-COMM Min/Max: –2147483.648 / 2147483.624
communication modules.
882 DPI Logic Rslt RO 32-bit
DPI Logic Result Integer
A version of P879 that is used when doing peer-to-peer control with a 20-COMM communication module. The lower 16 bit command values are copied into the
upper 16 bits of this 32-bit parameter for use with this type of communication module. Not for use with a 20-750 communication module.
Decel Time 2
Decel Time 1
Decel Time 2
Decel Time 1
Accel Time 2
Accel Time 1
Accel Time 2
Accel Time 1
SpdRef Sel 2
SpdRef Sel 1
SpdRef Sel 0
SpdRef Sel 2
SpdRef Sel 1
SpdRef Sel 0
Options
Clear Faults
Clear Faults
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Forward
Forward
Reverse
Reverse
Manual
Manual
Jog 1
Jog 1
Start
Start
Stop
Stop
Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 = False, 1 = True
883 Drive Ref Rslt Units: Hz RO Real
Drive Reference Result RPM
Present frequency reference scaled as a DPI reference for peer to peer communications. Default: 0.000
The value shown is the value prior to the accel/decel ramp and the corrections supplied Min/Max: –/+2147483648.000
by slip comp, PI, etc. Used for peer to peer communication with 20-COMM
communication modules.
884 Drive Ramp Rslt Units: Hz RO Real
Drive Ramp Result RPM
Displays the speed reference value, after the limit function. This is the input to the error Default: 0.000
calculator and speed regulator. This number is scaled so that rated motor speed will read Min/Max: –/+2147483648.000
32768. Used for peer to peer communication with 20-COMM communication modules.
Read-Write
No. Display Name Values
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
Digital In
Options
Security
Port 14
Port 13
Port 11
Port 10
Port 9
Port 8
Port 7
Port 6
Port 5
Port 4
Port 3
Port 2
Port 1
0 = Read Only
Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
1 = Read/Write
Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Digital In
Options
Security
Port 14
Port 13
Port 6
Port 5
Port 4
Port 3
Port 2
Default Port 1
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 = Read Only
1 = Read/Write
COMMUNICATION
Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Security
Reserved
Options
Security
Port 14
Port 13
Port 11
Port 10
Port 9
Port 8
Port 7
Port 6
Port 5
Port 4
Port 3
Port 2
Port 1
Reserved
Reserved
Options
Port 14
Port 13
Port 11
Port 10
Port 9
Port 8
Port 7
Port 6
Port 5
Port 4
Port 3
Port 2
Port 1
Read-Write
No. Display Name Values
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
Important: DPI Datalinks parameters are used for datalinks on legacy 20-COMM-n
communication devices. For embedded EtherNet/IP or 20-750 option datalinks, refer to
the parameters associated with the specific option module.
895 Data In A1 Default: 0 (0 = “Disabled”) RW 32-bit
896 Data In A2 Min/Max: 0 / 159999 Integer
Data Input An
Parameter number whose value will be written from a communications device data
table.
897 Data In B1 See [Data In A1].
898 Data In B2
Data Input Bn
Parameter number whose value will be written from a communications device data
table.
899 Data In C1 See [Data In A1].
900 Data In C2
Data Input Cn
Parameter number whose value will be written from a communications device data
table.
901 Data In D1 See [Data In A1].
COMMUNICATION
902 Data In D2
DPI Datalinks
Data Input Dn
Parameter number whose value will be written from a communications device data
table.
905 Data Out A1 Default: 0 (0 = “Disabled”) RW 32-bit
906 Data Out A2 Min/Max: 0 / 159999 Integer
Data Output An
Parameter number whose value will be written to a communications device data table.
907 Data Out B1 See [Data Out A1].
908 Data Out B2
Data Output Bn
Parameter number whose value will be written from a communications device data
table.
909 Data Out C1 See [Data Out A1].
910 Data Out C2
Data Output Cn
Parameter number whose value will be written from a communications device data
table.
911 Data Out D1 See [Data Out A1].
912 Data Out D2
Data Output Dn
Parameter number whose value will be written from a communications device data
table.
Read-Write
No. Display Name Values
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
Digital In(2)
Options
Port 13 (1)
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Port 14
Port 6
Port 5
Port 4
Port 3
Port 2
Port 1
0 = False
Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 = True
Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
(1) 755 drives only.
(2) If parameter 150 [Digital In Cfg] =1 “Run Level” the absence of a run command is
indicated as a stop asserted.
Options
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Digital In
Port 14
Port 6
Port 5
Port 4
Port 3
Port 2
Port 1
Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 = False
1 = True
COMMUNICATION
Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Owners
Options
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Digital In
Port 14
Port 6
Port 5
Port 4
Port 3
Port 2
Port 1
0 = False
Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
1 = True
Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
(1) 755 drives only.
Options
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Digital In
Port 14
Port 6
Port 5
Port 4
Port 3
Port 2
Port 1
Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 = False
1 = True
Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
(1) 755 drives only.
Read-Write
No. Display Name Values
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Digital In
Port 14
Port 6
Port 5
Port 4
Port 3
Port 2
Port 1
0 = False
Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
1 = True
Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
(1) 755 drives only.
Port 13 (1)
Owners
Options
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Digital In
Port 14
Port 6
Port 5
Port 4
Port 3
Port 2
Port 1 0 = False
Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
1 = True
Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
(1) 755 drives only.
Options
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Digital In
Port 14
Port 6
Port 5
Port 4
Port 3
Port 2
Port 1
0 = False
Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
1 = True
Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
(1) 755 drives only.
Read-Write
No. Display Name Values
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
Read-Write
No. Display Name Values
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
17 = “Safety”
Status
18 = “Fast Stop”
19 = “Port 13”
20 = “Port 14”
932 Last Stop Source Default: 0 = Read Only RO 32-bit
Last Stop Source Options: 0 = “Pwr Removed” Integer
Displays the source that initiated the most recent stop sequence. All bits in this 1-6 = “Port 1-6”
parameter are refreshed each time the drive receives a stop command. 7 = “Digital In”
8 = “Sleep”
9 = “Jog”
10 = “Profiling”
11 = “AutoRestart”
12 = “Pwr Up Start”
13 = “Fault”
14 = “Enable”
15 = “Autotune”
16 = “Precharge”
17 = “Safety”
18 = “Fast Stop”
19 = “Port 13”
20 = “Port 14”
Read-Write
No. Display Name Values
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
CommutNotCfg
Options
Profiler (1)
Precharge
Database
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Startup
Faulted
Enable
Safety
Alarm
Sleep
Stop
Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
(1) 755 drives only. 0 = False
1 = True
Bit 0 “Faulted” – Drive is in a faulted state. See P951 [Last Fault Code].
Bit 1 “Alarm” – A Type 2 alarm exists. See P961 [Type 2 Alarms].
Bit 2 “Enable” – An Enable input is open.
Bit 3 “Precharge” – Drive is in precharge. See P321 [Prchrg Control], P11 [DC Bus Volts].
Bit 4 “Stop” – Drive is receiving a stop signal. See P919 [Stop Owner].
DIAGNOSTICS
Status
Options
Precharge
Database
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Profilier
Startup
Faulted
Enable
Safety
Alarm
Sleep
Stop
Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 = False
1 = True
Read-Write
No. Display Name Values
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
PositionMode
Command Dir
Options
AtZero Speed
Torque Mode
Decelerating
Speed Mode
Accelerating
SpdRef Bit 4
SpdRef Bit 3
SpdRef Bit 2
SpdRef Bit 1
SpdRef Bit 0
Bus Frq Reg
DC Braking
Enable On
Actual Dir
DB Active
Motor OL
Reserved
Stopping
Cur Limit
At Speed
At Home
Running
Jogging
At Limit
Manual
Faulted
Regen
Ready
Active
Alarm
Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 = Condition False
1 = Condition True
Bit 0 “Ready” – Condition is true if there are no start inhibits indicated by P933 [Start Inhibits]. When parameter 150 [Digital In Cfg] option 1 “Run Level” is selected
DIAGNOSTICS
and the run command is low, this bit will also be low.
Status
Read-Write
No. Display Name Values
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
Bit 16 “Running” – This bit indicates that the drive has successfully responded to a start signal. The “Active” (Bit 1) status bit will also be set at the
same time as the Running status. The “Running” bit will remain set while the drive’s control loops are active and during a controlled stop. The
“Running” bit will be clear due to any of the following conditions: drive stopped, drive coast stop, drive jogging, drive autotuning.
Bit 17 “Jogging” – This bit indicates that the drive has successfully responded to a jog signal. The “Active” (Bit 1) status bit will also be set at the
same time as the Jogging status. The “Jogging” bit will remain set while the drive’s control loops are active and during a controlled stop. The
“Jogging” bit will remain set after the jog signal is removed until the drive is stopped. The “Jogging” bit will be clear due to any of the following
conditions: drive stopped, drive coast stop, drive running, drive autotuning.
Bit 18 “Stopping” – Drive is attempting to bring the motor to rest due to a Stop command.
Bit 19 “DC Braking” – Drive is performing DC Braking.
Bit 20 “DB Active” – The Dynamic Brake is active.
Bit 21 “Speed Mode” – When set, the “Speed Mode” bit indicates that motor speed is the active regulation mode. This is the default case when
operating in non-vector control mode, since position and torque can only be controlled in vector control mode. The “Speed Mode” status bit will
clear due to any of the following conditions: drive operating in another regulation mode such as a position regulator, torque regulator, adjustable
voltage control mode. The “Speed Mode” status bit will also clear if the drive is not active (status bit 1 clear).
In cases where the control can automatically switch between speed and torque, such as SLAT FVC control modes, the “Speed Mode” bit will indicate
when speed control is active. In the “Sum” FVC control mode where the speed regulator's output is added to a torque reference, both the “Speed
Mode” and “Torque Mode” status bits will become set while the drive is active.
DIAGNOSTICS
Bit 22 “PositionMode” – When set, the “PositionMode” bit indicates that motor position is the active regulation mode. Position control is only
available when the drive is operating in a vector control mode with a speed and position feedback device. The “Position Mode” status bit will clear
Status
due to any of the following conditions: drive operating in a non-position regulation mode such as a speed regulator, torque regulator, adjustable
voltage control mode. The “PositionMode” status bit will also clear if the drive is not active (status Bit 1 clear).
Bit 23 “Torque Mode” – When set, the “Torque Mode” bit indicates that motor torque is the active regulation mode. Torque control is only available
when the drive is operating in a vector control mode. The “Torque Mode” status bit will clear due to any of the following conditions: drive operating
in another regulation mode such as a speed regulator, position regulator, adjustable voltage control mode. The “Torque Mode” status bit will also
clear if the drive is not active (status Bit 1 clear).
In cases where the control can automatically switch between speed and torque, such as SLAT FVC control modes, the “Torque Mode” bit will indicate
when torque control is active. In the “Sum” FVC control mode where the speed regulator’s output is added to a torque reference, both the “Speed
Mode” and “Torque Mode” status bits will become set while the drive is active.
Bit 24 “AtZero Speed” – When set, the “AtZero Speed” status bit indicates that the value of P131 [Active Vel Fdbk] is near zero. This status bit is set
when the feedback speed magnitude (sign independent) becomes less than the level set in P525 [Zero Speed Limit]. This bit will clear when the
speed exceeds twice the zero speed level.
Bit 25 “At Home” – This bit is set when the difference between P847 [Psn Fdbk] and P737 [Actual Home Psn] is within P726 [In Pos Psn Band].
Bit 26 “At Limit” – This bit is set when a bit in P945 [At Limit Status] is set. See P945 [At Limit Status] for more details.
Bit 27 “Cur Limit” – This bit is set when the drive is running with limited speed or torque avoid an overcurrent condition.
Bit 28 “Bus Frq Reg” – This bit is set when the speed has been regulate to avoid an overcurrent condition.
Bit 29 “Enable On” – This bit is set when the drive is enabled.
Bit 30 “Motor OL” – This bit is set when an excessive motor load exists.
Bit 31 “Regen” – This bit is set when the motor torque direction is opposite of the speed direction.
Read-Write
No. Display Name Values
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
AuRstrCntDwn
FdbkLoss SwO
Decel Rate (2)
Accel Rate (2)
PrchrgClosed
AutoRstr Act
Flux Braking
Autotuning
PID FB Loss
HS Fan On
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
(1) 755 Frame 8 drives and larger only. 0 = Condition False
(2) 753 drives only. 1 = Condition True
DIAGNOSTICS
Bit 1 “AuRstrCntDwn” – Auto Restart is counting down the delay time programmed to attempt a restart.
Bit 2 “HS Fan On” – Heatsink fan is running.
Bit 4 “Flux Braking” –
Bit 5 “FdbkLoss SwO” – This status bit will indicate that a F97 “Auto Tach Switch” fault has occurred. The F97 fault is associated with the option to automatically
switch to the alternate feedback device upon failure of the primary device. The F97 fault indicates that both primary and alternate devices have failed. This could
occur either before or after the switchover to the alternate device.
Bit 7 “Adj VltgMode” – Invalid parameter selection detected.
Bit 8 “PrchrgClosed” – Precharge relay is closed.
Bit 9 “Autotuning” – Drive is running an Autotune procedure.
Bit 10 “PID FB Loss” – The feedback selected for the PID feedback source has detected a Loss condition. The analog feedback signal of Process PID is below 2V
(0…10V signal) or below 4 mA (4…20 mA signal).
Bit 11 “Accel Rate” – When set, indicates that P536 [Accel Time 2] is active. This is the acceleration time from zero to rated frequency/speed for the speed control’s
reference ramp. When clear, indicates that P535 [Accel Time 1] is active. Accel Time 1 is the default selection.
Bit 12 “Decel Rate” – When set, indicates that P538 [Decel Time 2] is active. This is the deceleration time from rated frequency/speed to zero for the speed control’s
reference ramp. When clear, indicates that P537 [Decel Time 1] is active. Decel Time 1 is the default selection.
Bit 13 “N-1 Operate” – Indicates the parallel drive is in operation mode.
Read-Write
No. Display Name Values
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
OW Timeout (1)
Options
OutPhaseLoss
UnderVoltage
AuxFdbkLoss
GndWarning
PosFdbkLoss
ExtPrchrgErr
InPhaseLoss
AltFdbkLoss
PriFdbkLoss
Shear Pin 2
Shear Pin 1
Decel Inhib
Power Loss
Load Loss
Motor OL
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
(1) 753 drives only 0 = Condition False
1 = Condition True
Bit 0 “Power Loss” – A Power Loss exception has been issued. Power Loss detection is a function of the bus manager and is configured by [Pwr Loss Mode n] and
[Pwr Loss n Level]. The corresponding fault and alarm are processed in the background according to P449 [Power Loss Actn] and the state of this bit.
Bit 1 “UnderVoltage” – An Under Voltage exception has been issued. Parameter 460 [UnderVltg Action] must be set to an option other than 0 “Ignore” for this bit to
be set. The corresponding fault and alarm are processed immediately within the same precharge function where the condition status bit is detected.
Bit 2 “Motor OL” – An excessive motor load exists. If P410 [Motor OL Actn] is set to option 0 “Ignore” the overload function will not produce a condition status bit,
alarm status, or fault status. If P410 [Motor OL Actn] is set to option 1 “Alarm” the condition status bit and alarm will be set when the overload value exceeds P412
[Mtr OL Alarm Lvl]. Parameter 412 [Mtr OL Alarm Lvl] must be set to an option other than 0 “Ignore’ to produce a condition status bit alarm.
Bit 3 “Load Loss” – This bit dependent on the setting of P441 [Load Loss Action] which must be set to an option other than 0 “Ignore” to be processed. The
corresponding fault and alarm are processed in the background according to P441 [Load Loss Action] and the state of this bit.
Bit 4 “InPhaseLoss” – Input Phase Loss exception has been issued. The corresponding fault and alarm are processed in the background according to P462 [InPhase
LossActn] and the state of this bit. Parameter 462 [InPhase LossActn] is not used to inhibit this bit.
DIAGNOSTICS
Bit 5 “OutPhaseLoss” – Output Phase Loss exception has been issued. The corresponding fault and alarm are processed in the background according to P444
Status
[OutPhaseLossActn] and the state of this bit. Parameter 444 [OutPhaseLossActn] is not used to inhibit this bit.
Bit 6 “Decel Inhib” – The drive is being Inhibited from decelerating to the commanded speed. If the drive is not decelerating (P935 [Drive Status 1] Bit 5 = 0), is not
in the Run state, or if P635 [Spd Options Ctrl] Bit 0 = 1, this bit is cleared. Otherwise this bit is set when a decel inhibit condition is detected. Parameter 409 [Dec
Inhibit Actn] has no affect on this bit.
Bit 7 “Shear Pin 1” – Value set in P436 [Shear Pin1 Level] has been reached or exceeded. Parameter 435 [Shear Pin 1 Actn] must be set to an option other than 0
“Ignore” for this bit to be set. The corresponding fault and alarm are processed in the background according to P435 [Shear Pin 1 Actn] and the state of this bit.
Bit 8 “Shear Pin 2” – Value set in P439 [Shear Pin2 Level] has been reached or exceeded. Parameter 438 [Shear Pin 2 Actn] must be set to an option other than 0
“Ignore” for this bit to be set. The corresponding fault and alarm are processed in the background according to P438 [Shear Pin 2 Actn] and the state of this bit.
Bit 9 “PriFdbkLoss” – When set, indicates that the device selected as the primary velocity feedback source has reported a device failure. P125 [Pri Vel Fdbk Sel]
selects the device used as the primary velocity feedback source. The primary feedback device supplies motor speed feedback if the Automatic Tach Switchover
option is either disabled or has not switched to the alternate feedback device. In order to report this condition as an alarm, the feedback loss configuration
parameter for the primary feedback device must be configured for “Alarm.”
Bit 10 “AltFdbkLoss” – When set, indicates that the device selected as the alternate velocity feedback source has reported a device failure. P128 [Alt Vel Fdbk Sel]
selects the device used as the alternate velocity feedback source. The alternate feedback device supplies motor speed feedback if the Automatic Tach Switchover
option is enabled and the primary feedback device has failed. In order to report this condition as an alarm, the feedback loss configuration parameter for the
alternate feedback device must be configured for “Alarm.”
Bit 11 “AuxFdbkLoss” – When set, indicates that the device selected as the auxiliary velocity feedback source has reported a device failure. P132 [Aux Vel Fdbk Sel]
selects the device used as the auxiliary velocity feedback source. The auxiliary feedback device can be used to supply motor speed reference. In order to report this
condition as an alarm, the feedback loss configuration parameter for the auxiliary feedback device must be configured for “Alarm.”
Bit 12 “PosFdbkLoss” – When set, indicates that the device selected as the position feedback source has reported a device failure. P135 [Psn Fdbk Sel] selects the
device used as the position feedback source. Position feedback is used for position control applications. It can be the same device used for velocity feedback or
position feedback can be supplied by a separate device. In order to report this condition as an alarm, the feedback loss configuration parameter for the position
feedback device must be configured for “Alarm.”
Bit 13 “ExtPrchrgErr” – Selected digital input assigned to the external Precharge Seal control, P190 [DI Prchrg Seal], is not active when the bus has stabilized. The
corresponding fault and alarm are processed according to P323 [Prchrg Err Cfg] and the state of this bit.
Bit 14 “GndWarning” – Value set in P467 [Ground Warn Lvl] has been exceeded. Parameter 466 [Ground Warn Actn] must be set to an option other than 0 “Ignore”
for this bit to be set. The corresponding fault and alarm are processed in the background based on P466 [Ground Warn Actn] and the state of this bit.
Bit 15 “OW Timeout” – The value set in P1172 [TorqAlarm Timeout] has been exceeded. This bit is set by the pump off algorithm. The corresponding fault and alarm
are processed in the background based on the state of this bit.
Read-Write
No. Display Name Values
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
Read-Write
No. Display Name Values
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
FreqOSNegLmt
MaxSpeed Lmt
Regen PwrLmt
Therm RegLmt
Mtrng PwrLmt
Options
FreqOSPosLmt
TrqPrvNegLmt
TrqCurNegLmt
PWM FreqLmt
BusVltgFVLmt
PsnReg LoLmt
FlxCurNegLmt
PsnReg LoSpd
PsnReg HiLmt
PsnReg HiSpd
TrqPrvPosLmt
TrqCurPosLmt
FlxCurPosLmt
OverSpd Lmt
Cur Rate Lmt
Flux Braking
Mtr Vltg Lkg
Current Lmt
Freq Lo Lmt
Trq Pos Lmt
Freq Hi Lmt
Cur Lmt FV
Economize
Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 = Condition False
1 = Condition True
Bit 0 “Current Lmt” – Scalar current limit is adjusting the output frequency
Bit 1 “Bus Vltg Lmt” – Scalar bus voltage limit is adjusting the output frequency
Bit 2 “MaxSpeed Lmt” – Motor speed reference is limited to maximum forward speed or maximum reverse speed. See P520 [Max Fwd Speed], P521 [Max Rev
Speed].
Bit 3 “OverSpd Lmt” – Motor speed reference positive (+) trim is at maximum speed limit plus or minus (+/-) the overspeed limit
Bit 4 “Spd Reg Lmt” – The output of the drive’s speed regulator has reached limit. See P655 [Spd Reg Pos Lmt], P656 [Spd Reg Neg Lmt].
Bit 5 “Freq Hi Lmt” – Scalar control inner ramp high limit is active
Bit 6 “Freq Lo Lmt” – Scalar control inner ramp low limit is active
Bit 7 “FreqOSPosLmt” – Scalar control inner ramp positive (+) overspeed limit is active
Bit 8 “FreqOSNegLmt” – Scalar control inner ramp negative (-) overspeed limit is active
Bit 9 “Flux Braking” – Flux braking is active
Bit 10 “Economize” – Economize is active
Bit 11 “PWM FreqLmt” – PWM frequency is reduced by the thermal regulator
Bit 12 “DB Res Limit” – Dynamic brake thermal protection is active. Verify P385 [DB ExtPulseWatts].
DIAGNOSTICS
Status
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Options
Port 8
Port 7
Port 6
Port 5
Port 4
0 = Condition False
Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
1 = Condition True
Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Read-Write
No. Display Name Values
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
Enable
Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 = Condition False
1 = Condition True
Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
occur during a breakdown. When troubleshooting, it is often helpful to know the first
fault. This parameter is for convenience. A comprehensive history of fault information is
available through the fault que (via HIM screens and / or software tools such as Drive
Explorer).
952 Fault Status A RO 32-bit
Fault Status A Integer
Indicates the occurrence of conditions that have been configured as faults. These conditions are from 937 [Condition Sts 1].
See parameter 937 [Condition Sts 1] for bit descriptions.
OutPhaseLoss
UnderVoltage
Options
AuxFdbkLoss
PosFdbkLoss
ExtPrchrgErr
InPhaseLoss
AltFdbkLoss
PriFdbkLoss
Shear Pin 2
Shear Pin 1
Decel Inhib
Power Loss
Load Loss
Motor OL
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 = Condition False
1 = Condition True
Read-Write
No. Display Name Values
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
TrqPrvSpdBnd (1)
Options
FluxAmpsRang
SinkUnderTmp
AuRstExhaust
IXOVoltRange
TPEnclsCfg (1)
IRVoltsRange
OW Alarm TO
Ground Fault
Overspd Lmt
SafetyBrdFlt
Aux InputFlt
Prchrg Open
OverVoltage
TransistorOT
HW OverCur
TrvlLimCflct
End Lmt Sw
Heatsink OT
SW OverCur
Excess Load
Over Travel
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Drive OL
Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
(1) 755 drives only. 0 = Condition False
1 = Condition True
Bit 0 “Aux InputFlt” –
Bit 1 “OverVoltage” – Over voltage trip occurred.
Bit 2 “Drive OL” – Indicates the drive is overloaded. P940 [Drive OL Count] reached 100%.
Bit 3 “Heatsink OT” – Indicates the drive heatsink is over temperature. P943 [Drive Temp Pct] reached 100%.
Bit 4 “TransistorOT” – Indicates the transistor (IGBT) junction is over temperature. P941 [IGBT Temp Pct] reached 100%.
Bit 5 “SinkUnderTmp” – Indicates the heatsink temperature is under -18.7 °C (-2 °F).
Bit 6 “Excess Load” – Motor did not come up to speed in the allotted time during autotune.
Bit 7 “Overspd Lmt” – When set, indicates that a F25 “OverSpeed Limit” fault has occurred. This is a non-configurable fault. An overspeed condition results when
the motor speed falls outside of its normal operating range. The limits of this range are established by P521 [Max Rev Speed] - P524 [Overspeed Limit] = (lower
limit) and P520 [Max Fwd Speed] + P524 [Overspeed Limit] = (upper limit). In flux vector control mode or scaler control mode with encoder, the motor speed used
is a 2msec averaged value of P131 [Active Vel Fdbk]. In scaler control mode without an encoder, the overspeed check uses P1 [Output Frequency]. The overspeed
condition must exist for at least 16 milliseconds before it causes a fault to occur.
Fault/Alarm Info
Command Dir
Options
AtZero Speed
Torque Mode
Decelerating
Speed Mode
Accelerating
SpdRef Bit 4
SpdRef Bit 3
SpdRef Bit 2
SpdRef Bit 1
SpdRef Bit 0
Bus Frq Reg
DC Braking
Enable On
Actual Dir
DB Active
Motor OL
Reserved
Stopping
Cur Limit
At Speed
At Home
Running
Jogging
At Limit
Manual
Faulted
Regen
Ready
Active
Alarm
Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 = Condition False
1 = Condition True
Read-Write
No. Display Name Values
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
AuRstrCntDwn
Options
FdbkLoss SwO
PrchrgClosed
AutoRstr Act
Flux Braking
Autotuning
PID FB Loss
Decel Rate
Accel Rate
HS Fan On
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 = Condition False
1 = Condition True
956 Fault Frequency Units: Hz RO Real
Fault Frequency Default: 0.00
Captures and displays the current value of P1 [Output Frequency], in Hertz, at the time Min/Max: –/+ 650.00
of the last fault. Setting P300 [Speed Units] to option 1 “RPM” does not affect this
parameter.
For some faults, the value captured in this parameter may not match peak/low at time
of fault due to data latency.
Fault/Alarm Info
UnderVoltage
Options
Gnd Warning
AuxFdbkLoss
Task Overrun
PosFdbkLoss
InPhaseLoss
AltFdbkLoss
PriFdbkLoss
Shear Pin 2
Shear Pin 1
Decel Inhib
Power Loss
Load Loss
Motor OL
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 = Condition False
1 = Condition True
Read-Write
No. Display Name Values
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
PWMFrq Reduc
N-1 Operate (1)
StartOnPwrUp
Profile Actv (3)
CurLmt Reduc
Gnd Warning
Homing Actv
OW Level (2)
Heatsink OT
DB Res OT
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Drive OL
IGBT OT
Waking
Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
(1) 755 Frame 8 drives and larger only. 0 = Condition False
(2) 753 drives only. 1 = Condition True
(3) 755 drives only.
Fault/Alarm Info
Bit 0 “IGBT OT” – Indicates the transistor (IGBT) junction temperature reached the alarm level, which is 10 °C (50 °F) below the maximum (fault level) junction
DIAGNOSTICS
temperature.
Bit 1 Heatsink OT” – Indicates the heatsink temperature reached the alarm level, which is 10 °C (50 °F) below the maximum (fault level) heatsink temperature.
Bit 2 “Waking” – The Sleep /Wake function is in the Waking condition.
Bit 3 “StartOnPwrUp” – The Start on powerup feature is active.
Bit 4 “Drive OL” – Indicates overload condition has reached the alarm level and P940 [Drive OL Count] has reached 50%.
Bit 5 “CurLmt Reduc” – Indicates the transistor (IGBT) junction temperature reached the level of current limit fold back, which is 5 °C (41 °F) below the maximum
(fault level) junction temperature.
Bit 6 “PWMFrq Reduc” – Indicates the transistor (IGBT) junction temperature reached the level of PWM frequency fold back, which is 10 °C (50 °F) below the
maximum (fault level) junction temperature. Or the instantaneous rising of junction temperature exceeded 60 °C (140 °F).
Bit 7 “Profile Actv” – Indicates the profile function is active, P1213 [Profile Command] Bit 12 “Prof Run Alarm” is set.
Bit 8 “Homing Actv” – Indicates the homing function is active, P731 [Homing Control] Bit 5 “Homing Alarm” is set.
Bit 9 “Not Home Set” – Indicates the profile function has executed without first executing the homing function, P1213 [Profile Command] Bit 11
“HomeNotSetAlarm” is set.
Bit 10 “Gnd Warning” – The value set in P467 [Ground Warn Lvl] has been exceeded.
Bit 11 “OW Level” – The value set in P1171 [TorqAlarm Level] has been reached.
Bit 12 “OW Alarm TO” – The value set in P1172 [TorqAlm Timeout] has been reached.
Bit 13 “PumpOff Alrm” – The pump off condition is active.
Bit 14 “N-1 Operate” – Indicates the parallel drive is in operation mode.
Bit 15 “DB Res OT” – Indicates the dynamic brake resistor has exceeded its maximum operating temperature.
Read-Write
No. Display Name Values
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
BrakeSlipped (2)
AltOpenLoop (1)
PriOpenLoop (1)
Options
FluxAmpsRang
TrqProvCflct (2)
BipolarCflct (1)
VHz Incmpble
IXOVoltRange
VHzBoostLmt
VHzNegSlope
IRVltg Range
Prchrg Open
PM Off Cflct
PM FS Cflct
DigIn Cfg B
DigIn Cfg C
Sleep Cfg
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Frq Cflct
DL Cflct
Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
(1) 753 drives only. 0 = Condition False
(2) 755 drives only. 1 = Condition True
Bit 0 “Sleep Cfg” – The Sleep/Wake function is not configured properly. Refer to P350 [Sleep Wake Mode] for conditions required to start drive.
Bit 1 “BrakeSlipped” – The Torque Prove function encountered a Brake Slip condition.
Bit 2 “TrqProvCflct” – The Torque Prove function is not configured properly. Feedback device must be setup to fault if loss is detected and to use dual channel,
differential type encoder if encoder feedback is selected. For encoderless operation, read the Attention statement under Lifting/Torque Proving on page 356.
Fault/Alarm Info
DIAGNOSTICS
Read-Write
No. Display Name Values
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
OutPhaseLoss
UnderVoltage
Options
Gnd Warning
AuxFdbkLoss
Task Overrun
PosFdbkLoss
InPhaseLoss
AltFdbkLoss
PriFdbkLoss
Shear Pin 2
Shear Pin 1
Decel Inhib
Power Loss
Load Loss
Motor OL
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 = Condition False
1 = Condition True
parameter for the primary feedback device must be configured for “Alarm.”
Bit 10 “AltFdbkLoss” – When set, indicates that the device selected as the alternate velocity feedback source has reported a device failure. P128 [Alt Vel Fdbk Sel]
selects the device used as the alternate velocity feedback source. The alternate feedback device supplies motor speed feedback if the Automatic Tach Switchover
option is enabled and the primary feedback device has failed. In order to report this condition as an alarm, the feedback loss configuration parameter for the
alternate feedback device must be configured for “Alarm.”
Bit 11 “AuxFdbkLoss” – When set, indicates that the device selected as the auxiliary velocity feedback source has reported a device failure. P132 [Aux Vel Fdbk Sel]
selects the device used as the auxiliary velocity feedback source. The auxiliary feedback device can be used to supply motor speed reference. In order to report this
condition as an alarm, the feedback loss configuration parameter for the auxiliary feedback device must be configured for “Alarm.”
Bit 12 “PosFdbkLoss” – When set, indicates that the device selected as the position feedback source has reported a device failure. P135 [Psn Fdbk Sel] selects the
device used as the position feedback source. Position feedback is used for position control applications. It can be the same device used for velocity feedback or
position feedback can be supplied by a separate device. In order to report this condition as an alarm, the feedback loss configuration parameter for the position
feedback device must be configured for “Alarm.”
Bit 14 “GndWarning” – Value set in P467 [Ground Warn Lvl] has been exceeded.
Bit 15 “Task Overrun” – System resource utilization has been exceeded. See System Resource Allocation on page 307 for details.
963 AlarmB at Fault RO 32-bit
Alarm B at Fault Integer
Captures and displays P960 [Alarm Status B] at the time of the last fault.
See parameter 960 [Alarm Status B] for bit descriptions.
For some alarms, the value captured in this parameter may not match peak/low at time of fault due to data latency.
For details on alarms and faults, refer to Chapter 6.
PWMFrq Reduc
Options
StartOnPwrUp
PumpOff Alrm
CurLmt Reduc
Not Home Set
OW Alarm TO
Gnd Warning
Homing Actv
N-1 Operate
Heatsink OT
DB Res OT
OW Level
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Drive OL
IGBT OT
Waking
Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
(1) 755 drives only. 0 = Condition False
1 = Condition True
Read-Write
No. Display Name Values
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
Read-Write
No. Display Name Values
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
Read-Write
No. Display Name Values
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
Peak1 Peak
Peak1 Hold
Options
Peak1 Set
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Bit 0 “Peak1 Peak” – 0 = Capture minimum value of the input signal. 1 = Capture maximum value of the input signal.
Bit 1 “Peak1 Hold” – 0 = Monitor input. 1 = Ignore input and hold output at present value. This bit is overridden by Bit 2.
Bit 2 “Peak1 Set” – 0 = Resume normal capture of the input signal value (assuming Bit 1 is also = 0). The preset signal will be used as a starting value to compare
against further changes in the input signal level. 1 = Force output of the peak detect function to equal the signal selected by [PkDtctnPresetSel].
1040 755 Peak 1 Change RO 16-bit
Peak 1 Change Integer
Status of the peak detectors.
Peak1Change
Options
Peak Detection
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
DIAGNOSTICS
Read-Write
No. Display Name Values
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
Peak2 Peak
Peak2 Hold
Options
Peak2 Set
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Bit 0 “Peak2 Peak” – 0 = Capture minimum value of the input signal. 1 = Capture maximum value of the input signal.
Bit 1 “Peak2 Hold” – 0 = Monitor input. 1 = Ignore input and hold output at present value. This bit is overridden by Bit 2.
Bit 2 “Peak2 Set” – 0 = Resume normal capture of the input signal value (assuming Bit 1 is also = 0). The preset signal will be used as a starting value to compare
Peak Detection
DIAGNOSTICS
against further changes in the input signal level. 1 = Force output of the peak detect function to equal the signal selected by [PkDtctnPresetSel].
1045 755 Peak 2 Change RO 16-bit
Peak 2 Change Integer
Status of the peak detectors.
Peak2Change
Options
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Read-Write
No. Display Name Values
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
Anti Windup
Options
Percent Ref
Zero Clamp
Preload Int
Stop Mode
Ramp Ref
Fdbk Sqrt
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Default Reserved
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Bit 0 “Preload Int” – Preload the PID integral term with PID Preload value.
Bit 1 “Ramp Ref” – Ramp PID Reference when first enabled.
Bit 2 “Zero Clamp” – Clamp PID output to zero when P1079 [PID Output Sel] is set to option 2 “Speed Trim” or 4 “Torque Trim.”
Bit 3 “Fdbk Sqrt” – Apply Square root function to the Feedback signal.
Bit 4 “Stop Mode” – When P1079 [PID Output Sel] is set to option 2 “Speed Trim,” PID remains active during stopping maneuver.
Bit 5 “Anti Windup” – Prevents PID integrator from getting too far ahead of frequency ramp.
Bit 6 “Percent Ref” – When P1079 [PID Output Sel] is set to option 2 “Speed Trim,” PID output is a percentage of the Speed Reference versus a percentage of P27
[Motor NP Hertz].
1066 PID Control RW 16-bit
PID Control Integer
Used for dynamically controlling the Process PID controller.
PID InvError
Options
PID Enable
PID Reset
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
PID Hold
APPLICATIONS
Process PID
0 = Condition False
Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
1 = Condition True
Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Read-Write
No. Display Name Values
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
Read-Write
No. Display Name Values
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
KD = P1088
dPI Error = Error - Last Error
dt = Interrupt Time
A setting of zero disables this parameter.
1089 PID Status RO 16-bit
PID Status Integer
Status of the Process PI regulator.
PID Enabled
PID In Limit
Options
PID Reset
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
PID Hold
0 = Condition False
Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
1 = Condition True
Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Read-Write
No. Display Name Values
Data Type
Full Name
Process PID Group
Description
APPLICATIONS File
Read-Write
No. Display Name Values
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
FW LoadLimit
Options
Fast Stop Bk
BrkSlipEncls
BrkSlipStart
Encoderless
Test Brake
TP Enable
Micro Psn
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Preload
Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Bit 6 “BrkSlipStart” – Starts drive if Brake slippage is detected. Drive does not start if P933 [Start Inhibits] exists.
Bit 7 “Test Brake” – Tests the brake at Start. Torque is applied against the brake while movement is monitored.
Bit 8 “Fast Stop Bk” – Brake is set immediately upon receiving a Fast Stop input vs. setting the brake after the ramp.
Bit 9 “BkSlp SpdLmt” – When a brake slip condition is detected, the load is lowered at a fixed speed (Preset Speed 1).
1101 755 Trq Prove Setup RW 16-bit
Torque Prove Setup Integer
Allows control of specific torque proving functions through a communication device.
NHdwrOvrTrvl
PHdwrOvrTrvl
Options
End Stop Rev
Float Micro
Decel Fwd
Decel Rev
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Fast Stop
Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Read-Write
No. Display Name Values
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
RefLoadLmted
Options
DecelLmtActv
EndLimitActv
BrakeRelease
LoadTestActv
BrkSlip1 Alm
Encoderless
Micro Psn
Brake Set
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
755
Torque Prove
Read-Write
No. Display Name Values
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
Read-Write
No. Display Name Values
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
Traverse Ena
Options
Sync Enable
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Bit 0 “Sync Enable” – Used in combination with an optional digital input to begin Synchronous speed change upon the falling edge of enable.
Bit 1 “Traverse Ena” – Used in combination with an optional digital input to enable/disable the speed traverse routine.
1121 Fiber Status RO 16-bit
Fiber Status Integer
Status of Sync and Traverse functions.
Traverse Dec
Options
Traverse On
Sync Ramp
Sync Hold
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
0 = Disabled
Fibers Function
APPLICATIONS
Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
1 = Enabled
Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Bit 0 “Synch Hold” – Set when the Synchronous Speed change function is holding the speed reference constant. The speed will begin ramping to its setpoint upon
the falling edge of Sync Enable.
Bit 1 “Sync Ramp” – Set when the Synchronous Speed change function is ramping to its setpoint.
Bit 2 “Traverse On” – Set when the Traverse Speed function is varying the speed, either increasing or decreasing.
Bit 3 “Traverse Dec” – Set when the Traverse Speed function is decreasing the motor speed.
1122 Sync Time Units: Secs RW Real
Synchronize Time Default: 0.0
The time in seconds to ramp from the “held speed reference” to the current speed Min/Max: 0.0 / 3600.0
reference, after the Sync input is de-energized.
1123 Traverse Inc Units: Secs RW Real
Traverse Increment Default: 0.00
Sets the time period in seconds of increasing speed for the Fiber Traverse function. Min/Max: 0.00 / 30.00
1124 Traverse Dec Units: Secs RW Real
Traverse Decrement Default: 0.00
Sets the time period in seconds of decreasing speed for the Fiber Traverse function. Min/Max: 0.00 / 30.00
1125 Max Traverse Units: Hz RW Real
Maximum Traverse RPM
Sets the amplitude of the triangle wave speed modulation for the Fiber Traverse Default: 0.00
function. The total speed variation will be twice this value, from speed ref plus Max Min/Max: 0.00 / P520 [Max Fwd Speed]
Traverse to speed ref minus Max Traverse.
Read-Write
No. Display Name Values
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
Read-Write
No. Display Name Values
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
Options
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Read-Write
No. Display Name Values
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
Read-Write
No. Display Name Values
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
Options
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 = Disabled
APPLICATIONS
1 = Enabled
Pump Jack
Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Read-Write
No. Display Name Values
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
Read-Write
No. Display Name Values
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
Bit 0 “Pos Filter” – Sets level of filtering on torque for position calculation: 0 = Light (Default), 1 = Heavy. Used to remove extra peaks in the waveform.
Bit 1 “Pos Offset” – Enables/disables correction factor for motor slip in position calculator. Set bit if torques and position count are drifting apart.
APPLICATIONS
Bit 2 “Pos Min Trq” – Sets the minimum torque threshold for the position detector. 0 = 10% (Default), 1 = Auto Detect Min Torque.
Pump Off
Bit 3 “Cycle PO Pos” – Enables/disables positive level changes for Pump Off in cycle mode.
1189 Pump Off Action Default: 0 = “Change Speed” RW 32-bit
Pump Off Action Options: 0 = “Change Speed” Integer
Selects the action to be taken after a pump off condition has been detected. 1 = “Always Stop”
“Change Speed” (0) – When a pump off condition is detected, speed is reduced by the 2 = “Stop After 1”
percentage set in P1196 [Pump Off Speed] and runs for the time set in P1197 [Pump Off 3 = “Stop After 2”
Time]. If condition continues, speed is reduced a second time. The pump will remain at
this speed until the pump off condition no longer exists.
“Always Stop” (1) – Stops pump when a pump off condition is detected. Pump will
remain stopped for the time set in P355 [Wake Time].
“Stop After 1” (2) – When a pump off condition is detected, speed is reduced by the
percentage set in P1196 [Pump Off Speed] and runs for the time set in P1197 [Pump Off
Time]. Pump will stop if torque continues to change while at the reduced speed. Pump
will remain stopped for the time set in P353 [Sleep Time].
“Stop After 2” (3) – When a pump off condition is detected, speed is reduced by the
percentage set in P1196 [Pump Off Speed] and runs for the time set in P1197 [Pump Off
Time]. If torque change continues, speed is reduced a second time by the same
percentage. Pump will stop if torque continues to change while at the reduced speed.
Pump will remain stopped for the time entered in P353 [Sleep Time].
1190 Pump Off Control Default: 0 = “Disable” RW 32-bit
Pump Off Control Options: 0 = “Disable” Integer
Enables/Disable the pump off control or select the source for the torque level. 1 = “Baseline Set”
“Baseline Set” (1) – The control uses a torque baseline created after any start of the 2 = “Fixed Setpt”
drive (first ten cycles). It is critical that this data is gathered from a “full” well.
“Fixed Setpt” (2) – The control uses the value set in P1194 [Torque Setpoint]. Use the
value in P1200 [Pct Drop Torque] as a guideline in “Automatic” or “Position” mode. In
“Cycle” mode use P1198 [Pct Cycle Torque] as a guideline.
Read-Write
No. Display Name Values
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
Pump Stopped
Options
PumpOff Alrm
Pump OffEnbl
Pump Slowed
Pump Stable
TopOf Stroke
Cycle Used
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
0 = Condition False
Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
1 = Condition True
Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Read-Write
No. Display Name Values
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
Read-Write
No. Display Name Values
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
PositionMode
Options
Restart Step
Vel Override
In Position
Step Bit 4
Step Bit 3
Step Bit 2
Step Bit 1
Step Bit 0
Complete
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Running
Stopped
Enabled
Resume
Holding
Dwell
Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 = Condition False
1 = Condition True
Bit 0 “Step Bit 0” – Bit 0 through Bit 4 indicate executing step number in the move table in binary format.
Bit 1 “Step Bit 1”
Bit 2 “Step Bit 2”
Bit 3 “Step Bit 3”
Bit 4 “Step Bit 4”
Bit 8 “Enabled” – Indicates that the profile control logic is enabled. When the drive is started with the profiler selection (Option 6) in the speed/torque/position
mode P313 [Actv SpTqPs Mode], this bit turns on.
APPLICATIONS
Profiling
Bit 9 “Running” – Indicates that the profile control logic is in running state.
Bit 10 “PositionMode” – Indicates that the profile control logic is using position control logic.
Bit 11 “Dwell” – Indicates that the profile control logic is in dwell state.
Bit 12 “Holding” – Indicates that the profile control logic is in holding states
Bit 13 “In Position” – Indicates that the target position has been reached at the completion of a move. The in position bandwidth P726 [In Pos Psn Band] can be
adjusted to affect when this bit is set with respect to the target position. This bit will be cleared when a new move is begun. The status of this bit is not meaningful
when using blended steps.
Bit 14 “Complete” – Indicates that all steps in the move table have been executed and a step with a End action has been reached. The profile control logic is
complete. This bit will be cleared when the profile is first enabled.
Bit 15 “Stopped” – Indicates that the profile control logic stops the drive following Bit 14 “Complete” and any additional dwell time specified for the End step. This
bit will be cleared when a new profile is begun.
Bit 16 “Resume” – Indicates that an existing step is to resume execution when the profile is enabled. A previously running step will then be allowed to complete.
When the bit is clear, the profile will begin at its Starting Step.
Bit 17 “Restart Step” – Follows the state of the restart step bit in P1213 [Profile Command] Bit 10 “Restart Step.”
Bit 18 “Vel Override” – Follows the state of the velocity override bit in P1213 [Profile Command] Bit 9 “Vel Override.”
Bit 19 “Home Not Set” – Indicates that the home position is not defined and the move table contains a position absolute move type. When this bit is set the profile
will not be allowed to execute. This bit will be cleared when either a homing function or position redefine function is completed.
1212 755 Units Traveled Units: Cnts RO Real
Units Traveled Default: Read Only
Indicates total number of units traveled. The relationship between the feedback edge Min/Max: –/+ 2200000000.00
counts and the position units is determined by the P1215 [Counts Per Unit]. Actual
motor position is converted from the edge counts to this value using the P1215 [Counts
Per Unit].
Read-Write
No. Display Name Values
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
HomNotSetAlm
Options
Restart Step
Vel Override
StrStepSel4
StrStepSel3
StrStepSel2
StrStepSel1
StrStepSel0
Hold Step
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
Bit 0 “StrStepSel0” – Bit 0 through Bit 4 set initial or starting step in the move table in binary format. A starting step value of zero results in no motion when the
drive is enabled.
Bit 1 “StrStepSel1”
Bit 2 “StrStepSel2”
Bit 3 “StrStepSel3”
APPLICATIONS
Bit 4 “StrStepSel4”
Profiling
Bit 8 “Hold Step” – When the drive is enabled with this bit is set, the drive starts and runs at zero velocity. The starting step is not executed until the “Hold Step” bit
is removed. For non-blended moves, the drive will hold zero speed and/or current position. This does not stop the drive. For blended moves, the drive will continue
to run at the step velocity. If the Hold Step bit is removed, then the conditions required to complete the step can be evaluated.
Bit 9 “Vel Override” – Can be used to rescale all move velocities by the velocity override P1216 [ProfVel Override]. When this bit is off, a scale factor of 1 is used.
Bit 10 “Restart Step” – Can be used to disable a currently executing profile. This bit forces the current step to reset to the starting step value.
Bit 11 “HomNotSetAlm” – Sets condition to indicate the “home position not set” alarm. The absolute position type will work without home position if the bit is off.
Default state is Enabled.
Bit 12 “Prof Run Alm” – Sets condition to indicate the profile running alarm when the drive is running. Default state is Enabled.
1215 755 Counts Per Unit Default: 1 RW 32-bit
Counts Per Unit Min/Max: 1 / 2200000000 Integer
Sets number of position feedback counts per unit of machine travel (for example 1024
encoder edge counts per inch). This parameter is used to scale position targets from
their entered values of units to internal units of encoder edge counts. This parameter is
also used to convert actual motor position from encoder edge counts back into the
desired units for display in P1212 [Units Traveled].
1216 755 ProfVel Override Units: % RW Real
Profile Velocity Override Default: 100.00
Sets multiplier for all move velocities when the velocity override function is selected Min/Max: 10.00 / 150.00
P1213 [Profile Command] Bit 9 “Vel Override.” This parameter is typically set to a value
less than 1. When the velocity override bit P1213 [Profile Command] Bit 9 “Vel Override”
is off, a scale factor of 1 is used.
Read-Write
No. Display Name Values
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
AbortProfile
Vel Override
Options
StrStepSel4
StrStepSel3
StrStepSel2
StrStepSel1
StrStepSel0
Abort Step
Hold Step
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Step 16
Step 15
Step 14
Step 13
Step 12
Step 11
Step 10
Step 9
Step 8
Step 7
Step 6
Step 5
Step 4
Step 3
Step 2
Step 1
Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 = Condition False
1 = Condition True
Bit 0 “Hold Step” – sets polarity of the digital input for the hold step, P1218 [DI Hold Step].
Bit 1 “Abort Step” – sets polarity of the digital input for abort step, P1219 [DI Abort Step].
Bit 2 “AbortProfile” – sets polarity of the digital input for abort profile, P1220 [DI Abort Profile].
Bit 3 “Vel Override” – sets polarity of the digital input for velocity override, P1221 [DI Vel Override].
Bit 4 “StrStepSel0” – sets polarity of the digital input for start step 1, P1222 [DI StrtStep Sel0].
Bit 5 “StrStepSel1” – sets polarity of the digital input for start step 2, P1223 [DI StrtStep Sel1].
Bit 6 “StrStepSel2” – sets polarity of the digital input for start step 3, P1224 [DI StrtStep Sel2].
Bit 7 “StrStepSel3” – sets polarity of the digital input for start step 4, P1225 [DI StrtStep Sel3].
Bit 8 “StrStepSel4” – sets polarity of the digital input for start step 5, P1226 [DI StrtStep Sel4]
APPLICATIONS
Bit 9 “Step 1” – sets polarity of the digital input for move step 1, P1230 [Step 1 Type].
Profiling
Bit 10 “Step 2” – sets polarity of the digital input for move step 2, P1240 [Step 2 Type].
Bit 11 “Step 3” – sets polarity of the digital input for move step 3, P1250 [Step 3 Type].
Bit 12 “Step 4” – sets polarity of the digital input for move step 4, P1260 [Step 4 Type].
Bit 13 “Step 5” – sets polarity of the digital input for move step 5, P1270 [Step 5 Type].
Bit 14 “Step 6” – sets polarity of the digital input for move step 6, P1280 [Step 6 Type].
Bit 15 “Step 7” – sets polarity of the digital input for move step 7, P1290 [Step 7 Type].
Bit 16 “Step 8” – sets polarity of the digital input for move step 8, P1300 [Step 8 Type].
Bit 17 “Step 9” – sets polarity of the digital input for move step 9, P1310 [Step 9 Type].
Bit 18 “Step 10” – sets polarity of the digital input for move step 10, P1320 [Step 10 Type].
Bit 19 “Step 11” – sets polarity of the digital input for move step 11, P1330 [Step 11 Type].
Bit 20 “Step 12” – sets polarity of the digital input for move step 12, P1340 [Step 12 Type].
Bit 21 “Step 13” – sets polarity of the digital input for move step 13, P1350 [Step 13 Type].
Bit 22 “Step 14” – sets polarity of the digital input for move step 14, P1360 [Step 14 Type].
Bit 23 “Step 15” – sets polarity of the digital input for move step 15, P1370 [Step 15 Type].
Bit 24 “Step 16” – sets polarity of the digital input for move step 16, P1380 [Step 16 Type].
1218 755 DI Hold Step Default: 0.00 RW 32-bit
Digital Input Hold Step Min/Max: 0.00 / 159999.15 Integer
Sets a digital input port for the hold step in profile/indexer control logic. The digital
input assigned by this parameter is equivalent to P1213 [Profile Command] Bit 8 “Hold
Step.” Polarity of active state is defined by P1217 [Prof DI Invert] Bit 0 “Hold Step.”
1219 755 DI Abort Step Default: 0.00 RW 32-bit
Digital Input Abort Step Min/Max: 0.00 / 159999.15 Integer
Sets a digital input port for the abort step in profile/indexer control logic. Polarity of
active state is defined by P1217 [Prof DI Invert] Bit 1 “Abort Step.”
Read-Write
No. Display Name Values
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
Step n Type
Set type of move for a particular step. The possible step types are:
“Speed” (0) = Speed Profile moves in speed mode.
“Position Abs” (1) = Position Absolute moves in absolute position mode.
“PositionIncr” (2) = Position Incremental moves in position increment mode.
The drive must have the direction mode set to the bipolar for the position regulator to
function properly. The current, torque, and regen power limits must be set so as not to
limit the programmed deceleration time. If the limits occur, the position regulator may
overshoot the position set point.
Read-Write
No. Display Name Values
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
Step n Velocity
Set speed at which a move will take place. The step velocity applies to all three types of
moves – position absolute, position incremental, and speed profile. The motor may not
achieve the step velocity in all cases. Short distance moves may begin to decelerate
before the step velocity is reached. If the move is sufficiently long, then the motor speed
will be limited to the step velocity. Sign on the step velocity is used to determine
APPLICATIONS
Cannot be used with most blended moves in Position Absolute type and Position
Incremental type.
1232 755 Step 1 Accel Units: Secs RW Real
1242 755 Step 2 Accel Default: 10.00
1252 755 Step 3 Accel Min/Max: 0.00 / 3600.00
1262 755 Step 4 Accel
1272 755 Step 5 Accel
1282 755 Step 6 Accel
1292 755 Step 7 Accel
1302 755 Step 8 Accel
1312 755 Step 9 Accel
1322 755 Step 10 Accel
1332 755 Step 11 Accel
1342 755 Step 12 Accel
1352 755 Step 13 Accel
1362 755 Step 14 Accel
1372 755 Step 15 Accel
1382 755 Step 16 Accel
Step n Acceleration
Set acceleration time between zero and rated motor speed in seconds. The motor will
accelerate towards the step speed using the step velocity parameter. The minimum
acceleration rate is determined by the system inertia.
Cannot be used with most blended moves in Position Absolute type and Position
Incremental type.
Read-Write
No. Display Name Values
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
755
Profiling
Step n Deceleration
Set deceleration time between rated motor speed and zero in seconds. The motor will
decelerate towards zero speed. The minimum deceleration rate is determined by the
system inertia.
Cannot be used with most blended moves in Position Absolute type and Position
Incremental type.
Read-Write
No. Display Name Values
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
Step n Value
These parameters can take on any one of several meanings depending on the move type
and action. The possible meanings for these parameters are given below. All other type/
APPLICATIONS
Read-Write
No. Display Name Values
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
Step n Dwell
Set time delay between moves. P1210 [Profile Status] Bit 11 “Dwell” will be set to
indicate that the step dwell period is active and timing. Zero value will disable dwell,
negative value will wait forever. Not all steps can use dwell (example, most blended
moves cannot use dwell). When the speed type with the parameter blend action move is
used, the step dwell parameter will contain the parameter number of the set-point
APPLICATIONS
Step n Batch
Set number of times to repeat a step. For example, a batch count of two will cause that
step to repeat two times before starting the next step. These parameters cannot be used
with position absolute moves, since this would imply moving to the same position
repeatedly. These parameters cannot be used with most blended moves (exception dig-
in blend), because most blended moves need to transition to the next step, instead of
repeating. The dig-in blend moves use this parameter to specify the number of digital
input transitions required. A zero step batch setting will cause that step to repeat
forever.
Read-Write
No. Display Name Values
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
Step n Next
Set step number that will be executed after the current step is complete. The current
step will be complete after any batch repeat cycles have finished. Typically, steps are
executed in ascending order, although this is not a requirement. These parameters do
not apply to a step having an End action, since this step is normally used to terminate a
sequence of step moves.
1238 755 Step 1 Action Default: 1 = “Step to Next” RW 32-bit
1248 755 Step 2 Action Options: 0 = “End” Integer
1258 755 Step 3 Action 1 = “Step to Next”
APPLICATIONS
Step n Action
Set what is to be done at the end of a step after the move is complete.
End (0) = End stops the move sequence.
Step to Next (1) = Step to Next moves to the next step after the speed ramp up/down is
completed in the specific total time. The dwell time and the batch can be applied.
Psn Blend (2) = Posit Blend moves to the next step after the actual position becomes
greater than the position specified in the value parameter.
Time Blend (3) = Time Blend moves to the next step after the total running time
becomes greater than the time specified in the value parameter.
Param Blend (4) = Param Blend moves to the next step after comparison of two
parameters is satisfied. The parameters for comparison are specified in the value and
dwell parameter.
DigIn Blend (5) = DigIn Blend moves to the next step after the specified number of
digital input rising (or falling) edges are applied. The batch parameter specifies the
number of digital input edges.
Wait DigIn (6) = Wait DigIn moves to the next step after the digital input rising (or
falling) edges are applied.
Read-Write
No. Display Name Values
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
Read-Write
No. Display Name Values
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
ReverseY Out
Options
Unidirection
Cndtnl Hold
Reref Psn In
Aux Cam En
ReverseX In
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Offset En
Alt Slope
Start
0 = Disabled
Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
1 = Enabled
Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Read-Write
No. Display Name Values
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
Read-Write
No. Display Name Values
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
CubicCurve15
CubicCurve14
CubicCurve13
CubicCurve12
CubicCurve11
CubicCurve10
Options
CubicCurve9
CubicCurve8
CubicCurve7
CubicCurve6
CubicCurve5
CubicCurve4
CubicCurve3
CubicCurve2
CubicCurve1
CubicCurve0
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
1407 755 PCAM Main Pt X 0 Default: 0.00 RW Real
1409 755 PCAM Main Pt X 1 Min/Max: –/+220000000.00
1411 755 PCAM Main Pt X 2
1413 755 PCAM Main Pt X 3
1415 755 PCAM Main Pt X 4
1417 755 PCAM Main Pt X 5
1419 755 PCAM Main Pt X 6
1421 755 PCAM Main Pt X 7
1423 755 PCAM Main Pt X 8
1425 755 PCAM Main Pt X 9
1427 755 PCAM Main PtX 10
APPLICATIONS
755
1431 755 PCAM Main PtX 12
1433 755 PCAM Main PtX 13
1435 755 PCAM Main PtX 14
1437 755 PCAM Main PtX 15
Read-Write
No. Display Name Values
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
CubicCurve15
CubicCurve14
CubicCurve13
CubicCurve12
CubicCurve11
CubicCurve10
Options
CubicCurve9
CubicCurve8
CubicCurve7
CubicCurve6
CubicCurve5
CubicCurve4
CubicCurve3
CubicCurve2
CubicCurve1
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
1441 755 PCAM Aux Pt X 1 Default: 0.00 RW Real
1443 755 PCAM Aux Pt X 2 Min/Max: –/+220000000.00
1445 755 PCAM Aux Pt X 3
1447 755 PCAM Aux Pt X 4
1449 755 PCAM Aux Pt X 5
1451 755 PCAM Aux Pt X 6
1453 755 PCAM Aux Pt X 7
1455 755 PCAM Aux Pt X 8
APPLICATIONS
Read-Write
No. Display Name Values
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
Contins Mode
ReverseY Out
Options
Persist Mode
Single Mode
Unidirection
Cndtnl Hold
Reref Psn In
Aux Cam En
ReverseX In
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Alt Slope
Offset En
In Cam
Start
Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
Bit 0 “Single Mode” – Position CAM is in single step mode.
Bit 1 “Contins Mode” – Position CAM is in continuous mode.
Bit 2 “Persist Mode” – Position CAM is in persistent mode.
Bit 3 “In Cam” – X-axis is in range of defined profile.
Bit 4 “Start” – Position CAM has started.
APPLICATIONS
Camming
Read-Write
No. Display Name Values
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
Rereference
Options
EGR Select
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Enable
Preset
Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Options
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Enable
APPLICATIONS
Roll Position
Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Read-Write
No. Display Name Values
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
Read-Write
No. Display Name Values
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
Boost Enable
Options
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
0 = Disabled
Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
1 = Enabled
Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Bit 0 “Boost Enable” – Enables the Position Oriented Torque Boost function.
Read-Write
No. Display Name Values
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
In Position
Options
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Enabled
Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Read-Write
No. Display Name Values
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
Minimum Freq
Options
Current Rate
Rising Edge
VB Enable
Flux Level
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
0 = Disabled
Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
1 = Enabled
Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Options
VB Enabled
Max Boost
Hold Freq
Triggered
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
VB Timer
Read-Write
No. Display Name Values
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
Sets the rate of deceleration of P1537 [VB Voltage] for the variable boost voltage Min/Max: 0.01 / 537.67
function following a trigger event.
1543 VB Frequency Units: Hz RW Real
Variable Boost Frequency Default: 0.8
Sets the initial frequency reference for the variable boost voltage function. Min/Max: 0.0 / 110.0
1544 VB Min Freq Units: Hz RW Real
Variable Boost Minimum Frequency Default: 0.5
Sets the frequency reference trigger level for the variable boost voltage function. Min/Max: 0.0 / 110.0
P1536 [VB Status] Bit 5 “Freq Trigger” is set to 1 when P1 [Output Frequency] falls below
[VB Min Freq].
To enable this threshold and trigger event: Set P1535 [VB Config] Bit 0 “VB Enable” to 1
and Bit 4 “Minimum Freq” to 1.
1545 VB Flux Thresh Units: Amps RW Real
Variable Boost Flux Threshold Default: P21 [Rated Amps] x 0.5
Sets the flux current trigger level for the variable boost voltage function. Min/Max: 0.0 / P21 [Rated Amps]
P1536 [VB Status] Bit 4 “Flux Trigger” is set to 1 when P1547 [VB Filt Flux Cur] exceeds
[VB Flux Thresh].
To enable this threshold and trigger event: Set P1535 [VB Config] Bit 0 “VB Enable” to 1
and Bit 3 “Flux Level” to 1.
1546 VB Flux Lag Freq Units: R/S RW Real
Variable Boost Flux Lag Frequency Default: 0.60
Sets the lag (cutoff) frequency of the P6 [Flux Cur Fdbk] low pass filter. Min/Max: 0.01 / 100.00
The output of this filter is displayed in P1547 [VB Filt Flux Cur].
1547 VB Filt Flux Cur Units: Amps RO Real
Variable Boost Filter Flux Current Default: 0.0
Filtered version of the P6 [Flux Cur Fdbk]. Min/Max: 0.0 / P21 [Rated Amps] x 2
P1546 [VB Flux Lag Freq] sets the cutoff frequency of the low pass filter.
Read-Write
No. Display Name Values
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
Sets the P1548 [VB Current Rate] trigger level for the variable boost voltage function.
The trigger is not active until P1538 [VB Time] time has expired following a drive start.
P1535 [VB Config] Bit 2 “Rising Edge” = 0:
The value of [VB Current Rate] must first pass through [VB Cur Thresh] + P1549 [VB
Current Hyst] then [VB Cur Thresh] in order to cause a boost voltage trigger event.
P1535 [VB Config] Bit 2 “Rising Edge” = 1:
The value of P1548 [VB Current Rate] must first pass through [VB Cur Thresh] - P1549
[VB Current Hyst] then [VB Cur Thresh] in order to cause a boost voltage trigger event.
1551 VB Rate Lag Freq Units: R/S RW Real
Variable Boost Rate Lag Frequency Default: 2.60
Sets the lag (cutoff) frequency of the current magnitude low pass filter. Min/Max: 0.01 / 100.00
The output of this filter is displayed in P1548 [VB Current Rate].
Read-Write
No. Display Name Values
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
Important: After the Spindle Orient group is set up for an application, any subsequent
changes to parameter settings will require a drive reset for the changes to take affect.
1580 755 SO Config RW 16-bit
Spindle Orientation Configuration Integer
Configures the options for the Spindle Orientation function.
Function requires P35 [Motor Ctrl Mode] is set to option 3 “Induction FV,” 6 “PM FV,” or 10 “IPM FV.” P125 [Pri Vel Fdbk Sel] and P135 [Psn Fdbk Sel] must also be set
up accordingly.
Spindle Orient
Recap Hm Psn
APPLICATIONS
Options
ShortestPath
Home DI Inv
Scale Invert
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Home DI
Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Bit 0 “Home DI” – Selects the type of Homing signal (Marker Pulse vs. Digital Input Switch). 1 = Home signal. 0 = Z Channel.
Bit 1 “Home DI Inv” – Rising/Falling Edge of Homing Input.
Bit 2 “Recap Hm Psnv” – Re-capture Home Position. Allows the drive to find Home after a power or drive reset. Typically set to 1 “Enabled.”
Bit 3 “ShortestPath” – Allow direction reversal to obtain shortest distance traveled.
Bit 4 “Scale Invert” – Inverts the calculation for the user-defined units value. This improves resolution as the value of P1587 [SO Cnts per Rvls] increases.
Read-Write
No. Display Name Values
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
At SO Speed
Options
Orient Cplt
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Mode
Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Indicates the edges per revolution of the encoder. For example a 1024 quad encoder
equals 4096 (4 x 1024).
1585 755 SO Rvls Input Default: 1.00 RW Real
Spindle Orientation Revolutions Input Min/Max: –/+1000000.00
Sets the revolutions of the input gear relative to the output gear (14:1).
1586 755 SO Rvls Output Default: 1.00 RW Real
Spindle Orientation Revolutions Output Min/Max: 1.00 / 2000000.00
Sets the revolutions of the output gear relative to the input gear (14:1).
1587 755 SO Cnts per Rvls Default: 4096 RW 32-bit
Spindle Orientation Counts Per Revolution Min/Max: 1024 / 536870912 Integer
Sets the counts per revolution of the output gear.
Typically P1584 [SO EPR Input] x Gear Ratio.
1588 755 SO Unit Scale Default: 1.00000 RW Real
Spindle Orientation Unit Scale Min/Max: –/+220000000.00000
Scales P1589 [SO Position Out] to user-defined units.
Typically set to Desired Units/P1587 [SO Cnts per Rvls].
1589 755 SO Position Out Default: 0 RO 32-bit
Spindle Orientation Position Output Min/Max: 0 / 4294967295 Integer
Displays the present position of the output gear in encoder counts.
1590 755 SO Unit Out Default: 0.00 RO Real
Spindle Orientation Unit Output Min/Max: –/+220000000.00
Displays the present position of the output gear in user-scaled units.
1591 755 SO Accel Time Units: Secs RW Real
Spindle Orientation Acceleration Time Default: 10.00
Sets the acceleration rate used during positioning. Min/Max: 0.00 / 3600.00
Read-Write
No. Display Name Values
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
Read-Write
No. Display Name Values
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
Read-Write
No. Display Name Values
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
Read-Write
No. Display Name Values
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
Read-Write
No. Display Name Values
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
This chapter lists and describes the PowerFlex 750-Series Port 10 and 11 drive
parameters. The parameters can be programmed (viewed/edited) using a Human
Interface Module (HIM). Refer to Enhanced PowerFlex 7-Class Human
Interface Module (HIM) User Manual, publication 20HIM-UM001, for
information on using the HIM to view and edit parameters. As an alternative,
programming can also be performed using DriveTools™ software and a personal
computer.
Topic Page
Inverter (Port 10) Common Parameters 212
Inverter n (Port 10) Parameters 214
Converter (Port 11) Common Parameters 217
Converter n (Port 11) Parameters 220
Precharge (Port 11) Common Parameters 223
Precharge n (Port 11) Parameters 225
Inverter (Port 10) Common Inverter Common parameters apply only to PowerFlex 755 Frame 8 and larger
drives.
Parameters
Read-Write
No. Display Name Values
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
Read-Write
No. Display Name Values
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
Options
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Status
Options
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Read-Write
No. Display Name Values
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
Inverter 2
Inverter 1
Options
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 = No Alarm
1 = Alarm
Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Read-Write
No. Display Name Values
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
INVERTER COMMON File
Ground current of AC output to a motor. This value is calculated based on the total Min/Max: 0.0 / 5000.0
output currents (U, V, and W phases of the drive). When the three phases are balanced,
the ground current is ideally close to zero.
Read-Write
No. Display Name Values
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
INVERTER COMMON File
Full Name
Group
Description
File
Testpoint Selection 1, 2
Testpoints
Selects a source for [Testpoint Val n]. Used by the factory, typically for diagnostic
purposes.
31 755 (8+) Testpoint Val 1 Default: 0.000000 RO Real
33 755 (8+) Testpoint Val 2 Min/Max: –/+220000000.000000
Testpoint Value 1, 2
Displays data selected by [Testpoint Sel n].
Inverter n (Port 10) Inverter n parameters apply only to PowerFlex 755 Frame 8 and larger drives.
Parameters
Read-Write
No. Display Name Values
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
PSBrdOvrTemp
Options
Overcur WNeg
IGBT OvrTemp
ThermalConst
Overcur WPos
Overcur UNeg
Incomp WBrd
IPwrIF PSLow
SysPSOverCur
Overcur VNeg
DC Bus Imbal
Overcur UPos
Incomp UBrd
Overcur VPos
Ground Fault
Incomp VBrd
Incomp Brdn
Main PS Low
Bus Overvolt
Incompat PS
PLI OvrTemp
HS OvrTemp
Comm Loss
Fault Q Full
WBrd Fault
Sys PS Low
CT Harness
UBrd Fault
VBrd Fault
NTC Open
Reserved
Reserved
Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 = No Fault
INVERTER N
1 = Fault
Status
IGBT OvrTemp
HSFan PS Low
Options
DC Bus Imbal
Cur Offset W
InFan2 Slow
InFan1 Slow
HS OvrTemp
Cur Offset U
HSFan Slow
Cur Offset V
Sys PS Low
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 = No Alarm
1 = Alarm
Read-Write
No. Display Name Values
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
Read-Write
No. Display Name Values
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
Read-Write
No. Display Name Values
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
Selects a source for [In Testpt Val n]. Used by the factory, typically for diagnostic
purposes.
141 755 (8+) I1 Testpt Val 1 Default: 0.000000 RO Real
143 755 (8+) I1 Testpt Val 2 Min/Max: –/+220000000.000000
241 755 (8+) I2 Testpt Val 1
243 755 (8+) I2 Testpt Val 2
341 755 (8+) I3 Testpt Val 1
343 755 (8+) I3 Testpt Val 2
Inverter n Testpoint Value 1, 2
Displays the data selected by [In Testpt Sel n].
Converter (Port 11) Common Converter Common parameters apply only to PowerFlex 755 AC Input Frame 8
and larger drives.
Parameters
Read-Write
No. Display Name Values
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
Read-Write
No. Display Name Values
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
Options
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
0 = Not Active
Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
1 = Active
Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Indicates whether the converter has a fault condition. See [Cn Fault Statusn] to view which fault conditions currently exist for converter n.
Converter 2
Converter 1
Options
Status
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
0 = No Fault
Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
1 = Fault
Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Options
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
0 = No Alarm
Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
1 = Alarm
Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Read-Write
No. Display Name Values
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
peak input ground current exceeds this threshold for five line cycles on any converter.
Configuration
Read-Write
No. Display Name Values
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
Read-Write
No. Display Name Values
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
Testpoint Selection 1, 2
Testpoints
Selects a source for [Testpoint Val n]. Used by the factory, typically for diagnostic
purposes.
31 755 (8+) Testpoint Val 1 Default: 0.000000 RO Real
33 755 (8+) Testpoint Val 2 Min/Max: –/+220000000.000000
Testpoint Value 1, 2
Displays data selected by [Testpoint Sel n].
Converter n (Port 11) Converter n parameters apply only to PowerFlex 755 AC Input Frame 8 and
larger drives.
Parameters
Read-Write
No. Display Name Values
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
Power Supply
LFuseHarness
Brd NTCShort
SCR OvrTemp
HS NTC Short
Ground Fault
HS NTC Open
DC Bus Short
Brd OvrTemp
Single Phase
DC Bus Open
Firmware Flt
Line Fuse L3
Line Fuse L2
Line Fuse L1
HS OvrTemp
Overcurrent
Comm Loss
Fault Q Full
CT Harness
Precharge
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Line Freq
Line Dip
Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 = False
1 = True
106 755 (8+) C1 Fault Status2 RO 32-bit
206 755 (8+) C2 Fault Status2 Integer
306 755 (8+) C3 Fault Status2
Converter n Fault Status 2
Indicates which fault conditions currently exist for converter n. Refer to Chapter 6 - Converter (Port 11) Faults and Alarms (Frame 8 and Larger) for information on
these fault codes.
CONVERTER N
Status
Command Stop
Options
AC Line High
BFuse Neg
BFuse Pos
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Line Loss
Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 = False
1 = True
107 755 (8+) C1 Alarm Status1 RO 32-bit
207 755 (8+) C2 Alarm Status1 Integer
307 755 (8+) C3 Alarm Status1
Converter n Alarm Status 1
Indicates which alarm conditions currently exist for converter n. Refer to Chapter 6 - Converter (Port 11) Faults and Alarms (Frame 8 and Larger) for information on
these alarm codes.
Minimum Line
Options
SCR OvrTemp
Phase LossL3
Phase LossL2
Phase LossL1
Single Phase
HS OvrTemp
TVSS Blown
Precharge
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Line Freq
Line Dip
Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 = False
1 = True
Read-Write
No. Display Name Values
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
Read-Write
No. Display Name Values
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
Read-Write
No. Display Name Values
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
Allows a reset of the elapsed run time to zero for the cabinet fan for converter n. After
the time has been reset, the value of this parameter returns to 0 “Ready.”
138 755 (8+) C1 CbFanElpsdLif Units: Hrs RO Real
238 755 (8+) C2 CbFanElpsdLif Default: 0.000
338 755 (8+) C3 CbFanElpsdLif Min/Max: 0.000 / 2200000.000
Converter n Cabinet Fan Elapsed Life
The amount of time the cabinet fan for converter n has been running. This value can be
reset using [Cn PredMainReset].
Read-Write
No. Display Name Values
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
Selects a source for [Cn Testpt Val n]. Used by the factory, typically for diagnostic
purposes.
141 755 (8+) C1 Testpt Val 1 Default: 0.000000 RO Real
143 755 (8+) C1 Testpt Val 2 Min/Max: –/+220.000000
241 755 (8+) C2 Testpt Val 1
243 755 (8+) C2 Testpt Val 2
341 755 (8+) C3 Testpt Val 1
343 755 (8+) C3 Testpt Val 2
Converter n Testpoint Value 1, 2
Displays the data selected by [Cn Testpt Sel n].
Precharge (Port 11) Common Precharge Common parameters apply only to PowerFlex 755 Common DC
Input Frame 8 and larger drives.
Parameters
Read-Write
No. Display Name Values
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
Read-Write
No. Display Name Values
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
Options
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
0 = Not Active
Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
1 = Active
Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Indicates whether the precharge unit has a fault condition. See [Pn Fault Statusn] and to view which fault conditions currently exist for precharge n.
Precharge 2
Precharge 1
Options
Status
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
0 = No Fault
Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
1 = Fault
Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Options
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
0 = No Alarm
Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
1 = Alarm
Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Read-Write
No. Display Name Values
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
PRECHARGE COMMON File
Read-Write
No. Display Name Values
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
Testpoint Selection 1, 2
Testpoints
Selects a source for [Testpoint Val n]. Used by the factory, typically for diagnostic
purposes.
31 755 (8+) Testpoint Val 1 Default: 0.000000 RO Real
33 755 (8+) Testpoint Val 2 Min/Max: –/+220000000.000000
Testpoint Value 1, 2
Displays data selected by [Testpoint Sel n].
Precharge n (Port 11) Precharge n parameters apply only to PowerFlex 755 Common DC Input Frame
8 and larger drives.
Parameters
Read-Write
No. Display Name Values
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
MCSSprgChgOt
MCS UVDlyOut
240V ACPresnt
Options
MCSShntRelOt
BusNegFuseIn
MCS AuxInput
ReadyToReset
BusPosFuseIn
DoorLock Out
MCS Opening
Prechrg Done
MCSCIsCilOut
Flash Update
Discnnct Out
MCS Closing
DoorLock In
Ext FaultRst
Flash Failed
Ext Opn/Cls
Discnnct In
Ext Inhibit
DC Bus OK
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Fan Out
Faulted
Ready
Alarm
Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 = False
1 = True
Bit 0 “Ready” – CB controller is ready to begin the precharge sequence. Stop input is not active, 240V AC is present, molded case switch (MCS) auxiliary contact is
open, disconnect is closed and there are no faults.
Bit 1 “MCS Closing” – The precharge sequence is in progress but is not complete.
Bit 2 “Prechrg Done” – Precharge has been completed and the MCS is closed.
Bit 3 “MCS Opening” – The MCS is in the process of opening.
PRECHARGE N
Bit 4 “Faulted” – A fault has occurred and is enumerated in the fault word.
Status
Bit 5 “Alarm” – An alarm has occurred and is enumerated in the alarm word.
Bit 7 “240V ACPresnt” – 240V AC supply is present. Threshold is 85% or 204V AC.
Bit 8 “DC Bus OK” – 0 = DC bus voltage out of tolerance. 1 = DC bus voltage is within tolerance.
Bit 9 “Discnnct In” – 0 = Auxiliary switch is off. 1 = Auxiliary switch is on.
Bit 10 “Discnnct Out” – 0 = Relay is off. 1 = Relay is on.
Bit 11 “BusPosFuseIn” – 0 = Fuse is blown. 1 = Fuse is intact.
Bit 12 “BusNegFuseIn” – 0 = Fuse is blown. 1 = Fuse is intact.
Bit 13 “DoorLock In” – 0 = Door is open. 1 = Door is closed.
Bit 14 “DoorLock Out” – 0 = Door solenoid relay is off. 1 = Door solenoid relay is on.
Bit 15 “Fan Out” – 0 = Fan is on. 1 = Fan is off.
Bit 16 “Ext Opn/Cls” – 0 = Inactive (tied to common or open). 1 = Active (24V DC applied).
Bit 17 “Ext Inhibit” – 0 = Stopped (tied to common or open). 1 = Not Stopped (24V DC applied). Level sensitive. Ignored when fiber-optic communications is
online.
Bit 18 “Ext FaultRst” – 0 = Inactive (tied to common or open). 1 = Active (24V DC applied).
Bit 19 “MCSCIsCilOut” – 0 = Relay is off. 1 = Relay is on.
Bit 20 “MCSShntRelOt” – 0 = Relay is off. 1 = Relay is on.
Bit 21 “MCSSprgChgOt” – 0 = Relay is off. 1 = Relay is on.
Bit 22 “MCS UVDlyOut” – 0 = Relay is off. 1 = Relay is on.
Bit 23 “MCS AuxInput” – 0 = MCS auxiliary contact is open. 1 = MCS auxiliary contact is closed.
Bit 24 “Flash Failed” – An error occurred during the flash update process.
Bit 30 “Flash Update” – The precharge controller is in flash update mode.
Bit 31 “ReadyToReset” – The flash update process has ended and the precharge controller is waiting for a reset command.
Read-Write
No. Display Name Values
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
Options
MCSShuntTrip
BusUnderVolt
MCSCloseFail
240V AC Loss
DiscnnectErr
Precharge
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 = False
1 = True
106 755 (8+) P1 Fault Status2 RO 32-bit
206 755 (8+) P2 Fault Status2 Integer
306 755 (8+) P3 Fault Status2
Precharge n Fault Status 2
Indicates which fault conditions currently exist for precharge n. Refer to Chapter 6 - Converter (Port 11) Faults and Alarms (Frame 8 and Larger) for information on
these fault codes.
PRECHARGE N
Status
BusFuseHrnss
Options
Brd NTCShort
BusPsFuseFlt
Brd OvrTemp
Pwr Supp Flt
Firmware Flt
Bus Shorted
MCS Closed
Comm Loss
Fault Q Full
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 = False
1 = True
107 755 (8+) P1 Alarm Status1 RO 32-bit
207 755 (8+) P2 Alarm Status1 Integer
307 755 (8+) P3 Alarm Status1
Precharge n Alarm Status 1
Indicates which alarm conditions currently exist for precharge n. Refer to Chapter 6 - Converter (Port 11) Faults and Alarms (Frame 8 and Larger) for information on
these alarm codes.
DiscnnctOpen
BusUnderVolt
Options
240V AC Loss
Bus Overvolt
Door Open
Precharge
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Bus Dip
Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 = False
1 = True
Read-Write
No. Display Name Values
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
Indicates the input DC voltage to the drive. This voltage is measured at the input to the
drive before the precharge resistors and contactor.
112 755 (8+) P1 240VSplyVolts Units: V AC RO Real
212 755 (8+) P2 240VSplyVolts Default: 0.0
312 755 (8+) P3 240VSplyVolts Min/Max: 0.0 / 500.0
Precharge n 240 V Supply Voltage
Indicates the RMS output voltage of the 240V AC control transformer.
122 755 (8+) P1 GateBoardTemp Units: DegC RO Real
222 755 (8+) P2 GateBoardTemp Default: 0.0
322 755 (8+) P3 GateBoardTemp Min/Max: –/+200.0
Precharge n Gate Board Temperature
Gate board temperature for precharge n.
Read-Write
No. Display Name Values
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
Allows a reset of the elapsed run time to zero for the cabinet fan for precharge n. After
the time has been reset, the value of this parameter returns to 0 “Ready.”
138 755 (8+) P1 CbFanElpsdLif Units: Hrs RO Real
238 755 (8+) P2 CbFanElpsdLif Default: 0.000
338 755 (8+) P3 CbFanElpsdLif Min/Max: 0.000 / 2200000.000
Precharge n Cabinet Fan Elapsed Life
The amount of time the cabinet fan for precharge n has been running. This value can be
reset using [Pn PredMainReset].
Read-Write
No. Display Name Values
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
Selects a source for [Pn Testpt Val n]. Used by the factory, typically for diagnostic
purposes.
141 755 (8+) P1 Testpt Val 1 Default: 0.000000 RO Real
143 755 (8+) P1 Testpt Val 2 Min/Max: –/+220.000000
241 755 (8+) P2 Testpt Val 1
243 755 (8+) P2 Testpt Val 2
341 755 (8+) P3 Testpt Val 1
343 755 (8+) P3 Testpt Val 2
Precharge n Testpoint Value 1, 2
Displays the data selected by or [Pn Testpt Sel n].
This chapter lists and describes the PowerFlex 750-Series drive embedded feature
and option module parameters. The parameters can be programmed (viewed/
edited) using a Human Interface Module (HIM). Refer to Enhanced PowerFlex
7-Class Human Interface Module (HIM) User Manual, publication 20HIM-
UM001, for information on using the HIM to view and edit parameters. As an
alternative, programming can also be performed using DriveTools™ software and a
personal computer.
Topic Page
Embedded EtherNet/IP (Port 13) Parameters 230
Communication Configurations 236
Embedded DeviceLogix (Port 14) Parameters 239
11-Series I/O Module Parameters 242
22-Series I/O Module Parameters 252
Single Incremental Encoder Module Parameters 263
Dual Incremental Encoder Module Parameters 266
Universal Feedback Module Parameters 271
Safe Speed Monitor Module Parameters 289
Embedded EtherNet/IP (Port For complete information on the Embedded EtherNet/IP feature, refer to the
PowerFlex 755 Drive Embedded EtherNet/IP Adapter user manual, publication
13) Parameters 750COM-UM001.
Read-Write
No. Display Name Values
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
If setting the value manually, the parameter value = (10000 x port number) +
(origination parameter number). For example, to use P17 [DL To Net 01] to read
Parameter 01 of an optional I/O module plugged into drive Port 4. The value for P17 [DL
To Net 01] must be 40001 [(10000 x 4) + 1].
33 755 Port Number Default: 13 RO 32-bit
Port number Value: 13 / 15 Integer
Displays the drive port to which the embedded EtherNet/IP adapter is dedicated. This is
always Port 13.
34 755 DLs From Net Act Default: 0 RO 32-bit
Datalinks From Network Actual Min/Max: 0 / 16 Integer
Displays the number of actual controller-to- drive Datalinks that the drive is using based
on the I/O connection opened by the controller.
35 755 DLs To Net Act Default: 0 RO 32-bit
Datalinks To Network Actual Min/Max: 0 / 16 Integer
Displays the number of actual drive-to- controller Datalinks that the controller is using
based on the I/O connection opened by the controller.
36 755 BOOTP Default: 1 = “Enabled” RW 32-bit
Bootstrap Protocol Options: 0 = “Disabled” Integer
Configures the adapter to use BOOTP so that you can set its IP address, subnet mask, and 1 = “Enabled”
gateway address with a BOOTP server. When this parameter is disabled, you must use
the adapter parameters to set these addressing functions. This parameter is only
functional when the IP address switches are set to 001…254 or 888. Power cycle or
reset is required for change to take affect.
37 755 Net Addr Src Default: 0 = “Switches” RO 32-bit
Network Address Source Options: 0 = “Switches” Integer
Displays the source from which the adapter node address, subnet mask, and gateway 1 = “Parameters”
are taken. This will be switches, Parameters 38…41 [IP Addr Cfg n], or BOOTP. It is 2 = “BOOTP”
determined by the settings of the octet switches on the adapter. See Establishing A
Connection With EtherNet/IP on page 19 for details.
Read-Write
No. Display Name Values
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
[Subnet Cfg 1]
[Subnet Cfg 2]
[Subnet Cfg 3]
[Subnet Cfg 4]
Important: To set the subnet mask using these parameters, P36 [BOOTP] must be set to
“0” (Disabled) and switches set to a value other than 001…254 or 888.
46 755 Gateway Cfg 1 Default: 0 RW 32-bit
47 755 Gateway Cfg 2 Min/Max: 0 / 255 Integer
48 755 Gateway Cfg 3
49 755 Gateway Cfg 4
Gateway Configure 1…4
Sets the bytes of the gateway address.
255 . 255 . 255 . 255
[Gateway Cfg 1]
[Gateway Cfg 2]
[Gateway Cfg 3]
[Gateway Cfg 4]
Important: To set the gateway address using these parameters, P36 [BOOTP] must be
set to “0” (Disabled) and switches set to a value other than 001…254 or 888.
50 755 Net Rate Cfg Default: 0 = “Autodetect” RW 32-bit
Network Rate Configure Options: 0 = “Autodetect” Integer
Sets the network data rate at which the adapter communicates. (Updates P51 [Net Rate 1 = “10Mbps Full”
Act] after a reset.) 2 = “10Mbps Half”
3 = “100Mbps Full”
4 = “100Mbps Half”
Read-Write
No. Display Name Values
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
Email Config
Options
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
0 = Disabled
Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
1 = Enabled
Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Embedded EtherNet/IP
ATTENTION: Risk of injury or equipment damage exists. P54 [Comm Flt Action] lets you determine the action of the
adapter and connected drive if I/O communications are disrupted. By default, this parameter faults the drive. You can set
this parameter so that the drive continues to run. Precautions should be taken to ensure that the setting of this parameter
does not create a risk of injury or equipment damage. When commissioning the drive, verify that your system responds
correctly to various situations (for example, a disconnected cable).
ATTENTION: Risk of injury or equipment damage exists. P55 [Idle Flt Action] lets you determine the action of the adapter
and connected drive when the controller is idle. By default, this parameter faults the drive. You can set this parameter so
that the drive continues to run. Precautions should be taken to ensure that the setting of this parameter does not create a
risk of injury or equipment damage. When commissioning the drive, verify that your system responds correctly to various
situations (for example, a controller in idle state).
Read-Write
No. Display Name Values
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
ATTENTION: Risk of injury or equipment damage exists. P56 [Peer Flt Action] lets you determine the action of the adapter
and connected drive if the adapter is unable to communicate with the designated peer. By default, this parameter faults
the drive. You can set this parameter so that the drive continues to run. Precautions should be taken to ensure that the
setting of this parameter does not create a risk of injury or equipment damage. When commissioning the drive, verify that
your system responds correctly to various situations (for example, a disconnected cable).
ATTENTION: Risk of injury or equipment damage exists. P57 [Msg Flt Action] lets you determine the action of the adapter
and connected drive if explicit messaging for drive control is disrupted. By default, this parameter faults the drive. You can
set this parameter so that the drive continues to run. Precautions should be taken to ensure that the setting of this
parameter does not create a risk of injury or equipment damage. When commissioning the drive, verify that your system
responds correctly to various situations (for example, a disconnected cable).
58 755 Flt Cfg Logic Default: 0000 0000 0000 0000 RW 32-bit
Fault Configure Logic 0000 0000 0000 0000 Integer
Sets the Logic Command data that is sent to the drive if any of the following is true: Min/Max: 0000 0000 0000 0000
• P54 [Comm Flt Action] is set to 4 “Send Flt Cfg” and I/O communications are 0000 0000 0000 0000
disrupted. 1111 1111 1111 1111
• P55 [Idle Flt Action] is set to 4 “Send Flt Cfg” and the controller is idle. 1111 1111 1111 1111
• P56 [Peer Flt Action] is set to 4 “Send Flt Cfg” and Peer I/O communications are
disrupted.
• P57 [Msg Flt Action] is set to 4 “Send Flt Cfg” and explicit messaging for drive control
is disrupted.
The bit definitions in the Logic Command word for PowerFlex 750-Series drives are
shown on page 237.
59 755 Flt Cfg Ref Default: 0 RW Real
Fault Configure Reference Min/Max: –/+-220000000
Sets the Reference data that is sent to the drive if any of the following is true:
• P54 [Comm Flt Action] is set to 4 “Send Flt Cfg” and I/O communications are
disrupted.
• P55 [Idle Flt Action] is set to 4 “Send Flt Cfg” and the controller is idle.
• P56 [Peer Flt Action] is set to 4 “Send Flt Cfg” and Peer I/O communications are
disrupted.
• P57 [Msg Flt Action] is set to 4 “Send Flt Cfg” and explicit messaging for drive control
is disrupted.
Read-Write
No. Display Name Values
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
Read-Write
No. Display Name Values
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
Important: The Peer Inp Addr must be on the same subnet as the embedded EtherNet/
IP adapter.
Changes to these parameters are ignored when P85 [Fr Peer Enable] is “1” (On).
For detailed information on peer communications, refer to the PowerFlex 755 Drive
Embedded EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual, publication 750COM-UM001.
85 755 Fr Peer Enable Default: 0 = “Off” RW 32-bit
Embedded EtherNet/IP
Read-Write
No. Display Name Values
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
(1) A Not Stop condition (logic bit 0 = 0) must first be present before a 1 = Start condition will start the drive.
(2) A Not Stop condition (logic bit 0 = 0) must first be present before a 1 = Jog 1/Jog 2 condition will jog the drive. A transition to a “0” will stop the drive.
(3) To perform this command, the value must switch from “0” to “1.”
(4) A Not Stop condition (logic bit 0 = 0) must first be present before a 1 = Run condition will run the drive. A transition to a “0” will stop the drive.
Logic Bits
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Command Description
x Run Ready 0 = Not Ready to Run
1 = Ready to Run
x Active 0 = Not Active
1 = Active
x Command Direction 0 = Reverse
1 = Forward
x Actual Direction 0 = Reverse
1 = Forward
x Accelerating 0 = Not Accelerating
1 = Accelerating
x Decelerating 0 = Not Decelerating
1 = Decelerating
x Alarm 0 = No Alarm (Par. 959 & 960)
1 = Alarm
x Fault 0 = No Fault (Par. 952 & 953)
1 = Fault
x At Setpt Spd 0 = Not at Setpoint Speed
1 = At Setpoint Speed
x Manual 0 = Manual Mode Not Active
1 = Manual Mode Active
x Spd Ref ID 0 00000 = Reserved
x Spd Ref ID 1 00001 = Auto Ref A (par. 545)
x Spd Ref ID 2 00010 = Auto Ref B (Par. 550)
00011 = Auto Preset Speed 3 (Par. 573)
x Spd Ref ID 3 00100 = Auto Preset Speed 4 (Par. 574)
x Spd Ref ID 4 00101 = Auto Preset Speed 5 (Par. 575)
00110 = Auto Preset Speed 6 (Par. 576)
00111 = Auto Preset Speed 7 (Par. 577)
01000 = Reserved
01001 = Reserved
01010 = Reserved
01011 = Reserved
01100 = Reserved
01101 = Reserved
01110 = Reserved
01111 = Reserved
10000 = Man Port 0
10001 = Man Port 1
10010 = Man Port 2
10011 = Man Port 3
10100 = Man Port 4
10101 = Man Port 5
10110 = Man Port 6
10111 = Reserved
11000 = Reserved
11001 = Reserved
11010 = Reserved
11011 = Reserved
11100 = Reserved
11101 = Man Port 13 (Emb. ENET)
11110 = Man Port 14 (Drive Logix)
11111 = Alternate Man Ref Sel
x Reserved
x Running 0 = Not Running
1 = Running
x Jogging 0 = Not Jogging (Par. 556 & 557)
1 = Jogging
x Stopping 0 = Not Stopping
1 = Stopping
x DC Brake 0 = Not DC Brake
1 = DC Brake
x DB Active 0 = Not Dynamic Brake Active
1 = Dynamic Brake Active
x Speed Mode 0 = Not Speed Mode (Par. 309)
1 = Speed Mode
x Position Mode 0 = Not Position Mode (Par. 309)
1 = Position Mode
x Torque Mode 0 = Not Torque Mode (Par. 309)
1 = Torque Mode
x At Zero Speed 0 = Not at Zero Speed
1 =At Zero Speed
x At Home 0 = Not at Home
1 = At Home
x At Limit 0 = Not at Limit
1 = At Limit
x Current Limit 0 = Not at Current Limit
1 = At Current Limit
x Bus Freq Reg 0 = Not Bus Freq Reg
1 = Bus Freq Reg
x Enable On 0 = Not Enable On
1 = Enable On
x Motor Overload 0 = Not Motor Overload
1 = Motor Overload
x Regen 0 = Not Regen
1= Regen
Read-Write
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
Fourteen floating point outputs that can be controlled by the DeviceLogix program.
These are typically mapped to a parameter to write its value. It can also be mapped to
the Reference Command.
15 DLX Out 15 Default: 0 RW 32-bit
16 DLX Out 16 Min/Max: 0 / 159999 Integer
Two unsigned 32-bit integer outputs that can be controlled by the DeviceLogix program.
These are typically mapped to a parameter to write its value.
17 DLX In 01 Default: 0 RW 32-bit
Thru Min/Max: 0 / 159999 Real
30 DLX In 14
Fourteen floating point inputs that can be read by the DeviceLogix program. These are
Analog Inputs
typically mapped to a parameter to read its value. It can also be mapped to Common
Feedback.
31 DLX In 15 Default: 0 RW 32-bit
32 DLX In 16 Min/Max: 0 / 159999.15 Integer
Two unsigned 32-bit integer inputs that can be read by the DeviceLogix program. These
are typically mapped to a parameter to read its value. It can also be mapped to Real
Time Clock values.
Embedded DeviceLogix
Options
DLX DIPVal9
DLX DIPVal8
DLX DIPVal7
DLX DIPVal6
DLX DIPVal5
DLX DIPVal4
DLX DIPVal3
DLX DIPVal2
DLX DIPVal1
Options
DLX CmdSts9
DLX CmdSts8
DLX CmdSts7
DLX CmdSts6
DLX CmdSts5
DLX CmdSts4
DLX CmdSts3
DLX CmdSts2
DLX CmdSts1
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 = Condition Off
1 = Condition On
Read-Write
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
DLX DOPSts16
DLX DOPSts15
DLX DOPSts14
DLX DOPSts13
DLX DOPSts12
DLX DOPSts11
DLX DOPSts10
Options
DLX DOPSts9
DLX DOPSts8
DLX DOPSts7
DLX DOPSts6
DLX DOPSts5
DLX DOPSts4
DLX DOPSts3
DLX DOPSts2
DLX DOPSts1
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 = Condition Off
Embedded DeviceLogix
1 = Condition On
Status & Cntl
Read-Write
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
Bit 9
Bit 8
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
Embedded DeviceLogix
Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Internal Regs
Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 = Condition Off
1 = Condition On
82 DLX Real In SP1 Default: 0 RW Real
Thru Min/Max: –/+220000000
89 DLX Real In SP8
Eight 32-bit Real scratchpad registers for DLX program input use.
90 DLX Real OutSP1 Default: 0 RW Real
Thru Min/Max: –/+220000000
97 DLX Real OutSP8
Eight 32-bit Real scratchpad registers for DLX program output use.
98 DLX DINT InSP1 Default: 0 RW 32-bit
Thru Min/Max: –2147483648 / 2147483647 Integer
101 DLX DINT InSP4
Four 32-bit Integer scratchpad registers for DLX program input use.
102 DLX DINT OutSP1 Default: 0 RW 32-bit
Thru Min/Max: –2147483648 / 2147483647 Integer
105 DLX DINT OutSP4
Four 32-bit Integer scratchpad registers for DLX program output use.
Read-Write
No. Display Name Values
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
Input 2
Input 1
Input 0
Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 = Input Not Activated
1 = Input Activated
Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Options
Input 2
Input 1
Input 0
Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 = Input Not Filtered
1 = Input Filtered
Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Read-Write
No. Display Name Values
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
Options
Relay Out 0
Digital Outputs
11-Series I/O
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
0 = Output De-energized
Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
1 = Output Energized
Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
(1) Bit 1 = “Trans Out 0” for 11-Series I/O Module model 20-750-1133C-1R2T
= “Relay Out 1” for 11-Series I/O Module models 20-750-1132C-2R and 20-750-1132D-2R
(2) Bit 2 is only used by 11-Series I/O Module 20-750-1133C-1R2T
Read-Write
No. Display Name Values
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
Relay Out 0
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
0 = Output Not Inverted
Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
1 = Output Inverted
Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
(1) Bit 1 = “Trans Out 0” for 11-Series I/O Module model 20-750-1133C-1R2T
= “Relay Out 1” for 11-Series I/O Module models 20-750-1132C-2R and 20-750-1132D-2R
(2) Bit 2 is only used by 11-Series I/O Module 20-750-1133C-1R2T
7 Dig Out Setpoint RW 16-bit
Digital Output Setpoint Integer
Controls Relay or Transistor Outputs when chosen as the source. Can be used to control outputs from a communication device using DataLinks.
Trans Out 1(2)
Options Trans Out 0(1)
Relay Out 0
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
(1) Bit 1 = “Trans Out 0” for 11-Series I/O Module model 20-750-1133C-1R2T
= “Relay Out 1” for 11-Series I/O Module models 20-750-1132C-2R and 20-750-1132D-2R
Digital Outputs
11-Series I/O
Options
Grt Than Equ
Less Than
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Bit 0 “Less Than” – Level source is less than the level value.
Bit 1 “Grt Than Equ” – Level source is greater than or equal to the level value.
Bit 2 “Abs Less Than” – Absolute value of the level source is less than the absolute value of the level value.
Bit 3 “AbsGrtThanEq” – Absolute value of the level source is greater than or equal to the absolute value of the level value.
Read-Write
No. Display Name Values
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
2R is installed.
TO0 Level
Transistor Output 0 Level – 11-Series I/O Module model 20-750-1133C-1R2T is installed.
Sets the level compare value.
23 RO1 Level CmpSts RO 16-bit
Relay Output 1 Level Compare Status – 11-Series I/O Module model 20-750-1132C-2R or 20-750-1132D-2R is installed. Integer
TO0 Level CmpSts
Transistor Output 0 Level Compare Status – 11-Series I/O Module model 20-750-1133C-1R2T is installed.
Status of the level compare, and a possible source for a relay or transistor output. Relay Output n Select or Transistor Output n Select must have this selected to
energize the output. Can be used without a physical output as status information only.
AbsGrtThanEq
Abs Less Than
Options
Grt Than Equ
Less Than
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Bit 0 “Less Than” – Level source is less than the level value.
Bit 1 “Grt Than Equ” – Level source is greater than or equal to the level value.
Bit 2 “Abs Less Than” – Absolute value of the level source is less than the absolute value of the level value.
Bit 3 “AbsGrtThanEq” – Absolute value of the level source is greater than or equal to the absolute value of the level value.
24 RO1 On Time Units: Secs RW Real
Relay Output 1 On Time – 11-Series I/O Module model 20-750-1132C-2R or 20-750- Default: 0.0
1132D-2R is installed. Min/Max: 0.0 / 600.0
TO0 On Time
Transistor Output 0 On Time – 11-Series I/O Module model 20-750-1133C-1R2T is
installed.
Sets the “ON Delay” time for the digital outputs. This is the time between the occurrence
of a condition and activation of the relay or transistor.
Read-Write
No. Display Name Values
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
Options
Grt Than Equ
Less Than
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
0 = Condition False
Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
1 = Condition True
Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Bit 0 “Less Than” – Level source is less than the level value.
Bit 1 “Grt Than Equ” – Level source is greater than or equal to the level value.
Bit 2 “Abs Less Than” – Absolute value of the level source is less than the absolute value of the level value.
Bit 3 “AbsGrtThanEq” – Absolute value of the level source is greater than or equal to the absolute value of the level value.
Important: Only used by 11-Series I/O Module model 20-750-1133C-1R2T.
34 TO1 On Time Units: Secs RW Real
Transistor Output 1 On Time Default: 0.0
Sets the “ON Delay” time for the digital outputs. This is the time between the occurrence Min/Max: 0.0 / 600.0
of a condition and activation of the transistor.
Important: Only used by 11-Series I/O Module model 20-750-1133C-1R2T.
35 TO1 Off Time Units: Secs RW Real
Transistor Output 1 Off Time Default: 0.0
Sets the “OFF Delay” time for the digital outputs. This is the time between the Min/Max: 0.0 / 600.0
disappearance of a condition and de-activation of the transistor.
Important: Only used by 11-Series I/O Module model 20-750-1133C-1R2T.
Read-Write
No. Display Name Values
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
Thrmlsnsor OK
Options
PTC Selected
Voltage Loss
Thermostat
Short Cirkt
Over Temp
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
11-Series I/O
Motor PTC
0 = Condition False
Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
1 = Condition True
Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Read-Write
No. Display Name Values
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
0 = Voltage Mode
Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
1 = Current Mode
Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Analog 0
Options
Options
Loss0
Loss
Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 = No Loss
1 = Loss Detected
Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Read-Write
No. Display Name Values
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
“Flt Minor” (2) – Minor fault indicated. If running, drive continues to run. 6 = “Hold Input”
Enable with P950 [Minor Flt Cfg]. If not enabled, acts like a major fault.
7 = “Set Input Lo”
“FltCoastStop” (3) – Major fault indicated. Coast to Stop.
8 = “Set Input Hi”
“Flt RampStop” (4) – Major fault indicated. Ramp to Stop.
“Flt CL Stop” (5) – Major fault indicated. Current Limit Stop.
“Hold Input” (6) – Holds input at last value.
“Set Input Lo” (7) – Sets input to P52 [Anlg In0 Lo].
“Set Input Hi” (8) – Sets input to P51 [Anlg In0 Hi].
54 Anlg In0 Raw Val Units: Volt RO Real
Analog Input 0 Raw Value mA
Raw Value of the analog input. Default: 0.000 Volts
0.000 mA
Min/Max: –/+10.000 Volts
0.000 / 20.000 mA
55 Anlg In0 Filt Gn Default: 1.00 RW Real
Analog Input 0 Filter Gain Min/Max: –/+5.00
Sets the analog input filter gain.
Recommended settings:
Low Gain High Gain
0.70 0.50
Read-Write
No. Display Name Values
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
0 = Condition False
Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1
1 = Condition True
Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Read-Write
No. Display Name Values
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
mA
11-Series I/O
Read-Write
No. Display Name Values
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
Relay Out 0
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Master
0 = Condition False
Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
1 = Condition True
Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
(1) Bit 1= “Relay Out 0” for 11-Series I/O Module models 20-750-1132C-2R and 20-750-1132D-2R
100 RO0 Load Type Default: 1 = “DC Inductive” RW 32-bit
Relay Output 0 Load Type Options: 0 = “DC Resistive” Integer
Sets the type of load that will be applied to the relay. Must be properly set for the 1 = “DC Inductive”
Predictive Main
3 = “AC Inductive”
101 RO0 Load Amps Units: Amps RW Real
Relay Output 0 Load Amps Default: 2.000
Load current that will be applied to the relay contacts. Must be properly set for the Min/Max: 0.000 / 2.000
Predictive Maintenance function to approximate the relay life.
102 RO0 TotalLife Units: Cycl RO 32-bit
Relay Output 0 Total Life Default: 0 Integer
Total life cycles of the relay based on programmed load type and amps. Min/Max: 0 / 2147483647
103 RO0 ElapsedLife Units: Cycl RO 32-bit
Relay Output 0 Elapsed Life Default: 0 Integer
Non-resettable, total accumulated cycles of the relay. Min/Max: 0 / 2147483647
104 RO0 RemainLife Units: Cycl RO 32-bit
Relay Output 0 Remaining Life Default: 0 Integer
The difference between the Total Life and the Elapsed Life. Min/Max: 0 / 2147483647
105 RO0 LifeEvntLvl Units: % RW Real
Relay Output 0 Life Event Level Default: 80.000
Sets the percentage of relay life cycles before action is taken. Min/Max: 0.000 / 100.000
Read-Write
No. Display Name Values
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
Important: Only used by 11-Series I/O Module models 20-750-1132C-2R and 20-750-
11-Series I/O
1132D-2R.
113 RO1 ElapsedLife Units: Cycl RO 32-bit
Relay Output 1 Elapsed Life Default: 0 Integer
Non-resettable, total accumulated cycles of the relay. Min/Max: 0 / 2147483647
Important: Only used by 11-Series I/O Module models 20-750-1132C-2R and 20-750-
1132D-2R.
114 RO1 RemainLife Units: Cycl RO 32-bit
Relay Output 1 Remaining Life Default: 0 Integer
The difference between the Total Life and the Elapsed Life. Min/Max: 0 / 2147483647
Important: Only used by 11-Series I/O Module models 20-750-1132C-2R and 20-750-
1132D-2R.
115 RO1 LifeEvntLvl Units: % RW Real
Relay Output 1 Life Event Level Default: 80.000
Sets the percentage of relay life cycles before action is taken. Min/Max: 0.000 / 100.000
Important: Only used by 11-Series I/O Module models 20-750-1132C-2R and 20-750-
1132D-2R.
116 RO1 LifeEvntActn Default: 1 = “Alarm” RW 32-bit
Relay Output 1 Life Event Action Options: 0 = “Ignore” Integer
Sets the action that will be taken when the percentage of relay life cycles has been 1 = “Alarm”
reached. 2 = “Flt Minor”
Important: Only used by 11-Series I/O Module models 20-750-1132C-2R and 20-750- 3 = “FltCoastStop”
1132D-2R. 4 = “Flt RampStop”
“Ignore” (0) – No action is taken. 5 = “Flt CL Stop”
“Alarm” (1) – Type 1 alarm indicated.
“Flt Minor” (2) – Minor fault indicated. If running, drive continues to run.
Enable with P950 [Minor Flt Cfg]. If not enabled, acts like a major fault.
“FltCoastStop” (3) – Major fault indicated. Coast to Stop.
“Flt RampStop” (4) – Major fault indicated. Ramp to Stop.
“Flt CL Stop” (5) – Major fault indicated. Current Limit Stop.
Read-Write
No. Display Name Values
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
Input 5
Input 4
Input 3
Input 2
Input 1
Input 0
Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 = Input Not Activated
1 = Input Activated
Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Options
Input 5
Input 4
Input 3
Input 2
Input 1
Input 0
Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 = Input Not Filtered
1 = Input Filtered
Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Read-Write
No. Display Name Values
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
Options
Relay Out 0
Digital Outputs
22-Series I/O
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
(1) Bit 1 = “Trans Out 0” for 22-Series I/O Module model 20-750-2263C-1R2T
= “Relay Out 1” for 22-Series I/O Module models 20-750-2262C-2R and 20-750-2262D-2R
(2) Bit 2 is only used by 22-Series I/O Module 20-750-2263C-1R2T
Read-Write
No. Display Name Values
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
Relay Out 0
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
0 = Output Not Inverted
Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
1 = Output Inverted
Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
(1) Bit 1 = “Trans Out 0” for 22-Series I/O Module model 20-750-2263C-1R2T
= “Relay Out 1” for 22-Series I/O Module models 20-750-2262C-2R and 20-750-2262D-2R
(2) Bit 2 is only used by 22-Series I/O Module 20-750-2263C-1R2T
7 Dig Out Setpoint RW 16-bit
Digital Output Setpoint Integer
Controls Relay or Transistor Outputs when chosen as the source. Can be used to control outputs from a communication device using DataLinks.
Trans Out 1(2)
Options Trans Out 0(1)
Relay Out 0
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
(1) Bit 1 = “Trans Out 0” for 22-Series I/O Module model 20-750-2263C-1R2T
= “Relay Out 1” for 22-Series I/O Module models 20-750-2262C-2R and 20-750-2262D-2R
Digital Outputs
22-Series I/O
Options
Grt Than Equ
Less Than
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Bit 0 “Less Than” – Level source is less than the level value.
Bit 1 “Grt Than Equ” – Level source is greater than or equal to the level value.
Bit 2 “Abs Less Than” – Absolute value of the level source is less than the absolute value of the level value.
Bit 3 “AbsGrtThanEq” – Absolute value of the level source is greater than or equal to the absolute value of the level value.
Read-Write
No. Display Name Values
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
2R is installed.
TO0 Level
Transistor Output 0 Level – 22-Series I/O Module model 20-750-2263C-1R2T is installed.
Sets the level compare value.
23 RO1 Level CmpSts RO 16-bit
Relay Output 1 Level Compare Status – 22-Series I/O Module model 20-750-2262C-2R or 20-750-2262D-2R is installed. Integer
TO0 Level CmpSts
Transistor Output 0 Level Compare Status – 22-Series I/O Module model 20-750-2263C-1R2T is installed.
Status of the level compare, and a possible source for a relay or transistor output. Relay Output n Select or Transistor Output n Select must have this selected to
energize the output. Can be used without a physical output as status information only.
AbsGrtThanEq
Abs Less Than
Options
Grt Than Equ
Less Than
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Bit 0 “Less Than” – Level source is less than the level value.
Bit 1 “Grt Than Equ” – Level source is greater than or equal to the level value.
Bit 2 “Abs Less Than” – Absolute value of the level source is less than the absolute value of the level value.
Bit 3 “AbsGrtThanEq” – Absolute value of the level source is greater than or equal to the absolute value of the level value.
24 RO1 On Time Units: Secs RW Real
Relay Output 1 On Time – 22-Series I/O Module model 20-750-2262C-2R or 20-750- Default: 0.0
2262D-2R is installed. Min/Max: 0.0 / 600.0
TO0 On Time
Transistor Output 0 On Time – 22-Series I/O Module model 20-750-2263C-1R2T is
installed.
Sets the “ON Delay” time for the digital outputs. This is the time between the occurrence
of a condition and activation of the relay or transistor.
Read-Write
No. Display Name Values
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
Options
Grt Than Equ
Less Than
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
0 = Condition False
Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
1 = Condition True
Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Bit 0 “Less Than” – Level source is less than the level value.
Bit 1 “Grt Than Equ” – Level source is greater than or equal to the level value.
Bit 2 “Abs Less Than” – Absolute value of the level source is less than the absolute value of the level value.
Bit 3 “AbsGrtThanEq” – Absolute value of the level source is greater than or equal to the absolute value of the level value.
Important: Only used by 22-Series I/O Module model 20-750-2263C-1R2T.
34 TO1 On Time Units: Secs RW Real
Transistor Output 1 On Time Default: 0.0
Sets the “ON Delay” time for the digital outputs. This is the time between the occurrence Min/Max: 0.0 / 600.0
of a condition and activation of the transistor.
Important: Only used by 22-Series I/O Module model 20-750-2263C-1R2T.
35 TO1 Off Time Units: Secs RW Real
Transistor Output 1 Off Time Default: 0.0
Sets the “OFF Delay” time for the digital outputs. This is the time between the Min/Max: 0.0 / 600.0
disappearance of a condition and de-activation of the transistor.
Important: Only used by 22-Series I/O Module model 20-750-2263C-1R2T.
Read-Write
No. Display Name Values
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
Over Temp
Options
PTC Short
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
PTC Ok
Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 = Condition False
1 = Condition True
Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Read-Write
No. Display Name Values
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
Options
0 = Voltage Mode
Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
1 = Current Mode
Analog Inputs
Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
22-Series I/O
Options
Read-Write
No. Display Name Values
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
Loss 1
Loss 0
Loss
Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 = No Loss
1 = Loss Detected
Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Sets the lowest input value to the analog input scaling block. Default: 0.000 Volts
0.000 mA
Min/Max: –/+10.000 Volts
0.000 / 20.000 mA
53 Anlg In0 LssActn Default: 0 = “Ignore” RW 32-bit
Analog Input 0 Loss Action Options: 0 = “Ignore” Integer
Selects drive action when an analog signal loss is detected. Signal loss is defined as an 1 = “Alarm”
analog signal less than 1V or 2mA. The signal loss event ends and normal operation 2 = “Flt Minor”
resumes when the input signal level is greater than or equal to 1.5V or 3mA. 3 = “FltCoastStop”
“Ignore” (0) – No action is taken. 4 = “Flt RampStop”
“Alarm” (1) – Type 1 alarm indicated. 5 = “Flt CL Stop”
“Flt Minor” (2) – Minor fault indicated. If running, drive continues to run. 6 = “Hold Input”
Enable with P950 [Minor Flt Cfg]. If not enabled, acts like a major fault.
7 = “Set Input Lo”
“FltCoastStop” (3) – Major fault indicated. Coast to Stop.
8 = “Set Input Hi”
“Flt RampStop” (4) – Major fault indicated. Ramp to Stop.
“Flt CL Stop” (5) – Major fault indicated. Current Limit Stop.
“Hold Input” (6) – Holds input at last value.
“Set Input Lo” (7) – Sets input to P52 [Anlg In0 Lo].
“Set Input Hi” (8) – Sets input to P51 [Anlg In0 Hi].
54 Anlg In0 Raw Val Units: Volt RO Real
Analog Input 0 Raw Value mA
Raw Value of the analog input. Default: 0.000 Volts
0.000 mA
Min/Max: –/+10.000 Volts
0.000 / 20.000 mA
55 Anlg In0 Filt Gn Default: 1.00 RW Real
Analog Input 0 Filter Gain Min/Max: –/+5.00
Sets the analog input filter gain.
Read-Write
No. Display Name Values
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
Read-Write
No. Display Name Values
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
0 = Condition False
Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1
1 = Condition True
Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Read-Write
No. Display Name Values
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
Read-Write
No. Display Name Values
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
Relay Out 0
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Master
0 = Condition False
Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
1 = Condition True
Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
(1) Bit 1= “Relay Out 0” for 22-Series I/O Module models 20-750-2262C-2R and 20-750-2262D-2R
100 RO0 Load Type Default: 1 = “DC Inductive” RW 32-bit
Relay Output 0 Load Type Options: 0 = “DC Resistive” Integer
Sets the type of load that will be applied to the relay. Must be properly set for the 1 = “DC Inductive”
Predictive Maintenance function to predict the relay life. 2 = “AC Resistive”
3 = “AC Inductive”
101 RO0 Load Amps Units: Amps RW Real
Relay Output 0 Load Amps Default: 2.000
Load current that will be applied to the relay contacts. Must be properly set for the Min/Max: 0.000 / 2.000
Predictive Maintenance function to approximate the relay life.
Predictive Main
22-Series I/O
Read-Write
No. Display Name Values
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
2262D-2R.
114 RO1 RemainLife Units: Cycl RO 32-bit
Relay Output 1 Remaining Life Default: 0 Integer
The difference between the Total Life and the Elapsed Life. Min/Max: –/+2147483647
Important: Only used by 22-Series I/O Module models 20-750-2262C-2R and 20-750-
2262D-2R.
115 RO1 LifeEvntLvl Units: % RW Real
Relay Output 1 Life Event Level Default: 80.000
Sets the percentage of relay life cycles before action is taken. Min/Max: 0.000 / 100.000
Important: Only used by 22-Series I/O Module models 20-750-2262C-2R and 20-750-
2262D-2R.
116 RO1 LifeEvntActn Default: 1 = “Alarm” RW 32-bit
Relay Output 1 Life Event Action Options: 0 = “Ignore” Integer
Sets the action that will be taken when the percentage of relay life cycles has been 1 = “Alarm”
reached. 2 = “Flt Minor”
Important: Only used by 22-Series I/O Module models 20-750-2262C-2R and 20-750- 3 = “FltCoastStop”
2262D-2R. 4 = “Flt RampStop”
“Ignore” (0) – No action is taken. 5 = “Flt CL Stop”
“Alarm” (1) – Type 1 alarm indicated.
“Flt Minor” (2) – Minor fault indicated. If running, drive continues to run.
Enable with P950 [Minor Flt Cfg]. If not enabled, acts like a major fault.
“FltCoastStop” (3) – Major fault indicated. Coast to Stop.
“Flt RampStop” (4) – Major fault indicated. Ramp to Stop.
“Flt CL Stop” (5) – Major fault indicated. Current Limit Stop.
Read-Write
No. Display Name Values
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
Single Ended
Options
Inv Home In
A Chan Only
Z Chan Enbl
Edge Mode
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Direction
0 = Condition False
Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
1 = Condition True
Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Bit 0 “Z Channel Enbl” – Configures the Channel Z to be used and monitored for Phase Loss. A value of 0 = the Z channel will be ignored. Must be set if the encoder
marker pulse is used.
Bit 1 “A Chan Only” – Configures the module to use only the A channel, and ignore the B channel. In this mode, direction cannot be determined, and the position
counter will always count up.
Single Incremental Encoder
Bit 2 “Edge Mode” – Configure the module to use AB edge time data for speed calculation rather than accumulated count. Recommended for low speed operation.
Bit 3 “Inv Home In” – Configures the home input to be inverted. 1 = inverted, 0 = not inverted
Bit 4 “Single Ended” – Configure when the A Quad B encoder has single ended signals. In this mode, Phase Loss detection is disabled. 0 = Differential, 1 = Single
Ended
Bit 5 “Direction” – Inverts the feedback count up/down associated with a given rotation direction internally. 1 = invert, 0 = do not invert This bit is changed by the
direction test in the Start-Up routine when encoder direction is determined to be incorrect and “Change Logic” is selected when prompted.
2 Encoder PPR Default: 1024 RW Real
Encoder Pulses Per Revolution Min/Max: 2 / 20000
Configures the encoder module for the Pulses Per Revolution (Encoder Lines) of the
incremental encoder.
3 Fdbk Loss Cfg Default: 3 = “FltCoastStop” RW Real
Feedback Loss Configure Options: 0 = “Ignore”
Configures how the drive reacts to an error status condition for the feedback. 1 = “Alarm”
“Ignore” (0) – No action is taken. 2 = “Flt Minor”
“Alarm” (1) – Type 1 alarm indicated. 3 = “FltCoastStop”
“Flt Minor” (2) – Minor fault indicated. If running, drive continues to run.
Enable with P950 [Minor Flt Cfg]. If not enabled, acts like a major fault.
“FltCoastStop” (3) – Major fault indicated. Coast to Stop.
4 Encoder Feedback Default: 0 RO Real
Encoder Feedback Min/Max: –/+2147483647
Displays the position feedback value of the encoder. This can be used as a source for the
main control (Port 0) Feedback Select.
Read-Write
No. Display Name Values
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
HomeIn Armed
HomMrk Event
HomeIn Event
Marker Event
Inv Home In
A Chan Only
Home Input
Z Chan Enbl
A Not Input
B Not Input
Z Not Input
Direction
A Input
B Input
Z Input
Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 = Condition False
1 = Condition True
Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Bit 0 “Z Chan Enbl” – State of the corresponding bit in the [Encoder Cfg] parameter.
Bit 1 “A Chan Only” – State of the corresponding bit in the [Encoder Cfg] parameter.
Bit 2 “A Input” – State of encoder A input signal.
Bit 3 “A Not Input” – State of encoder A Not input signal.
Bit 4 “B Input” – State of encoder B input signal.
Bit 5 “B Not Input” – State of encoder B Not input signal.
Bit 6 “Z Input” – State of encoder Z input signal.
Bit 7 “Z Not Input” – State of encoder Z Not input signal.
Bit 8 “Marker Event” – When channel Z (marker pulse) is used, indicates that a marker pulse is detected. Automatically cleared in the homing routine or due to
Single Incremental Encoder
clearing of faults. This bit will remain on until cleared by either the homing function, spindle orient function or clear fault. For the Single and Dual Incremental
encoder options, the marker input can only be used by the homing and spindle orient functions. Clearing the encoder faults will also clear the Marker Event status.
The single and dual encoder cards use the same clear fault mechanism that is used to clear the drive faults.
Bit 9 “Inv Home In” – State of the corresponding bit in the [Encoder Cfg] parameter. When set, the home input signal will be inverted.
Bit 10 “Home Input” – Active state of the Home Input signal. This status bit gets inverted if the “Inv Home In” bit is enabled.
Bit 11 “HomeIn Armed” – Indicates that the homing logic is configured to latch the encoder position upon the next transition of the home input.
Bit 12 “HomeIn Event” – Indicates that the homing logic has latched the encoder position in response to a transition of the home input.
Bit 13 “HomMrk Armed” – Indicates that the homing logic is configured to latch the encoder position upon the next marker (Z channel) pulse.
Bit 14 “HomMrk Event” – Indicates that the homing logic has latched the encoder position in response to a marker (Z channel) pulse.
Bit 15 “Direction” – State of the corresponding bit in the [Encoder Cfg] parameter.
6 Error Status RO 16-bit
Error Status Integer
Status information that will result in a feedback loss condition.
SI Comm Loss
Options
Phase Loss
Open Wire
Quad Loss
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Read-Write
No. Display Name Values
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
Displays the total number of encoder errors detected by the encoder card every 1
millisecond sample interval. These values are reset to zero every 1 millisecond.
Diagnostic Items are available for the encoder that show the errors counted over 8
milliseconds as well as the peak error values. The peak values are reset when the drive
faults are cleared.
8 Quad Loss Count Default: 0 RO Real
Displays the total number of encoder errors detected by the encoder card every 1 Min/Max: 0 / 15
millisecond sample interval. These values are reset to zero every 1 millisecond.
Diagnostic Items are available for the encoder that show the errors counted over 8
milliseconds as well as the peak error values. The peak values are reset when the drive
faults are cleared.
Read-Write
No. Display Name Values
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
Single Ended
Options
A Chan Only
Z Chan Enbl
Edge Mode
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Direction
Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 = Condition False
1 = Condition True
Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Bit 0 “Z Channel Enbl” – Configures the Channel Z to be used and monitored for Phase Loss. A value of 0 = the Z channel will be ignored.
Bit 1 “A Chan Only” – Configures the module to use only the A channel, and ignore the B channel. In this mode, direction cannot be determined, and the position
counter will always count up.
Bit 2 “Edge Mode” – Configure the module to use AB edge time data for speed calculation rather than accumulated count. Recommended for low speed operation.
Dual Incremental Encoder
Bit 4 “Single Ended” – Configure when the A Quad B encoder has single ended signals. In this mode, Phase Loss detection is disabled.
0 = Differential, 1 = Single Ended
Bit 5 “Direction” – Inverts the feedback count up/down associated with a given rotation direction internally. 1 = invert, 0 = do not invert
Encoder 0
Read-Write
No. Display Name Values
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
HomMrk Armed
Options
HomeIn Armed
HomMrk Event
HomeIn Event
Marker Event
Inv Home In
A Chan Only
Home Input
Z Chan Enbl
A Not Input
B Not Input
Z Not Input
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Direction
A Input
B Input
Z Input
Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Bit 0 “Z Chan Enbl” – State of the corresponding bit in the [Enc 0 Cfg] parameter.
Bit 1 “A Chan Only” – State of the corresponding bit in the [Enc 0 Cfg] parameter.
Bit 2 “A Input” – State of encoder A input signal.
Bit 3 “A Not Input” – State of encoder A Not input signal.
Bit 4 “B Input” – State of encoder B input signal.
Bit 5 “B Not Input” – State of encoder B Not input signal.
Bit 6 “Z Input” – State of encoder Z input signal.
Bit 7 “Z Not Input” – State of encoder Z Not input signal.
Bit 8 “Marker Event” – When channel Z (marker pulse) is used, indicates that a marker pulse is detected. Automatically cleared in the homing routine or due to
clearing of encoder faults.
Bit 9 “Inv Home In” – State of the corresponding bit in the [Enc 0 Cfg] parameter. When set, the home input signal will be inverted.
Bit 10 “Home Input” – Active state of the Home Input signal. This status bit gets inverted if the “Inv Home In” bit is enabled.
Bit 11 “HomeIn Armed” – Indicates that the homing logic is configured to latch the encoder position upon the next transition of the home input.
Dual Incremental Encoder
Bit 12 “HomeIn Event” – Indicates that the homing logic has latched the encoder position in response to a transition of the home input.
Bit 13 “HomMrk Armed” – Indicates that the homing logic is configured to latch the encoder position upon the next marker (Z channel) pulse.
Bit 14 “HomMrk Event” – Indicates that the homing logic has latched the encoder position in response to a marker (Z channel) pulse.
Encoder 0
Bit 15 “Direction” – State of the corresponding bit in the [Enc 0 Cfg] parameter.
6 Enc 0 Error Sts RO 32-bit
Encoder 0 Error Status Integer
Status information that will result in a feedback loss condition for Encoder 0.
Bit 0 “Open Wire” – Indicates that an input signal (A, B or Z) is in the same state as its complement (A Not, B Not, Z Not). For open wire detection to work, the
encoder signals must be differential (not single ended). The Z channel is only checked when enabled.
SI Comm Loss
Options
Phase Loss
Open Wire
Quad Loss
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Bit 1 “Phase Loss” – Indicates that more than 30 phase loss (open wire) events have occurred over an 8msec
time period. The same restrictions apply as on [Enc 0 Cfg] Bit 0 “Z Chan Enbl.”
Bit 2 “Quad Loss” – Quadrature loss events occur when simultaneous edge transitions occur on both the A and B encoder channels. Indicates that more than 10
quad loss events over a 10 msec time period are detected. Only valid when both A and B channels are used (not 'A Chan Only' in [Enc 0 Cfg]).
Bit 15 “SI Comm Loss” – Indicates a communication loss between the main control board and the encoder module over the Serial Interface backplane.
7 Enc 0 PhsLss Cnt Default: 0 RO 32-bit
Encoder 0 Phase Loss Count Min/Max: 0 / 127 Integer
Displays the active value of the encoder module's Encoder 0 phase loss counter
hardware register. Values in this register accumulated over 8 msec are used to detect
Phase Loss errors.
8 Enc 0 QuadLssCnt Default: 0 RO 32-bit
Encoder 0 Quad Loss Count Min/Max: 0 / 15 Integer
Displays the active value of the encoder module's Encoder 0 quad loss counter hardware
register. Values in this register accumulated over 8 msec are used to detect Quad Loss
errors.
Read-Write
No. Display Name Values
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
Single Ended
Options
A Chan Only
Z Chan Enbl
Edge Mode
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Direction
Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 = Condition False
1 = Condition True
Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Bit 0 “Z Channel Enbl” – Configures the Channel Z to be used and monitored for Phase Loss. A value of 0 = the Z channel will be ignored.
Bit 1 “A Chan Only” – Configures the module to use only the A channel, and ignore the B channel. In this mode, direction cannot be determined, and the position
counter will always count up.
Bit 2 “Edge Mode” – Configure the module to use AB edge time data for speed calculation rather than accumulated count. Recommended for low speed operation.
Dual Incremental Encoder
Bit 4 “Single Ended” – Configure when the A Quad B encoder has single ended signals. In this mode, Phase Loss detection is disabled. 0 = Differential, 1 = Single
Ended
Bit 5 “Direction” – Inverts the position count up/down associated with a given rotation direction internally. 1 = invert, 0 = do not invert
Encoder 1
Read-Write
No. Display Name Values
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
HomMrk Armed
Options
HomeIn Armed
HomMrk Event
HomeIn Event
Marker Event
Inv Home In
A Chan Only
Home Input
Z Chan Enbl
A Not Input
B Not Input
Z Not Input
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Direction
A Input
B Input
Z Input
Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Bit 0 “Z Chan Enbl” – State of the corresponding bit in the [Enc 1 Cfg] parameter.
Bit 1 “A Chan Only” – State of the corresponding bit in the [Enc 1 Cfg] parameter.
Bit 2 “A Input” – State of encoder A input signal.
Bit 3 “A Not Input” – State of encoder A Not input signal.
Bit 4 “B Input” – State of encoder B input signal.
Bit 5 “B Not Input” – State of encoder B Not input signal.
Bit 6 “Z Input” – State of encoder Z input signal.
Bit 7 “Z Not Input” – State of encoder Z Not input signal.
Bit 8 “Marker Event” – When channel Z (marker pulse) is used, indicates that a marker pulse is detected. Automatically cleared in the homing routine or due to
clearing of encoder faults.
Bit 9 “Inv Home In” – State of the corresponding bit in the [Enc 1 Cfg] parameter. When set, the home input signal will be inverted.
Bit 10 “Home Input” – Active state of the Home Input signal. This status bit gets inverted if the “Inv Home In” bit is enabled.
Bit 11 “HomeIn Armed” – Indicates that the homing logic is configured to latch the encoder position upon the next transition of the home input.
Bit 12 “HomeIn Event” – Indicates that the homing logic has latched the encoder position in response to a transition of the home input.
Dual Incremental Encoder
Bit 13 “HomMrk Armed” – Indicates that the homing logic is configured to latch the encoder position upon the next marker (Z channel) pulse.
Bit 14 “HomMrk Event” – Indicates that the homing logic has latched the encoder position in response to a marker (Z channel) pulse.
Encoder 1
Bit 15 “Direction” – State of the corresponding bit in the [Enc 1 Cfg] parameter.
16 Enc 1 Error Sts RO 32-bit
Encoder 1 Error Status Integer
Status information that will result in a feedback loss condition for Encoder 1.
SI Comm Loss
Options
Phase Loss
Open Wire
Quad Loss
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Bit 0 “Open Wire” – Indicates that an input signal (A, B or Z) is in the same state as its complement (A Not, B Not, Z Not).
For open wire detection to work, the encoder signals must be differential (not single ended).
The Z channel is only checked when enabled.
Bit 1 “Phase Loss” – Indicates that more than 30 phase loss (open wire) events have occurred over an 8msec time period. The same restrictions apply as on [Enc 1
Cfg] Bit 0 “Z Chan Enbl.”
Bit 2 “Quad Loss” – Quadrature loss events occur when simultaneous edge transitions occur on both the A and B encoder channels. Indicates that more than 10
quad loss events over a 10 msec time period are detected. Only valid when both A and B channels are used (not “A Chan Only” in [Enc 1 Cfg]).
Bit 15 “SI Comm Loss” – Indicates a communication loss between the main control board and the encoder module over the Serial Interface backplane.
17 Enc 1 PhsLss Cnt Default: 0 RO 32-bit
Encoder 1 Phase Loss Count Min/Max: 0 / 127 Integer
Displays the active value of the encoder module's Encoder 1 phase loss counter
hardware register. Values in this register accumulated over 8 msec are used to detect
Phase Loss errors.
18 Enc 1 QuadLssCnt Default: 0 RO 32-bit
Encoder 1 Quad Loss Count Min/Max: 0 / 15 Integer
Displays the active value of the encoder module's Encoder 1 quad loss counter hardware
register. Values in this register accumulated over 8 msec are used to detect Quad Loss
errors.
Read-Write
No. Display Name Values
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
Inv Home In
Options
Homing Cfg
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 = Not Inverted
1 = Inverted
Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Read-Write
No. Display Name Values
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
Options
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Module Status
Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 = Cleared
1 = Set
Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Bit 0 “Safety Mode” – Indicates that the dip switch on the dual encoder module is configured to place its feedback signals on the SI backplane for use by the Safe
Speed Monitor module. If multiple dual encoder modules are present, only one dual encoder can be configured for Safety Mode. 0 = Safety Mode Off. 1 = Safety
Mode On.
Bit 1 “SafetyVoltHi” – Indicates the status (configured by a jumper on the module) of the safety feedback voltage mode. 0 = 5V safety feedback mode, 1 = 12V
safety feedback mode.
Read-Write
No. Display Name Values
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
Hardware Err
Alarm Type 2
Alarm Type 1
Module Error
Firmware Err
Options
System Error
FB0FB1 Cflct
EncOut Cflct
Safety Cflct
Initializing
FB1 Alarm
FB0 Alarm
Sec Safety
DPI Ready
Cfg Alarm
Pri Safety
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
FB1 Error
FB0 Error
Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 = False
1 = True
Bit 0 “Module Error” – Indicates that the Feedback Option module has any error. This bit is set if at least one of the bits “FB0 Error”, “FB1 Error”, or “System Error” is
set.
Bit 1 “Alarm Type 1” – Indicates that there is any alarm of type 1 active on the Feedback Option module. Bits 8…10 indicate what kind of alarm is active.
Bit 2 “Alarm Type 2” – Indicates that there is any alarm of type 2 active on the Feedback Option module. Bits 20 and 21 indicate what kind of alarm is active.
Bit 4 “FB0 Error” – Indicates that Feedback 0 has an error. This bit is set if any Feedback 0 error bit in P10 [FB0 Sts] is set. If this bit is set, Bit 0 “Module Error” is also
set.
Bit 5 “FB1 Error” – Indicates that Feedback 1 has an error. This bit is set if any Feedback 1 error bit in P10 [FB1 Sts] is set. If this bit is set, Bit 0 “Module Error” is also
set.
Bit 6 “System Error” – Indicates that there is a feedback independent error on the Feedback Option module. Bits 12 and 13 show the type of the System Error. If this
bit is set, Bit 0 “Module Error” is also set.
Universal Feedback
Bit 8 “FB0 Alarm” – Indicates that feedback device 0 has an alarm. This bit is set if there is an alarm in the Feedback 0 encoder. If this bit is set, Bit 1 “Alarm Type 1”
and P10 [FB0 Sts] Bit 12 “Encoder Alm” will also be set. The specific alarm condition may be shown in a status found under the diagnostics tab for the Universal
Module
Feedback Module. Separate diagnostic items are provided for both ports and for both of the following devices: EnDat and BiSS. Alarm conditions for Linear Stahl
feedback devices can be found in P27 [FB0 LinStahl Sts] and P57 [FB1 LinStahl Sts].
Bit 9 “FB1 Alarm” – Indicates that feedback device 1 has an alarm. This bit is set if there is an alarm in the Feedback 1 encoder. If this bit is set, Bit 1 “Alarm Type 1”
and P40 [FB1 Sts] Bit 12 “Encoder Alm” will also be set. The specific alarm condition may be shown in a status found under the diagnostics tab for the Universal
Feedback Module. Separate diagnostic items are provided for both ports and for both of the following devices: EnDat and BiSS. Alarm conditions for Linear Stahl
feedback devices can be found in P27 [FB0 LinStahl Sts] and P57 [FB1 LinStahl Sts].
Bit 10 “Cfg Alarm” – Indicates that there is a feedback independent alarm on the Feedback Option module. Bits 16 and 17 show the type of the Cfg Alarm. If this bit
is set, Bit 1 “Alarm Type 1” is also set.
Bit 12 “Hardware Err” – Indicates that there is a Hardware Error on the Feedback Option module. If this bit is set, Bit 6 “System Error” is also set. The hardware is self
tested by the board at powerup. Specific details of the hardware failure are not available.
Bit 13 “Firmware Err” – Indicates that there is a Firmware Error on the Feedback Option module. A Firmware Error occurs if the Hardware and the downloaded
Firmware are not compatible. If this bit is set, Bit 6 “System Error” is also set.
Bit 16 “EncOut Cflct” – If set, there is one of the following problems with the Encoder Output:
• The selection in P80 [Enc Out Sel] is not possible since the required pins on the terminal blocks are already used for Feedback 0 or 1 according to P6 [FB0 Device
Sel] and P36 [FB1 Device Sel].
• P80 [Enc Out Sel] is set to “Sine Cosine” and there is no signal connected to the pins 1-4 of the Terminal Block 1.
• P80 [Enc Out Sel] is set to “Sine Cosine”, the value of [FBn IncAndSC PPR] is not a power of two, and the parameter P84 [Enc Out Z PPR] is not set to 0 “1 ZPulse.”
This is not allowed.
• P80 [Enc Out Sel] is set to “Channel X” or “Channel Y” and there is no encoder connected to that channel.
• P80 [Enc Out Sel] is set to “Channel X” or “Channel Y” and there is a linear encoder connected to this channel. If this bit is set, Bit 10 “Cfg Alarm” is also set.
Bit 17 “Safety Cflct” – If set, the Safety DIP switches are in an invalid position. If this bit is set, Bit 10 “Cfg Alarm” is also set.
Bit 20 “FB0FB1 Cflct” – If set, the combination of the feedback selection done with the parameters P6 [FB0 Device Sel] and P36 [FB1 Device Sel] is invalid, i.e. both
feedbacks have Sin-Cos-Signals (There is only place for one set of Sin-Cos-Signals on the Terminal Blocks). If this bit is set, Bit 2 “Alarm Type 2” is also set.
Bit 21 “Initializing” – Indicates that the Universal Feedback State Machine is in the Initialize State. This Type 2 alarm makes sure that the motor cannot be started
during the initialization state. If this bit is set, Bit 2 “Alarm Type 2” is also set.
Bit 29 “Pri Safety” – Indicates that the UFB is used as primary safety module.
Bit 30 “Sec Safety” – Indicates that the UFB is used as secondary safety module.
Bit 31 “DPI Ready” – This bit tells the MCB if the UFB is ready for DPI communication.
Read-Write
No. Display Name Values
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
automatically and should normally be used instead of this parameter. In cases where the 3 = “FB Initlz”
errors need to be reset directly, this parameter can be used.
Module
“Ready” (0) – This is the normal state for this parameter. All other states are temporary.
This parameter will return to “Ready” once the requested reset operation is complete.
“Clr FB Intlz” (1) – Requests the module to clear all errors and re-execute its
initialization routines. Only possible when the drive is stopped.
“Clear Errors” (2) – Requests the module to clear all errors without re-executing its
initialization routines. Allowed if the drive is active.
“FB Initlz” (3) – Requests the module to execute a software reset. Only possible when
the drive is stopped.
Read-Write
No. Display Name Values
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
block 1. The following Hiperface Type ID codes are supported: 02h, 07h, 22h, 27h, 23h, 8 = “BiSS FD ChY”
and 37h. Refer to manufacturer data sheet for more information. 9 = “Reserved” (See “SSI FD ChX”)
Feedback 0
“BiSS SC” (3) – BiSS encoder with sine/cosine signals. Terminal block 1. 10 = “Reserved” (See “SSI FD ChY”)
“SSI SC” (4) – SSI encoder with sine/cosine signals. Terminal block 1. 11 = “SinCos Only”
“EnDat FD ChX” (5) – Full digital EnDat encoder without sine/cosine signals 12 = “Inc A B Z”
(Heidenhain). Terminal block 1. 13 = “Inc SC”
“EnDat FD ChY” (6) – Full digital EnDat encoder without sine/cosine signals 14 = “LinTempo ChX”
(Heidenhain). Terminal block 2.
15 = “LinTempo ChY”
“BiSS FD ChX” (7) – Full digital BiSS encoder without sine/cosine signals. Terminal block 1.
16 = “LinStahl ChX”
“BiSS FD ChY” (8) – Full digital BiSS encoder without sine/cosine signals. Terminal block 2.
17 = “LinStahl ChY”
“SSI FD ChX” (9) – SSI Full Digital ChX
18 = “LinSSI ChX”
“SSI FD ChY” (10) – SSI Full Digital ChY
19 = “LinSSI ChY”
“SinCos Only” (11) – Generic sine/cosine encoder. Terminal block 1.
“Inc A B Z” (12) – A Quad B encoder with Z marker. Terminal block 1, Pins 17…22.
“Inc SC” (13) – A Quad B encoder without Z marker. Terminal block 1, Pins 1…4.
“LinTempo ChX” (14) – Temposonic linear encoder. Terminal block 1.
“LinTempo ChY” (15) – Temposonic linear encoder. Terminal block 2.
“LinStahl ChX” (16) – Stahl linear encoder. Terminal block 1.
“LinStahl ChY” (17) – Stahl linear encoder. Terminal block 2.
“LinSSI ChX” (18) – Any linear encoder with an SSI interface. Terminal block 1.
“LinSSI ChY” (19) – Any linear encoder with an SSI interface. Terminal block 2.
Read-Write
No. Display Name Values
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
Incremental
Options Temposonic
Single Turn
Full Digital
EnDat 2p2
EnDat 2p1
Multi Turn
Enh Resol
Hiperface
Reserved
Sin Cos
Rotary
Linear
Stahl
BiSS
SSI
0 = Condition False
Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
1 = Condition True
Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Bit 3 “Multi Turn” – Multiturn absolute encoder. This encoder type can track absolute position across multiple encoder turns.
Bit 4 “Enh Resol” – High resolution encoder. This bit is set if there are more than 24 bits resolution (full digital encoders) or the PPR is greater than or equal to
Feedback 0
16384. If this bit is set, Bit 1 “24-bit Resol” in parameter [FB0 Cfg] should also be set.
Bit 5 “Sin Cos” – Sine / Cosine encoder, abbreviated SC. This encoder type makes use of an analog sine/cosine signal pair. This is the analog counterpart to the A
quad B incremental encoder. A fine interpolation algorithm is sometimes used to provide high resolution feedback by processing the full sine/cosine cycle. Lower
resolution feedback is also implemented by counting only zero crossings.
Bit 6 “Full Digital” – Full digital encoder, abbreviated FD. Refers to devices that use a serial communication interface, such as a clock and data lines to transmit data
to/from the module. The analog (sine/cosine) signals are not used with a Full Digital interface.
Bit 7 “Incremental” – Typically an A quad B encoder, with optional Z (marker) channel. “A Channel Only” is possible (no B channel), but rarely used because this
configuration lacks direction capability. Single channel incremental could be used to provide a speed (magnitude only) reference signal.
Bit 8 “EnDat 2p1” – Heidenhain absolute encoder with EnDat 2.1 command set support. EnDat is a proprietary protocol developed by Heidenhain. It is a
synchronous, bidirectional serial interface. EnDat is a full digital interface.
Bit 9 “EnDat 2p2” – Heidenhain EnDat 2.2 command set support. This version supports incremental as well as absolute encoders.
Bit 10 “Hiperface” – Dedicated serial interface protocol for Stegmann devices. Hiperface is short for High Performance Interface. This interface makes use of both
analog (sine/cosine) and digital (clock/data) signals.
Bit 11 “BiSS” – Bidirectional Synchronous Serial Interface. This is an open protocol and is hardware-compatible with SSI. Both mixed SC with digital and FD types
are supported. Presently, only BiSS encoders from Hengstler GmbH are supported.
Bit 12 “SSI” – Synchronous Serial Interface. Only the mixed SC with digital version is supported. Rotary version is mixed analog/digital, linear version is full digital.
Bit 13 “Temposonic” – Linear position sensor from MTS Systems Corp. Full digital SSI interface, absolute device uses magnetostrictive technology.
Bit 14 “Stahl” – Linear position sensor from Stahl GmbH. Full digital SSI interface, absolute device uses an encoded rail.
Read-Write
No. Display Name Values
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
FD Low Baud
Options
SC Quadrant
24-bit Resol
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Direction
Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 = Condition False
1 = Condition True
Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Read-Write
No. Display Name Values
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
Msg Checksum
Options
SC Amplitude
Encoder Alm
SpplyVltRng
Unsupp Enc
Encoder Err
Phase Loss
Diagnostic
Open Wire
Quad Loss
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Timeout
Comm
Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 = Condition False
1 = Condition True
Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Bit 0 “Encoder Err” – When set, indicates that a device specific error has occurred. Further detail can be found for each of the following devices:
– Linear Stahl device on Feedback 0, see P27 [FB0 LinStahl Sts] bits 4, 8…14.
– Linear Stahl device on Feedback 1, see P57 [FB1 LinStahl Sts] bits 4, 8…14.
– EnDat device on Feedback 0, see Universal Feedback diagnostic Item 9 [FB0 EnDat Sts] bits 0…6.
– EnDat device on Feedback 1, see Universal Feedback diagnostic Item 15 [FB1 EnDat Sts] bits 0…6.
– BiSS device on Feedback 0, see Universal Feedback diagnostic Item 10 [FB0 BiSS Sts] bits 0, 8…15.
– BiSS device on Feedback 1, see Universal Feedback diagnostic Item 16 [FB1 BiSS Sts] bits 0, 8…15.
– Hiperface device (either feedback, 0 or 1), see diagnostic Item 18 [Hiperface Sts] bits 0…31.
Bit 1 “Msg Checksum” – When asserted, the module has experienced a checksum error while attempting to communicate to an encoder via the serial
communication channel.
Bit 2 “Timeout” – When asserted, the module has experienced a time out condition while attempting to communicate to the encoder via the serial communication
channel.
Universal Feedback
Bit 3 “Comm” – When asserted, there was an error (except Checksum and Time Out) while attempting to communicate to an encoder via the serial communication
channel.
Feedback 0
Bit 4 “Diagnostic” – When asserted, the module has experienced a diagnostic test failure on power up.
Bit 5 “SpplyVltRng” – When asserted, the voltage source to the encoder is out of range.
Bit 6 “SC Amplitude” – When asserted, the Universal Feedback option module has detected that the analog Sine/Cosine (SC) signal amplitude is out of tolerance.
Bit 7 “Open Wire” – When asserted, the module has detected an open wire. The open wire condition for A quad B devices checks that the A, B, and Z signals are in
opposite states to their corresponding NOT signals. Note that when the “A Chan Only” configuration is selected, the B signal will be ignored. If the “Z Chan Enbl”
configuration is not selected, then then the Z signal will be ignored. The open wire condition for sine/cosine devices checks the analog signal levels. An open wire
condition will occur when both the sine and cosine signals are smaller than 0.03V. If only one of the two analog signals is missing, then a “SC Amplitude” error
condition will occur.
Bit 8 “Quad Loss” – Indicates that there is a signal quadrature error.
Bit 9 “Phase Loss” – Indicates that an A or B signal of an A Quad B Incremental encoder was not detected.
Bit 10 “Unsupp Enc” – Indicates that the connected encoder is not supported.
Bit 12 “Encoder Alm” – When asserted, there is an Encoder Alarm.
15 FB0 IncAndSC PPR Units: PPR RW 32-bit
Feedback 0 Incremental and Sine Cosine Pulses Per Revolution Default: 1024 Integer
Indicates the Pulses Per Revolution (Encoder Lines) of the SinCos or A Quad B encoder for Min/Max: 1 / 100000
the feedback 0 device. When using a permanent magnet motor, the pulses per
revolution (PPR) must be an exponent of two. For example: 512, 1024, 2048, 4096,
8192…524288…
For the following selections, PPR is automatically read from the encoder:
• EnDat SC
• BiSS SC (not manually configured)
• Hiperface SC
For the following selections, PPR has to be entered by the user:
• BiSS SC, Manually configured
• Gen SinCos
• A Quad B
Important: Parameter is only updated on power up.
Read-Write
No. Display Name Values
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
Single Ended
Options
A Chan Only
Z Chan Enbl
Edge Mode
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
0 = Condition False
Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0
1 = Condition True
Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Bit 0 “Z Chan Enbl” – When set, Channel Z is also monitored for Phase Loss. When cleared, Channel Z is ignored for Phase Loss detection.
Only used if [FB0 Device Sel] = “Inc A B Z.”
Bit 1 “A Chan Only” – When set, logic monitors only channel A. When clear, logic monitors both A and B.
Bit 2 “Edge Mode” – When set, speed calc uses AB edge data. When clear, speed calc does not use AB edge data.
Bit 4 “Single Ended” – This bit has to be set if the connected A Quad B encoder has single ended signals. For these encoders, the Phase Loss detection is switched off.
17 FB0 Inc Sts RO 16-bit
Feedback 0 Incremental Status Integer
Displays Incremental Feedback status for the feedback 0 device.
A Chan Only
Z Chan Enbl
Options
A Not Input
B Not Input
Z Not Input
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
A Input
B Input
Z Input
1 = Condition True
Feedback 0
Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Bit 0 “Z Chan Enbl” – Indicates that Channel Z is monitored for Phase Loss. Only used if [FB0 Device Sel] = “Inc A B Z.”
Bit 1 “A Chan Only” – Indicates only A channel is monitored, B channel not used.
Bit 2 “A Input” – State of encoder A input signal
Bit 3 “A Not Input” – State of encoder A Not input signal
Bit 4 “B Input” – State of encoder B input signal
Bit 5 “B Not Input” – State of encoder B Not input signal
Bit 6 “Z Input” – State of encoder Z input signal
Bit 7 “Z Not Input” – State of encoder Z Not input signal
20 FB0 SSI Cfg RW 16-bit
Feedback 0 SSI Configuration Integer
Configures the communication to a SSI encoder for the feedback 0 device. Transmission format: [MSB...Position...LSB], [Error Bit]*, [Parity Bit]*.
DblWordQuery
Options
Err Bit Enbl
Gray Code
Parity Bit
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
0 = Condition False
Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0
1 = Condition True
Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Bit 0 “Parity Bit” – If set, SSI encoder has to support a parity bit (even parity).
Bit 2 “Gray Code” – Enables the gray to binary conversion of the position.
Bit 3 “Err Bit Enbl” – If set, there is an error bit transmitted by the encoder.
Bit 4 “DblWordQuery” – If set, a Double Word Query is executed at startup which means that the same position is transmitted twice by the encoder. If the two
positions are not identical, the “Comm” error bit in [FB0 Sts] is set. This bit only needs to be cleared if the encoder does not support Double Word Query and it does
not send zeros instead of the second position (which it actually should according to the SSI specification).
Read-Write
No. Display Name Values
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
Sets the sample rate for the linear channel for the feedback 0 device. This determines 1 = “1.0 ms”
Feedback 0
how often the Universal Feedback module will sample the absolute position device. 2 = “1.5 ms“
3 = “2.0 ms“
27 FB0 LinStahl Sts RO 16-bit
Feedback 0 Linear Stahl Status Integer
Displays the error status of the linear Stahl encoder for the feedback 0 device.
OutOfRailAlm
Options
Optics Alarm
EPROM Error
Read Head 2
Read Head 1
OutOfRailErr
No Position
ROM Error
RAM Error
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Read-Write
No. Display Name Values
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
and 37h. Refer to manufacturer data sheet for more information. 9 = “SSI FD ChX”
“BiSS SC” (3) – BiSS encoder with sine/cosine signals. Terminal block 1.
Feedback 1
10 = “SSI FD ChY”
“SSI SC” (4) – SSI encoder with sine/cosine signals. Terminal block 1. 11 = “SinCos Only”
“EnDat FD ChX” (5) – Full digital EnDat encoder without sine/cosine signals 12 = “Inc A B Z”
(Heidenhain). Terminal block 1. 13 = “Inc SC”
“EnDat FD ChY” (6) – Full digital EnDat encoder without sine/cosine signals 14 = “LinTempo ChX”
(Heidenhain). Terminal block 2.
15 = “LimTempo ChY”
“BiSS FD ChX” (7) – Full digital BiSS encoder without sine/cosine signals. Terminal block
1. 16 = “LinStahl ChX”
“BiSS FD ChY” (8) – Full digital BiSS encoder without sine/cosine signals. Terminal block 17 = “LinStahl ChY”
2. 18 = “LinSSI ChX”
“SSI FD ChX” (9) – SSI Full Digital ChX 19 = “LinSSI ChY”
“SSI FD ChY” (10) – SSI Full Digital ChY
“SinCos Only” (11) – Generic sine/cosine encoder. Terminal block 1.
“Inc A B Z” (12) – A Quad B encoder with Z marker. Terminal block 1, Pins 17…22.
“Inc SC” (13) – A Quad B encoder without Z marker. Terminal block 1, Pins 1…4.
“LinTempo ChX” (14) – Temposonic linear encoder. Terminal block 1.
“LinTempo ChY” (15) – Temposonic linear encoder. Terminal block 2.
“LinStahl ChX” (16) – Stahl linear encoder. Terminal block 1.
“LinStahl ChY” (17) – Stahl linear encoder. Terminal block 2.
“LinSSI ChX” (18) – Any linear encoder with an SSI interface. Terminal block 1.
“LinSSI ChY” (19) – Any linear encoder with an SSI interface. Terminal block 2.
Read-Write
No. Display Name Values
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
Incremental
Options Temposonic
Single Turn
Full Digital
EnDat 2p2
EnDat 2p1
Multi Turn
Enh Resol
Hiperface
Reserved
Sin Cos
Rotary
Linear
Stahl
BiSS
SSI
0 = Condition False
Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
1 = Condition True
Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Bit 3 “Multi Turn” – Multiturn absolute encoder. This encoder type can track absolute position across multiple encoder turns.
Bit 4 “Enh Resol” – High resolution encoder. This bit is set if there are more than 24 bits resolution (full digital encoders) or the PPR is greater than or equal to
Feedback 1
16384. If this bit is set, Bit 1 “24-bit Resol” in parameter [FB0 Cfg] should also be set.
Bit 5 “Sin Cos” – Sine / Cosine encoder, abbreviated SC. This encoder type makes use of an analog sine/cosine signal pair. This is the analog counterpart to the A
quad B incremental encoder. A fine interpolation algorithm is sometimes used to provide high resolution feedback by processing the full sine/cosine cycle. Lower
resolution feedback is also implemented by counting only zero crossings.
Bit 6 “Full Digital” – Full digital encoder, abbreviated FD. Refers to devices that use a serial communication interface, such as a clock and data lines to transmit data
to/from the module. The analog (sine/cosine) signals are not used with a Full Digital interface.
Bit 7 “Incremental” – Typically an A quad B encoder, with optional Z (marker) channel. “A Channel Only” is possible (no B channel), but rarely used because this
configuration lacks direction capability. Single channel incremental could be used to provide a speed (magnitude only) reference signal.
Bit 8 “EnDat 2p1” – Heidenhain absolute encoder with EnDat 2.1 command set support. EnDat is a proprietary protocol developed by Heidenhain. It is a
synchronous, bidirectional serial interface. EnData is a full digital interface.
Bit 9 “EnDat 2p2” – Heidenhain EnDat 2.2 command set support. This version supports incremental as well as absolute encoders.
Bit 10 “Hiperface” – Dedicated serial interface protocol for Stegmann devices. Hiperface is short for High Performance Interface. This interface makes use of both
analog (sine/cosine) and digital (clock/data) signals.
Bit 11 “BiSS” – Bidirectional Sychronous Serial Interface. This is an open protocol and is hardware-compatible with SSI. Both mixed SC with digital and FD types are
supported. Presently, only BiSS encoders from Hengstler GmbH are supported.
Bit 12 “SSI” – Synchronous Serial Interface. Only the mixed SC with digital version is supported. Rotary version is mixed analog/digital, linear version is full digital.
Bit 13 “Temposonic” – Linear position sensor from MTS Systems Corp. Full digital SSI interface, absolute device uses magnetostrictive technology.
Bit 14 “Stahl” – Linear position sensor from Stahl GmbH. Full digital SSI interface, absolute device uses an encoded rail.
Read-Write
No. Display Name Values
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
FD Low Baud
Options
SC Quadrant
24-bit Resol
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Direction
Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 = Condition False
1 = Condition True
Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Options
SC Amplitude
Encoder Alm
SpplyVltRng
Unsupp Enc
Encoder Err
Phase Loss
Diagnostic
Open Wire
Quad Loss
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Timeout
Comm
0 = Condition False
Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
1 = Condition True
Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Read-Write
No. Display Name Values
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
A Chan Only
Z Chan Enbl
Edge Mode
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Bit 0 “Z Chan Enbl” – When set, Channel Z is also monitored for Phase Loss. When cleared, Channel Z is ignored for Phase Loss detection.
Only used if [FB1 Device Sel] = “Inc A B Z.”
Bit 1 “A Chan Only” – When set, logic monitors only channel A. When clear, logic monitors both A and B.
Bit 2 “Edge Mode” – When set, speed calc uses AB edge data. When clear, speed calc does not use AB edge data.
Bit 4 “Single Ended” – This bit has to be set if the connected A Quad B encoder has single ended signals. For these encoders, the Phase Loss detection is switched off.
47 FB1 Inc Sts RO 16-bit
Feedback 1 Incremental Status Integer
Displays Incremental Feedback status for the feedback 1 device.
A Chan Only
Z Chan Enbl
Options
A Not Input
B Not Input
Z Not Input
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
A Input
B Input
Z Input
0 = Condition False
Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
1 = Condition True
Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Bit 0 “Z Chan Enbl” – Indicates that Channel Z is monitored for Phase Loss. Only used if [FB1 Device Sel] = “Inc A B Z.”
Bit 1 “A Chan Only” – Indicates only A channel is monitored, B channel not used.
Bit 2 “A Input” – State of encoder A input signal
Bit 3 “A Not Input” – State of encoder A Not input signal
Bit 4 “B Input” – State of encoder B input signal
Bit 5 “B Not Input” – State of encoder B Not input signal
Bit 6 “Z Input” – State of encoder Z input signal
Bit 7 “Z Not Input” – State of encoder Z Not input signal
Read-Write
No. Display Name Values
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
DblWordQuery
Options
Parity Bit
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
0 = Condition False
Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0
1 = Condition True
Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Bit 0 “Parity Bit” – If set, SSI encoder has to support a parity bit (even parity).
Bit 2 “Gray Code” – Enables the gray to binary conversion of the position.
Bit 3 “Err Bit Enbl” – If set, there is an error bit transmitted by the encoder.
Bit 4 “DblWordQuery” – If set, a Double Word Query is executed at startup which means that the same position is transmitted twice by the encoder. If the two
positions are not identical, the “Comm” error bit in [FB1 Sts] is set. This bit only needs to be cleared if the encoder does not support Double Word Query and it does
not send zeros instead of the second position (which it actually should according to the SSI specification).
51 FB1 SSI Resol Units: Bits RW 32-bit
Feedback 1 SSI Resolution Default: 13 Integer
Configures the number of bits for the position within one revolution (resolution) of the Min/Max: 8 / 32
SSI encoder for the feedback 1 device.
52 FB1 SSI Turns Units: Bits RW 32-bit
Feedback 1 SSI Turns Default: 12 Integer
Configures the number of bits for the revolutions of the SSI encoder for the feedback 0 Min/Max: 0 / 16
Universal Feedback
device. Setting is based on the encoder specifications. Set to 0 for a linear SSI encoder.
Feedback 1
Options
Optics Alarm
EPROM Error
Read Head 2
Read Head 1
OutOfRailErr
No Position
ROM Error
RAM Error
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
0 = Condition False
Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
1 = Condition True
Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Bit 0 “Optics Alarm” – Displays an alarm when fiber optics require cleaning.
Bit 1 “OutOfRailAlm” – Indicates that the read encoder count is at the maximum value (524,287).
Bit 4 “OutOfRailErr” – Indicates that there is no more room between the read head and the rail.
Bit 8 “Read Head 1” – Indicates that the read head must be cleaned or installed correctly.
Bit 9 “Read Head 2” – Indicates that the read head must be cleaned or installed correctly.
Bit 10 “RAM Error” – Indicates a RAM error. Reading head needs to be repaired.
Bit 11 “EPROM Error” – Indicates an EPROM error. Reading head needs to be repaired.
Bit 12 “ROM Error” – Indicates a ROM error. Reading head needs to be repaired.
Bit 14 “No Position” – Indicates that no position value was available. Only happens after power on or reset.
Read-Write
No. Display Name Values
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
Specifies the emulated encoder output PPR when the Feedback Selection (FB device 0/1 1 = “1024 PPR”
Encoder Out
Sel) is set to Full Digital (values 5…10). When the Feedback selection is set to Sin/Cos 2 = “2048 PPR”
“SC”, the Sin/Cos native PPR defines the emulated encoder outputs PPR. 3 = “4096 PPR”
83 Enc Out Z Offset Units: PPR RW 32-bit
Encoder Output Z Offset Default: 0 Integer
Configures the offset of the Z pulse for both simulated and emulated encoder output. Min/Max: 0 / 100000
The marker offset is specified within one revolution.
Simulated mode is used for full digital rotary devices and is selected by “Channel X” and
“Channel Y” in P80 [Enc Out Sel].
Emulated mode is used when “Sine Cosine” devices are selected in P80 [Enc Out Sel].
The encoder output function cannot be used with linear feedback devices.
84 Enc Out Z PPR Default: 0 = “1 Z-Pulse” RW 32-bit
Encoder Output Z Pulses Per Revolution Options: 0 = “1 Z-Pulse” Integer
Configures the number of Z-Pulses per encoder revolution. 1 = “2 Z-Pulses”
For example, if “32 Z-Pulses” (5) is selected, then 32 Z pulses will be generated for each 2 = “4 Z-Pulses”
complete revolution of the full digital input encoder. Each input encoder revolution will 3 = “8 Z-Pulses”
produce the number of output pulses specified on the A and B output channels in 4 = “16 Z-Pulses”
addition to 32 pulses on the Z output channel. The Z pulses will be evenly spaced
throughout the specified number of A/B output pulses. 5 = “32 Z-Pulses”
Read-Write
No. Display Name Values Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
Arm Latch 10
Options
Arm Latch 9
Arm Latch 8
Arm Latch 7
Arm Latch 6
Arm Latch 5
Arm Latch 4
Arm Latch 3
Arm Latch 2
Arm Latch 1
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
0 = Condition False
Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
1 = Condition True
Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Read-Write
No. Display Name Values
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
5 = “500 ns”
Registration
6 = “600 ns”
7 = “700 ns”
8 = “800 ns”
9 = “900 ns”
10 = “1000 ns”
11 = “1100 ns”
12 = “1200 ns”
13 = “1300 ns”
14 = “1400 ns”
15 = “1500 ns”
93 Rgsn HmIn Filter Default: 0 = “0 ns” RW Real
Registration Home Input Filter Options: 0 = “0 ns”
Configures a digital filter for the home input. This filter can be used to reject spurious 1 = “100 ns”
noise. The filter works by waiting a programmed time before deciding that the signal is 2 = “200 ns”
valid. This waiting imposes a mandatory delay in the registration signal. The filter delay 3 = “300 ns”
is programmable in increments of 100 nanoseconds from 0 (or no delay) up to 1500
nanoseconds. 4 = “400 ns”
5 = “500 ns”
6 = “600 ns”
7 = “700 ns”
8 = “800 ns”
9 = “900 ns”
10 = “1000 ns”
11 = “1100 ns”
12 = “1200 ns”
13 = “1300 ns”
14 = “1400 ns”
15 = “1500 ns”
Read-Write
No. Display Name Values
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
Latch10Armed
Latch10Found
Options
Latch9 Armed
Latch8 Armed
Latch7 Armed
Latch6 Armed
Latch5 Armed
Latch4 Armed
Latch3 Armed
Latch2 Armed
Latch1 Armed
Latch9 Found
Latch8 Found
Latch7 Found
Latch6 Found
Latch5 Found
Latch4 Found
Latch3 Found
Latch2 Found
Latch1 Found
Rgsn Input 1
Rgsn Input 0
Home Input
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 = False
1 = True
100 Rgsn Latch1 Cfg RO 16-bit
103 Rgsn Latch2 Cfg Integer
106 Rgsn Latch3 Cfg
109 Rgsn Latch4 Cfg
112 Rgsn Latch5 Cfg
115 Rgsn Latch6 Cfg
118 Rgsn Latch7 Cfg
121 Rgsn Latch8 Cfg
124 Rgsn Latch9 Cfg
127 Rgsn Latch10 Cfg
Universal Feedback
Stg1EdgeRise
Options
Stg2EdgeFall
Stg1EdgeFall
Fwd Capture
Rev Capture
Logic Sel b1
Logic Sel b0
Channel Sel
Stg2 In b1
Stg2 In b0
Stg1 In b1
Stg1 In b0
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Trigger Stage 1
Bit 4 “Stg1 In b1” Bit 3 “Stg1 In b0” Description
0 0 Registration Input 0 (TB2: -R0, +R0)
0 1 Registration Input 0 (TB2: -R1, +R1)
1 0 Home Input (TB2: -Hm, +Hm)
1 1 Marker Input of respective feedback channel. (Z channel must be activated for
respective feedback channel.)
0 0 Trigger Disabled
Registration
Feedback
Device One
Marker (Z) associated with channel. (Channel 1)
Position One
Read-Write
No. Display Name Values
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
Safe Speed Monitor Module For detailed information on the Safe Speed Monitor option, refer to the Safe
Speed Monitor Option Module for PowerFlex 750-Series AC Drives Safety
Parameters Reference Manual, publication 750-RM001.
Read-Write
No. Display Name Values
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
Resets safety option to factory defaults. 1 = “Reset Fac” (Reset to factory defaults)
10 Signature ID Default: N/A RO 32-bit
Security
Read-Write
No. Display Name Values
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
15 = P39 [Fbk Speed Ratio] value not legal based on P27 [Fbk Mode] value.
16 = P41 [Fbk Pos Tol] value not legal based on P27 [Fbk Mode] value.
Security
17 = P40 [Fbk Speed Tol] value not legal based on P27 [Fbk Mode] value.
18 = P44 [Safe Stop In Typ] value not legal based on P21 [Safety Mode] value.
19 = P52 [Lim Spd In Typ] value not legal based on P21 [Safety Mode] value.
20 = P58 [DM Input Type] value not legal based on P20 [Cascaded Config] and P21
[Safety Mode] value.
21 = P54 [Enable SW In Typ] value not legal based on P21 [Safety Mode] value.
22 = P60 [Lock Mon In Type] value not legal based on P21 [Safety Mode] value and P59
[Lock Mon Enable] value.
23 = Illegal P20 [Cascaded Config] value.
24 = Illegal P22 [Reset Type] value.
25 = Reserved
26 = Illegal P45 [Safe Stop Type] value.
27 = Illegal P51 [Stop Decel Tol] value.
28 = Illegal P27 [Fbk Mode] value.
29 = Illegal P28 [Fbk 1 Type] value.
30 = Illegal P31 [Fbk 1 Resolution] value.
31 = Illegal P32 [Fbk1 Volt Mon] value.
32 = Illegal P37 [Fbk 2 Volt Mon] value.
33 = Illegal P24 [OverSpd Response] value.
34 = Reserved
36 = Unknown Error (Unknown Err).
Read-Write
No. Display Name Values
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
“Slv Safe Stp” (8) - Slave, Safe Stop 10 = “Slv Spd Stat”
General
Read-Write
No. Display Name Values
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
Counts/Revolution.
1…65,535 pulses/revolution or pulses/mm based on rotary or linear configuration
defined by P29 [Fbk 1 Units].
32 Fbk 1 Volt Mon Default: 0 = Voltage not monitored RW 8-bit
Feedback 1 Voltage Monitor Options: 0 = Voltage not monitored Integer
Encoder 1 voltage to be monitored. 5 = 5V +/- 5%
9 = 7…12V
12 = 12V +/- 5%
24 = 24V - 10%…24V + 5%
33 Fbk 1 Speed Units: RPM RO 32-bit
Feedback 1 Speed mm/s Integer
Displays the output speed of encoder 1. Min/Max: -214748364.8 / 214748364.7 RPM
Units based on rotary or linear configuration defined by P29 [Fbk 1 Units]. -214748364.8 / 214748364.7mm/s
34 Fbk 2 Units Default: 0 = “Rev” RW 8-bit
Feedback 2 Units Options: 0 = “Rev” (Rotary) Integer
Selects rotary or linear feedback for encoder 2. 1 = “mm” (Linear)
35 Fbk 2 Polarity Default: 0 = “Normal” RW 8-bit
Feedback 2 Polarity Options: 0 = “Normal” (Same as encoder) Integer
Defines the direction polarity for encoder 2. 1 = “Reversed”
36 Fbk 2 Resolution Default: 0 RW 16-bit
Feedback 2 Resolution Min/Max: 0 / 65535 Integer
Counts/Revolution.
0…65,535 pulses/revolution or pulses/mm based on rotary or linear configuration
defined by P34 [Fbk 2 Units].
Read-Write
No. Display Name Values
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
Acceptable difference in speed between P33 [Fbk 1 Speed] and P38 [Fbk 2 Speed]. Min/Max: 0 / 6553.5 RPM
Units are based on rotary or linear configuration defined by P29 [Fbk 1 Units]. 0 / 6553.5 mm/s
41 Fbk Pos Tol Units: Deg RW 16-bit
Feedback Position Tolerance mm Integer
Acceptable difference in position between encoder 1 and encoder 2. Default: 0
Units are based on rotary or linear configuration defined by P29 [Fbk 1 Units]. Min/Max: 0 / 65535 deg
0 / 65535 mm
42 Direction Mon Default: 0 = “Disable” RW 8-bit
Direction Monitoring Options: 0 = “Disable” Integer
Defines the allowable direction if Safe Direction Monitoring is enabled. 1 = “Pos Always”
“Pos Always” (1) – Positive always 2 = “Neg Always”
“Neg Always” (2) – Negative always 3 = “Pos in SLS”
“Pos in SLS” (3) – Positive during safe limited speed monitoring 4 = “Neg in SLS”
“Neg in SLS” (4) – Negative during safe limited speed monitoring
43 Direction Tol Units: Deg RW 16-bit
Direction Tolerance mm Integer
The position limit in encoder units tolerated in the wrong direction when Safe Direction Default: 10
Monitoring is active. Min/Max: 0 / 65535 deg
Units are based on rotary or linear configuration defined by P29 [Fbk 1 Units]. 0 / 65535 mm
Read-Write
No. Display Name Values
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
Read-Write
No. Display Name Values
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
Read-Write
No. Display Name Values
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
Read-Write
No. Display Name Values
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
“Safe Stp Typ” (1) – Safe Torque Off Without Standstill Checking
64 Max Accel Enable Default: 0 = “Disable” RW 8-bit
Maximum Acceleration Enable Options: 0 = “Disable” Integer
Enable Safe Maximum Acceleration Monitoring. 1 = “Enable”
65 Safe Accel Limit Units: Rev/s2 RW 16-bit
Safe Acceleration Limit mm/s2 Integer
Defines the Safe Maximum Acceleration Limit, relative to encoder 1, for which the Default: 0
system is being monitored. Min/Max: 0 / 65535 rev/s2
Units are based on rotary or linear configuration defined by P29 [Fbk 1 Units]. 0 / 65535 mm/s2
66 Max Acc Stop Typ Default: 0 = “Torque Off” RW 8-bit
Maximum Acceleration Stop Type Options: 0 = “Torque Off” Integer
Defines the safe stop type that will be initiated in the event of an Acceleration Fault. 1 = “Safe Stp Typ”
“Torque Off” (0) – Safe Torque Off With Standstill Checking
“Safe Stp Typ” (1) – Safe Torque Off Without Standstill Checking
Read-Write
No. Display Name Values
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
Combined Flt
Dual Fbk Spd
Door Mon Flt
Reset PwrUp
Options
Invalid Cfg
MP Out Flt
Fbk 2 V Flt
Fbk 1 V Flt
Critical Flt
DC Out Flt
ESM In Flt
SS Out Flt
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
SLS In Flt
DM In Flt
LM In Flt
Decel Flt
Fbk 2 Flt
Fbk 1 Flt
Accel Flt
SS In Flt
Dir Flt
Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Read-Write
No. Display Name Values
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
Wait No Stop
Options
SDM In Prog
SMA In Prog
ESM In Prog
SMS In Prog
Config Lock
SS Stopped
Wait SS Cyc
SLS In Prog
DM In Prog
Wait Reset
SS In Prog
Stop Cmd
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
StatusOK
SLS Cmd
SS Decel
Reset In
SLS Req
DC Lock
SLS Out
MP Out
ESM In
DC Out
SS Req
SS Out
SLS In
DM In
LM In
SS In
Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Read-Write
No. Display Name Values
Data Type
Full Name
Group
Description
File
SLS Out Ch 1
SLS Out Ch 0
MP Out Ch 1
MP Out Ch 0
Options
DC Out Ch 1
DC Out Ch 0
ESM In Ch 1
ESM In Ch 0
SS Out Ch 1
SS Out Ch 0
SLS In Ch 1
SLS In Ch 0
DM In Ch 1
DM In Ch 0
LM In Ch 1
LM In Ch 0
SS In Ch 1
SS In Ch 0
Stop Cmd
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
SLS Cmd
Reset In
Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 = Open
1 = Closed
Bit 0 “SS In Ch 0” – SS_in_ch_0 status
Bit 1 “SS In Ch 1” – SS_in_ch_1 status
Bit 2 “SS Out Ch 0” – SS_out_ch_0 status
Bit 3 “SS Out Ch 1” – SS_out_ch_1 status
Bit 4 “SLS In Ch 0” – SLS_in_ch_0 status
Safe Speed Monitor
Troubleshooting
Type Description
Major This type of fault in an exception event that stops the drive while the drive is active. The drive
goes to the Not Ready state. No faults can be present for the drive to be in the Ready state.
Minor This type of fault is an exception event that does not stop the drive while the drive is active. To
enable the drive from the Drive Not Ready state to the Ready state, the exception must no
longer be present and the fault must be cleared.
Auto Reset Run When this type of fault occurs, and P348 [Auto Rstrt Tries] is set to a value greater than “0,” a
user-configurable timer, P349 [Auto Rstrt Delay] begins. When the timer reaches zero, the
drive attempts to reset the fault automatically. If the condition that caused the fault is no
longer present, the fault is reset and the drive is restarted. A “Y” in the “Auto Reset” column in
Table 10 on page 309 identifies an “Auto Reset Run” fault.
Resettable This type of fault can be cleared. “Resettable Fault” in the “Type” column in Table 10 on page
309 identifies a Resettable fault.
Non-Resettable This type of fault normally requires drive or motor repair. The cause of the fault must be
corrected before the fault can be cleared. The fault will be reset on power-up after repair.
“Non-Reset Fault” in the “Type” column in Table 10 on page 309 identifies a Non-Resettable
fault.
Automatic Drive Reset When this type of fault occurs, the drive resets. “Automatic Drive Reset” in the “Type” column
in Table 10 on page 309 identifies an Automatic Drive Reset fault.
Alarms
An alarm identifies a condition that, if left unaddressed, can stop the drive if
running or prevent the drive from starting. There are two types of alarms.
Type Description
Alarm 1 Alarms of type 1 indicate that a condition exists. Type 1 alarms are configurable.
Alarm 2 Alarms of type 2 indicate that a configuration error exists and the drive cannot be started. Type 2
alarms are non-configurable.
Configurable Conditions
Drive Status Indicators The condition or state of the drive is constantly monitored and is indicated
through the LEDs and/or the HIM (if present).
IMPORTANT The Status Indicator LEDs on the HIM cradle do not indicate the status of an
installed Communication Adapter option. If an optional Communication
Adapter is installed, refer to the option module user manual for a description
of LED location and indication.
The pop-up Fault Display screen automatically appears when a fault condition
for the Host Drive or any connected peripheral is detected. The pop-up Fault
Display screen flashes to alert that a fault condition exists. This screen displays
the:
• Fault Code number (See Fault and Alarm Display Codes on page 308.)
• Fault description
• Elapsed time (in hh:mm:ss format) from fault detection
Stopped AUTO
0.00 Hz F
– – FAULTED – –
Fault Code 81
Port 1 DPI Loss
Elapsed Time 01:26:37
ESC CLR
Power Layer Interface (PLI) PowerFlex 755 Frame 8 and larger drives provide a pair of 7-segment displays to
indicate drive status and conditions.
Board 7-Segment Display
Series A Display
Lit Segment Indication Description
Fault Clear Indicates that a fault condition has been cleared.
PWM Enable IGBT gating is enabled. When disabled, all IGBT signal inputs to the PLI IGBT
driver chip are low. IGBT gating is enabled by setting bit 0 of the Config Register.
IGBT gating is disabled by clearing bit 0 or by “POE” fault (IOC, Bus Overvoltage,
or Ground Fault).
Fiber Loss Fault Turns on when a Fiber Loss fault occurs. A Fiber Loss fault occurs when the LOS
signal is high or when a valid data packet has not been received for 1024 μs. The
fault is latched and is cleared by setting bit 8 of the Config Register. The Fiber
Loss fault inhibits IGBT firing in the same manner as a “POE” fault.
Fiber Loss Pin Indicates that the actual state of the LOS pin described in Write Enable.
SAFE Vcc Power On Power is applied to the PLI IGBT driver chip (U14). Delayed for 12 seconds after
power-up.
Write Enable Data writes from the fiber-optic link are enabled to PLI registers. Data writes are
disabled for ten seconds (time that is required for the Control Board to initialize)
after negation of the LOS pin of the PLI fiber-optic transceiver. LOS is driven high
when the optical power into the fiber-optic receiver is too low (broken, crimped,
disconnected fiber, or transmitter at opposite end of fiber is not operating.
Series B Display
Lit Segment Indication Description
PWM Enable IGBT gating is enabled. IGBT gating is enabled by setting bit 0 of the Config
Register. IGBT gating is disabled by clearing bit 0 or by fault.
Initialization Done Indicates that the control has initialized the PLI board.
Fiber Loss Actual state of the LOS pin. LOS is driven high when the optical power into the
fiber-optic receiver is too low (broken, crimped, disconnected fiber, or
transmitter at opposite end of fiber is not operating.
On Line The PLI is powered.
System Safety Pin 1 of the 541 PLI IGBT driver chip (U14) is low. This pin must be low to fire the
Enable B IGBTs.
Aux Power A 24V auxiliary supply provide power for the PLI board.
Setting Factory Defaults The PowerFlex 20-HIM-A6 / -C6S HIM User Manual, publication 20HIM-
UM001, provides detailed Human Interface Module (HIM) use instructions and
explains the HIM capabilities, including setting PowerFlex 750-Series drive to
factory settings.
The following parameters are not reset when Set Defaults “Most” is executed:
P300 [Speed Units], P301 [Access Level], P302 [Language], P305 [Voltage
Class], P306 [Duty Rating], P471 [PredMaint Rst En], and P472 [PredMaint
Reset].
System Resource Allocation Each option that is installed in the drive requires a percentage of the available
system resources. Some options configurations can exceed the available resources
of the main control board processor. If 90 % of the available system resources is
reached, an F19 Task Overrun alarm results, which indicates that system resource
utilization is excessive.
70 % Internal EtherNet/IP = 10 %
60 %
Communication Option Module = 20 %
50 %
40 %
30 %
Base System Requirement = 40 %
20 %
10 %
Configuration Option
Hardware Service Manual The PowerFlex 750-Series AC Drive Hardware Service Manual, publication 750-
TG001, provides schematics and detailed instructions on part replacement for
Frame 8 drives and larger.
Integrated Motion When a PowerFlex 755 is used in Integrated Motion on EtherNet/IP mode, the
Logix controller and RSLogix 5000® are the exclusive owners of the drive (same as
Applications Kinetix®). A HIM or other drive software tools, such as DriveExplorer™ and
DriveTools™ SP, cannot be used to control the drive or change configuration
settings. These tools can only be used for monitoring.
Fault and Alarm Display Event numbers for PowerFlex 750-Series faults and alarms are displayed in one of
three formats.
Codes
• Port 00 (Host Drive) displays the event number only. For example, Fault 3
“Power Loss” is displayed as:
Fault Code 3.
• Ports 01...09 use the format PEEE, which identifies the port number (P)
and event number (EEE). For example, Fault 1 “Analog In Loss” on an I/O
module that is installed in Port 4 is displayed as:
Fault Code 4001.
• Ports 10...14 use the format PPEEE, which identifies the port number
(PP) and event number (EEE). For example, Fault 37 “Net IO Timeout”
on Port 14 is displayed as:
Fault Code 14037.
Parameter Access Level Three parameter access level options are selectable by P301 [Access Level].
• Option 0 “Basic” is the most limited view that only displays commonly
used parameters and options.
• Option 1 “Advanced” is an expanded view that can be required to access
more advanced drive features.
• Option 2 “Expert” provides a comprehensive view of the entire drive
parameter set.
Drive Fault and Alarm Table 10 contains a list of drive-specific faults and alarms and includes the
following information:
Descriptions
• The fault or alarm type
• The action that is taken when the drive faults
• The parameter that is used to configure the fault or alarm (if applicable)
• A description and action (where applicable)
The faults and alarms that are listed in Table 10 only apply to non-Integrated
Motion applications. See Table 16 on page 527 for a list of Integrated Motion
faults.
24 Decel Inhibit Configurable 409 [Dec Inhibit Actn] The drive is not following a commanded deceleration because it is
attempting to limit the bus voltage.
For high inertia loads, set P621 [Slip RPM at FLA] to 0 (V/Hz and SVC
modes only).
25 OverSpeed Limit Resettable Fault Coast Y The motor operating speed exceeds the limit set by the maximum
speed setting P524 [Overspeed Limit]. For forward motor rotation,
this limit is P520 [Max Fwd Speed] + P524 [Overspeed Limit]. For
reverse motor rotation, this limit is P521 [Max Rev Speed] - P524
[Overspeed Limit]. When flux vector control modes are selected in P35
[Motor Ctrl Mode], P131 [Active Vel Fdbk] determines the motor
operating speed. For all other non-flux vector control modes, P1
[Output Frequency] determines the motor operating speed.
141 Autn Enc Angle Resettable Fault Coast P78 [Encdrlss AngComp] is out of range.
142 Autn Spd Rstrct Resettable Fault Coast Frequency limit settings are preventing the drive from reaching a
suitable speed during an Inertia Tune test.
143 Autotune CurReg Resettable Fault Coast Calculated values for P96 [VCL Cur Reg Kp] and/or P97 [VCL Cur Reg
Ki] are out of range.
144 Autotune Inertia Resettable Fault Coast Results from the Inertia Tune test out of range for P76 [Total Inertia].
145 Autotune Travel Resettable Fault Coast When P77 [Inertia Test Lmt] is set, the Inertia Tune test was prevented
from reaching a suitable speed to run the test.
152 No Stop Source Resettable Fault Coast Last stop source has been removed.
155 Bipolar Conflict Alarm 2 P308 [Direction Mode] is set to 1 “Bipolar” or 2 “Rev Disable” and one
or more digital inputs is enabled for direction control.
157 DigIn Cfg B Alarm 2 Digital input conflict. Input functions that cannot exist
simultaneously have been selected (for example run and start).
Correct Digital Input configuration.
Digital Input combinations marked “•” cause an alarm.
DI Jog 2 Forward
DI Jog 1 Forward
DI Jog 2 Reverse
DI Jog 1 Reverse
DI Fwd Reverse
DI Run Reverse
DI Manual Ctrl
DI Speed Sel 2
DI Speed Sel 1
DI Speed Sel 0
DI Clear Fault
DI Coast Stop
DI HOA Start
DI Aux Fault
DI Decel 2
DI Accel 2
DI Jog 2
DI Jog 1
DI Start
DI Stop
DI Run
DI Stop
DI Coast Stop
DI Cur Lmt Stop
DI Aux Fault • •
DI Clear Fault •
DI HOA Start • • • • • • • • • •
DI Start • • • • • • • • •
DI Run • • • • • • • •
DI Run Forward • • • • • •
DI Run Reverse • • • • • •
DI Jog 1 • • • • • •
DI Jog 1 Forward • • • • • •
DI Jog 1 Reverse • • • • • •
DI Jog 2 • • • • • •
DI Jog 2 Forward • • • • • •
DI Jog 2 Reverse • • • • • •
DI Fwd Reverse • • • • • •
DI Accel 2
DI Decel 2
DI Manual Ctrl
DI Speed Sel 0
DI Speed Sel 1
DI Speed Sel 2
DI Stop Mode B
DI Jog 2 Forward
DI Jog 1 Forward
DI Jog 2 Reverse
DI Jog 1 Reverse
DI Fwd Reverse
DI Run Reverse
DI Manual Ctrl
DI Speed Sel 2
DI Speed Sel 1
DI Speed Sel 0
DI Clear Fault
DI Coast Stop
DI HOA Start
DI Aux Fault
DI Decel 2
DI Accel 2
DI Jog 2
DI Jog 1
DI Start
DI Stop
DI Run
DI Stop • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
DI Coast Stop • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
DI Cur Lmt Stop • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
DI Aux Fault • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
DI Clear Fault • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
DI HOA Start • • • • • • • • • • • •
DI Start • • • • • • • • • • • •
DI Run • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
DI Run Forward • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
DI Run Reverse • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
DI Jog 1 • • • • • • • • • • •
DI Jog 1 Forward • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
DI Jog 1 Reverse • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
DI Jog 2 • • • • • • • • • • •
DI Jog 2 Forward • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
DI Jog 2 Reverse • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
DI Fwd Reverse • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
DI Accel 2 • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
DI Decel 2 • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
DI Manual Ctrl • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
DI Speed Sel 0 • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
DI Speed Sel 1 • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
DI Speed Sel 2 • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
DI Stop Mode B
161 Sleep Config Alarm 2 There is a Sleep/Wake configuration error. With Sleep Wake Mode =
Direct, possible causes include:
Drive is stopped and Wake Level < Sleep Level.
Stop=CF, Run, Run Fwd, or Run Rev is not configured in Digital Input
functions.
162 Waking Alarm 1 The Wake timer is counting toward a value that starts the drive.
168 HeatSinkUnderTmp Resettable Fault Heatsink temperature sensor is reporting a value below -18.7 °C (-
1.66 °F) or the sensor feedback circuit is open.
See P943 [Drive Temp Pct] and/or P944 [Drive Temp C].
169 PWM Freq Reduced Alarm 1 The PWM Frequency has been reduced from the value set in P38
[PWM Frequency] due to excessive IGBT junction temperatures.
See also P420 [Drive OL Mode].
170 CurLimit Reduced Alarm 1 The current limit value has been reduced from the value set in
[Current Limit n] due to excessive IGBT junction temperatures or P940
[Drive OL Count] = 95 %.
See also P420 [Drive OL Mode].
357 In Vlt Imbal L12 Alarm 1 There is an input line voltage imbalance between parallel converters
358 In Vlt Imbal L23 in the AC lines indicated that is greater than 5 % of the converter rated
359 In Vlt Imbal L31 voltage.
360 N-1 See Manual Resettable Fault Coast The number of active inverters has been reduced from the original
parallel configuration.
See N-1 and Re-Rate Functions on page 337.
361 Rerate See Manual Resettable Fault Coast The drive rating has changed from the original parallel configuration.
See N-1 and Re-Rate Functions on page 337.
362 Cnv/Inv Mismatch Alarm 2 There is a voltage class mismatch between the installed parallel
inverters and converters.
363 CBP/Inv Mismatch Alarm 2 There is a voltage class mismatch between the installed parallel
inverters and common DC bus precharge units.
364 CBP Num Mismatch Alarm 2 The number of active inverters and active common DC bus precharge
units does not match.
365 Zero Cnv/Prechrg Alarm 2 No converter or common DC bus precharge unit exists.
366 Cnv Num Mismatch Alarm 2 The number of active inverters and active converters does not match.
371 P1 Comm Loss Resettable Fault Coast A communications fault has occurred between the main control board
372 P2 Comm Loss and the DC precharge control board on the common DC bus precharge
unit n.
380 PWM FPGA Overrun Alarm 1 The time limit on the PWM write to the FPGA was exceeded.
900 900 Automatic Drive Coast Critical input exception.
Reset Contact technical support.
901 Machine Check Automatic Drive Coast Internal error.
Reset Replace the main control board.
902 Data Storage Error Automatic Drive Coast Cache memory corrupt.
Reset Replace the main control board.
903 Instruction Storage Error Automatic Drive Coast Cache memory corrupt.
Reset Replace the main control board.
905 Alignment Error Automatic Drive Coast Pointer is pointing to a non-boundary member.
Reset Obtain test points and check grounding.
906 Program Error Automatic Drive Coast Bad memory read.
Reset Check grounding or replace the main control board.
IMPORTANT A module installed in a port generate fault and alarm event numbers 3000…13999. See Fault and Alarm Display Codes on
page 308 for an explanation. For event numbers that fall from 13000 to 13999, refer to the PowerFlex 755 Drive Embedded
EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual, publication 750COM-UM001 for descriptions.
Inverter (Port 10) Faults and Table 12 contains a list of Inverter-specific faults and alarms, the type of fault or
alarm, the action that is taken when the drive faults, the parameter that is used to
Alarms (Frame 8 and Larger) configure the fault or alarm (if applicable), and a description and action (where
applicable). These faults and alarms only apply to Frame 8 drives and larger.
• Verify that the fiber optic cables are properly connected to the
transceivers.
• Verify that the transceivers are properly seated in the ports.
• Verify that the fiber optic cable is not cracked or broken.
• Verify that power is applied to the fiber optic interface board and
power layer interface board.
10102 I1 Thermal Const Non-Reset Coast The thermal model data sent to the power layer interface board is
10202 I2 Thermal Const Fault incorrect.
10302 I3 Thermal Const • Verify that the inverter is the correct rating for the drive.
• Compare the firmware revisions of the power layer interface and
control board for compatibility.
• If necessary, reflash the application firmware in control board.
10103 I1 HSFan Slow Alarm 1 The inverter heatsink fan is running below normal operating speed.
10203 I2 HSFan Slow • Verify the actual fan speed in [In HSFan Speed] (Port 10).
10303 I3 HSFan Slow • Check for debris in the fan. If necessary, clean the fan and housing.
• Check for noise at the fan, indicating motor bearing failure.
• Verify that the fan power and feedback connections are not loose or
disconnected.
• Replace the fan, if necessary.
Converter (Port 11) Faults Table 13 contains a list of Converter-specific faults and alarms, the type of fault
or alarm, the action that is taken when the drive faults, the parameter that is used
and Alarms (Frame 8 and to configure the fault or alarm (if applicable), and a description and action (where
Larger) applicable). These faults and alarms only apply to Frame 8 drives and larger.
• Verify that the fiber optic cables are properly connected to the
transceivers.
• Verify that the transceivers are properly seated in the ports.
• Verify that the fiber optic cable is not cracked or broken.
• Verify that power is applied to the fiber optic interface board, gate
firing board, and power layer interface board. If necessary, replace
the fiber optic interface, gate firing board, and/or power layer
interface board.
11143 C1 Firmware Flt Non-Reset Coast A firmware fault has occurred.
11243 C2 Firmware Flt Fault • Reset the drive. If this fault persists, replace the converter gate firing
11343 C3 Firmware Flt board.
11144 C1 DC Bus Open Non-Reset Coast The DC bus voltage did not rise above 12V (for 400V class drives) or 20V
11244 C2 DC Bus Open Fault (for 600V class drives) as the SCRs began to ramp on. In this case, the
11344 C3 DC Bus Open converter tries to turn on the SCRs for approximately 10 seconds before
issuing this fault. Event 101/201 “Cn Precharge” is issued following the
first retry.
• Verify that the current transducers have not all failed. If necessary,
replace all three current transducers.
• Verify that the DC link inductor has not failed. If necessary, replace
the DC link choke.
• Verify that the converter line and DC bus wiring is connected.
• Verify that the capacitor bank is properly installed and connected.
11145 C1 DC Bus Short Non-Reset Coast The peak current has exceeded 150 % of the converter rating during the
11245 C2 DC Bus Short Fault precharge sequence. Peak charging current is normally limited to 50 %
11345 C3 DC Bus Short of the converter rating.
• Check for a DC bus short, internally and externally.
• Verify that the wiring harness to P10 on the converter gate firing
board is connected and not damaged. Replace the harness as
necessary.
• Verify that the capacitor bank is properly installed and connected.
• Check for an IGBT short and replace as necessary.
11146 C1 CT Harness Non-Reset Coast A current transducer (CT) wiring harness connection loss has been
11246 C2 CT Harness Fault detected.
11346 C3 CT Harness • Verify that the CT wiring harness is not damaged and is connected to
P6 on the converter gate firing board. Replace the wiring harness if
necessary.
• If this problem persists, replace the converter gate firing board.
11147 C1 LFuse Harness Non-Reset Coast A line-fuse wiring harness connection loss has been detected.
11247 C2 LFuse Harness Fault • Verify that the line fuse wiring harness is not damaged and is
11347 C3 LFuse Harness connected to P7 on the converter gate firing board. Replace the
wiring harness if necessary.
• If this problem persists, replace the converter gate firing board.
Precharge (Port 11) Faults Table 14 contains a list of Precharge-specific faults and alarms, the type of fault or
alarm, the action that is taken when the drive faults, the parameter that is used to
and Alarms (Frame 8 and configure the fault or alarm (if applicable), and a description and action (where
Larger) applicable). These faults and alarms only apply to Frame 8 drives and larger.
11133 P1 MCS Closed Resettable Coast The voltage across the molded case switch (MCS) when it was closed
11233 P2 MCS Closed Fault exceeded 10V.
11333 P3 MCS Closed
• Verify that the fiber optic cables are properly connected to the
transceivers.
• Verify that the transceivers are properly seated in the ports.
• Verify that the fiber optic cable is not cracked or broken.
• Verify that power is applied to the fiber optic interface board, gate
firing board, and power layer interface board. If necessary, replace
the fiber optic interface, gate firing board, and/or power layer
interface board.
11143 P1 Firmware Flt Non-Reset Coast A firmware fault has occurred.
11243 P2 Firmware Flt Fault • Reset the drive. If this fault persists, replace the converter gate firing
11343 P3 Firmware Flt board.
11145 P1 DC Bus Short Non-Reset Coast The peak current has exceeded 150 % of the converter rating during the
11245 P2 DC Bus Short Fault precharge sequence. Peak charging current is normally limited to 50 %
11345 P3 DC Bus Short of the converter rating.
• Check for a DC bus short, internally and externally.
• Verify that the wiring harness to P10 on the converter gate firing
board is connected and not damaged. Replace the harness as
necessary.
• Verify that the capacitor bank is properly installed and connected.
• Check for an IGBT short and replace as necessary.
11157 P1 BFuse Harness Non-Reset Coast A bus-fuse wiring harness connection loss has been detected.
11257 P2 BFuse Harness Fault • Check the bus fuse harness and replace if necessary.
11357 P3 BFuse Harness • If this problem persists, replace the converter gate firing board.
N-1 and Re-Rate Functions The N-1 feature is available on Frame 9 and larger drives. This feature allows the
drive to be run at reduced current limits if one of the paralleled inverter/
converter drive assemblies fails.
The letter N represents the number of drive assemblies in the drive. For example,
a frame 9 drive has two drive assemblies, therefore N=2. A Frame 9 drive running
the N-1 feature is running on one drive assembly, that is, N-1 =1.
The N-1 feature does not change the rating of the drive. It is a way to impose
temporary output restrictions on the drive until the damaged inverter/converter
drive assembly is repaired and reinstalled. Some customers can elect to oversize
their drives, to have redundant inverter/converter assemblies.
The Re-Rate function allows the rating of the drive to be changed. This
procedure is used when making long-term changes.
This procedure describes how to use the N-1 feature to run the drive at reduced
limits because an inverter/converter assembly has failed.
IMPORTANT You cannot flash update a drive that is using the N-1 feature.
For information on assembly removal and general safety precautions that are
related to AC input and Common DC input PowerFlex 755 drives, refer to the
PowerFlex 750-Series AC Drives Installation Instructions, publication 750-
IN001.
The control pod can need to be moved from the disabled drive assembly to
one of the remaining drive assemblies. See the PowerFlex 750-Series AC
Drives Hardware Service Manual, publication 750-TG001.
3. Energize the drive.
With the drive assembly removed, an F360 “N-1 See Manual” fault is
indicated.
4. Verify the new rating shown in Port 10, P21 [Effctv I Rating].
Alarm 322 “N-1 Operation” is indicated, and persists, while the drive is in
this reconfigured state.
6. Run the reconfigured drive with reduced current and power limits.
This procedure describes how to use the Re-Rate feature to run the drive at a
reduced rating because a drive assembly has been removed.
1. Save the drive current parameter settings by using the Human Interface
Module (HIM), DriveExecutive™, or DriveExplorer™.
2. Remove all incoming power to the drive.
3. Disconnect all fiber-optic cables from the fiber interface board, including
the connections to the drive assemblies not removed.
4. Remove the selected drive assembly from the cabinet.
5. Energize the drive.
With all fiber-optic cables disconnected, “No Inverters” and “No
Converters” port verification errors are indicated.
6. On the HIM, press FIX to acknowledge the error then Enter to confirm.
7. Remove all incoming power to the drive. Verify that the bus capacitors
have discharged before continuing.
8. Reconnect the fiber-optic cables to the fiber interface board.
9. Energize the drive.
With the drive assembly removed, a “One Inverter” port verification error
is indicated.
10. On the HIM, press FIX to acknowledge the error then Enter to confirm.
An F361 “Rerate See Manual” fault is indicated.
11. Verify the new rating shown in Port 10, P21 [Effctv I Rating].
Set Port 10, P20 [Recfg Acknowledg] to 1 “Acknowledge” to accept the
reconfiguration.
IMPORTANT Drive parameters are set to factory defaults when the new rating is
acknowledged. If a condition exists that does not allow the drive
parameters to be set to factory defaults, setting P20 to 1
“Acknowledge” is not accepted. Such conditions include the drive is
running, DeviceLogix is running, or the drive is communicating with a
PLC.
12. To clear the fault, press the Stop key on the HIM.
P20 [Recfg Acknowledg] automatically returns to 0 “Ready.”
13. Use the HIM download function, DriveExecutive download function, or
DriveExplorer download function to download the parameter settings
saved in Step1.
IMPORTANT Do not use the Compare Screen Copy function in DriveExecutive or the
Error Check Download function in DriveExplorer to perform this step.
14. Run the reconfigured drive at the reduced rating and power limits.
This procedure describes how to use the Re-Rate feature to increase the drive
rating because a drive assembly has been added. For example, a drive assembly has
been repaired and is being reinstalled. Because the drive was Re-Rated when the
drive assembly was removed, it must be re-rated again to run at full rating and
power limits.
1. Save the drive current parameter settings by using the Human Interface
Module (HIM), DriveExecutive, or DriveExplorer.
2. Remove all incoming power to the drive.
3. Add the drive assembly to the drive and connect it to the fiber interface
board in consecutive order.
IMPORTANT Do not use the Compare Screen Copy function in DriveExecutive or the
Error Check Download function in DriveExplorer to perform this step.
9. Run the drive at the full rating and full power limits.
Embedded EtherNet/IP (Port The adapter has an event queue to record significant events that occur in the
operation of the adapter. When such an event occurs, an entry consisting of the
13) Events event numeric code and a timestamp is put into the event queue. You can view the
event queue by using the PowerFlex 20-HIM-A6/-C6S HIM, DriveExplorer
software (version 6.01 or later), DriveExecutive software (version 5.01 or later),
or other clients by using the DPI Fault object. For details on how to view and
clear events by using the HIM, see the PowerFlex 20-HIM-A6/-C6S HIM
(Human Interface Module) User Manual, publication 20HIM-UM001.
Many events in the event queue occur under normal operation. If you encounter
unexpected communications problems, the events can help you or Rockwell
Automation personnel troubleshoot the problem. The following events can
appear in the event queue.
I/O Faults and Alarms Table 18 contains a list of I/O-specific faults and alarms, the type of fault or
alarm, the action that is taken when the drive faults, the parameter that is used to
configure the fault or alarm (if applicable), and a description and action (where
applicable).
Safe Torque Off Fault Table 19 lists the safe torque off-specific fault, the action taken when the drive
faults, and its description.
Table 19 - Safe Torque Fault and Alarm Types, Descriptions, and Actions
Event Fault/Alarm Text Type Fault Configuration Auto Description/Action(s)
No. (1) Action Parameter Reset
xx000 No Entry
xx058 Module Defaulted Fault Coast Module was commanded to write default values.
(1) xx indicates the port number. See Fault and Alarm Display Codes on page 308 for an explanation.
ATEX Faults Table 20 lists the ATEX-specific fault, the action taken when the drive faults, and
its description.
Single Incremental Encoder Table 21 contains a list of encoder-specific faults and alarms, the type of fault or
alarm, the action that is taken when the drive faults, the parameter that is used to
Faults and Alarms configure the fault or alarm (if applicable), and a description and action (where
applicable).
Table 21 - Single Incremental Encoder Fault and Alarm Types, Descriptions, and Actions
Event Fault/Alarm Text Type Fault Configuration Auto Description/Action(s)
No. (1) Action Parameter Reset
xx000 Open Wire Configurable P3 The encoder module has detected an input signal (A, B, or Z) in the same
[Fdbk Loss Cfg] state as its complement (A Not, B Not, or Z Not). For open wire detection
to work, the encoder signals must be differential (not single ended). The
Z channel is only checked when enabled. See P1 [Encoder Cfg].
xx001 Phase Loss Configurable P3 More than 30-phase loss (open wire) events have occurred over an 8
[Fdbk Loss Cfg] millisecond time period. The same restrictions as for Open Wire
detection apply.
xx002 Quadrature Loss Configurable P3 Quadrature loss events occur when simultaneous edge transitions occur
[Fdbk Loss Cfg] on both the A and B encoder channels. This fault occurs when more than
10 quad loss events over a 10 millisecond time period are detected. Only
valid when both A and B channels are used (not Bit 1 “A Chan Only”) in
P1 [Encoder Cfg].
xx058 Module Defaulted Fault Coast Module was commanded to write default values.
(1) xx indicates the port number. See Fault and Alarm Display Codes on page 308 for an explanation.
Dual Incremental Encoder Table 22 contains a list of encoder-specific faults and alarms, the type of fault or
alarm, the action that is taken when the drive faults, the parameter that is used to
Faults and Alarms configure the fault or alarm (if applicable), and a description and action (where
applicable).
Table 22 - Dual Incremental Encoder Fault and Alarm Types, Descriptions, and Actions
Event Fault/Alarm Text Type Fault Configuration Auto Description/Action(s)
No. (1) Action Parameter Reset
xx000 Enc0 Open Wire Configurable P3 The dual encoder module has detected an encoder 0 input signal (A, B,
[Enc 0 FB Lss Cfg] or Z) in the same state as its complement (A Not, B Not, or Z Not). For
open wire detection to work, the encoder signals must be differential
(not single ended). The Z channel is only checked when enabled. See P1
[Enc 0 Cfg].
xx001 Enc0 Phase Loss Configurable P3 More than 30 encoder 0 phase loss (open wire) events have occurred
[Enc 0 FB Lss Cfg] over an 8 millisecond time period. The same restrictions as for Enc0
Open Wire detection apply.
xx002 Enc0 Quad Loss Configurable P3 Encoder 0 Quadrature loss events occur when simultaneous edge
[Enc 0 FB Lss Cfg] transitions occur on both the A and B channels of encoder 0. This fault
occurs when more than 10 quad loss events over a 10 millisecond time
period are detected. Only valid when both A and B channels are used
(not Bit 1 “A Chan Only”) in P1 [Enc 0 Cfg].
xx030 Enc1 Open Wire Configurable P13 The dual encoder module has detected an encoder 1 input signal (A, B,
[Enc 1 FB Lss Cfg] or Z) in the same state as its complement (A Not, B Not, or Z Not). For
open wire detection to work, the encoder signals must be differential
(not single ended). The Z channel is only checked when enabled. See
P11 [Enc 1 Cfg].
xx031 Enc1 Phase Loss Configurable P13 More than 30 encoder 1 phase loss (open wire) events have occurred
[Enc 1 FB Lss Cfg] over an 8 millisecond time period. The same restrictions as for Enc1
Open Wire detection apply.
xx032 Enc1 Quad Loss Configurable P13 Encoder 1 Quadrature loss events occur when simultaneous edge
[Enc 1 FB Lss Cfg] transitions occur on both the A and B channels of encoder 1. This fault
occurs when more than 10 quad loss events over a 10 millisecond time
period are detected. Only valid when both A and B channels are used
(not Bit 1 “A Chan Only”) in P11 [Enc 1 Cfg].
xx058 Module Defaulted Fault Coast Module was commanded to write default values.
(1) xx indicates the port number. See Fault and Alarm Display Codes on page 308 for an explanation.
Universal Feedback Faults Table 23 contains a list of universal feedback-specific faults and alarms, the type
of fault or alarm, the action that is taken when the drive faults, the parameter that
and Alarms is used to configure the fault or alarm (if applicable), and a description and action
(where applicable).
Table 23 - Universal Feedback Fault and Alarm Types, Descriptions, and Actions
Event Fault/Alarm Text Type Fault Configuration Param Auto Description
No. (1) Action Reset
xx000 LightSrc Err Configurable P9 Error reported by Heidenhain Encoder on Channel 0 with EnDat Interface
[FB0 Loss Cfg] - Light source failure
xx001 Ch0 SigAmp Err Configurable P9 Error reported by Heidenhain Encoder on Channel 0 with EnDat Interface
[FB0 Loss Cfg] -Signal amplitude error
xx002 Ch0 PsnVal Err Configurable P9 Error reported by Heidenhain Encoder on Channel 0 with EnDat Interface
[FB0 Loss Cfg] - Position value error
xx003 Ch0 OverVolt Err Configurable P9 Error reported by Heidenhain Encoder on Channel 0 with EnDat Interface
[FB0 Loss Cfg] - Overvoltage error
xx004 Ch0 UndVolt Err Configurable P9 Error reported by Heidenhain Encoder on Channel 0 with EnDat Interface
[FB0 Loss Cfg] - Undervoltage error
xx005 Ch0 OverCur Err Configurable P9 Error reported by Heidenhain Encoder on Channel 0 with EnDat Interface
[FB0 Loss Cfg] - Overcurrent error
xx006 Ch0 Battery Err Configurable P9 Error reported by Heidenhain Encoder on Channel 0 with EnDat Interface
[FB0 Loss Cfg] - Battery empty
xx009 Ch0 AnalSig Err Configurable P9 Error reported by Stegmann Encoder on Channel 0 with Hiperface
[FB0 Loss Cfg] Interface - Analog signals outside specification
xx010 Ch0 IntOfst Err Configurable P9 Error reported by Stegmann Encoder on Channel 0 with Hiperface
[FB0 Loss Cfg] Interface - Faulty internal angular offset
xx011 Ch0 DataTabl Err Configurable P9 Error reported by Stegmann Encoder on Channel 0 with Hiperface
[FB0 Loss Cfg] Interface - Data field partitioning table damaged
xx012 Ch0 AnalLim Err Configurable P9 Error reported by Stegmann Encoder on Channel 0 with Hiperface
[FB0 Loss Cfg] Interface - Analog limit values not available
xx013 Ch0 Int I2C Err Configurable P9 Error reported by Stegmann Encoder on Channel 0 with Hiperface
[FB0 Loss Cfg] Interface - Internal I2C bus not operational
xx014 Ch0 IntChksm Err Configurable P9 Error reported by Stegmann Encoder on Channel 0 with Hiperface
[FB0 Loss Cfg] Interface - Internal checksum error
xx015 Ch0 PrgmResetErr Configurable P9 Error reported by Stegmann Encoder on Channel 0 with Hiperface
[FB0 Loss Cfg] Interface - Encoder reset occurred as a result of program monitoring
xx016 Ch0 CntOvrflwErr Configurable P9 Error reported by Stegmann Encoder on Channel 0 with Hiperface
[FB0 Loss Cfg] Interface - Counter overflow
xx017 Ch0 Parity Err Configurable P9 Error reported by Stegmann Encoder on Channel 0 with Hiperface
[FB0 Loss Cfg] Interface - Parity error
xx018 Ch0 Chksum Err Configurable P9 Error reported by Stegmann Encoder on Channel 0 with Hiperface
[FB0 Loss Cfg] Interface - Checksum of the data that are transmitted is incorrect
xx019 Ch0 InvCmd Err Configurable P9 Error reported by Stegmann Encoder on Channel 0 with Hiperface
[FB0 Loss Cfg] Interface - Unknown command code
xx020 Ch0 SendSize Err Configurable P9 Error reported by Stegmann Encoder on Channel 0 with Hiperface
[FB0 Loss Cfg] Interface - Number of data that are transmitted is incorrect
xx021 Ch0 CmdArgmt Err Configurable P9 Error reported by Stegmann Encoder on Channel 0 with Hiperface
[FB0 Loss Cfg] Interface - Command argument that is transmitted is not allowed
xx022 Ch0 InvWrtAdrErr Configurable P9 Error reported by Stegmann Encoder on Channel 0 with Hiperface
[FB0 Loss Cfg] Interface - The selected data field must not be written to (invalid write
address)
Port Verification When connecting to select devices, such as PowerFlex 750-Series drives, the Port
Verification dialog box displays if device conflicts are found during the
connection process. These conflicts typically require resolution before the
connection is established with the device.
The information and options available in this dialog box are detailed here:
Item Description
Previous Setup Identifies the device that was previously installed at this port.
Current Setup Identifies the device that is currently installed at the port (if applicable).
(Device Not Found) A message identifying the conflict at the identified port.
Changed Indicates that the device previously installed at the port that is identified has
been removed or changed to another device.
Not supported - Must remove device Indicates that the device currently installed at the port that is identified has a
before connection firmware revision that is not compatible with the drive. The drive must be flash
updated to be able to use this device or the device must be removed from the
port before a connection can be made.
Not functioning - Must remove Indicates that the device currently installed at the port that is identified is not
device before connection functioning. The device must be removed from the port before a connection can
be made.
Invalid Duplicate - Must remove Indicates that the device currently installed at the port that is identified is
device before connection already installed at another port for the device to which you are attempting to
connect and the device cannot support the number of devices installed. The
duplicate device must be removed from the port before a connection can be
made.
Requires Configuration Indicates that the device installed at the port that is identified requires
configuration before a connection can be made.
Accept All Accepts all configuration changes and continues the device connection process.
Cancel Cancels the device connection process.
Common Symptoms and Drive does not Start from Start or Run Inputs wired to the terminal block.
Corrective Actions Cause(s) Indication Corrective Action
Drive is Faulted Flashing red Clear fault.
status light • Press Stop
• Cycle power
• “Clear Faults” on the HIM Diagnostic
menu.
Incorrect input wiring. See Installation Instructions, None Wire inputs correctly.
publication 750-IN001, for wiring examples.
• 2 wire control requires Run, Run Forward, Run
Reverse or Jog input.
• 3 wire control requires Start and Stop inputs.
• Verify 24 Volt Common is connected to Digital
Input Common.
Incorrect digital input programming. None Configure input function.
• Mutually exclusive choices have been made (i.e.,
Jog and Jog Forward). Flashing yellow Resolve input function conflicts.
• 2 wire and 3 wire programming may be status light and
conflicting. “DigIn Cnfg B”
• Start configured without a Stop configured. or
“DigIn Cnfg C”
indication on LCD
HIM.
P936 [Drive Status
2] shows type 2
alarm(s).
Terminal block does not have control. None Check P324 [Logic Mask].
PowerFlex 755 Lifting/ Review the Attention statement that follows if you intend to use the TorqProve™
feature without an encoder. TorqProve only applies to PowerFlex 755 drives.
Torque Proving
ATTENTION: You must read the following information before you can use
TorqProve with no encoder.
Encoderless TorqProve must be limited to lifting applications where personal safety
is not a concern. Encoders offer additional protection and must be used where
personal safety is a concern. Encoderless TorqProve cannot hold a load at zero speed
without a mechanical brake and does not offer additional protection if the brake
slips/fails. Loss of control in suspended load applications can cause personal injury
and/or equipment damage.
It is your responsibility to configure drive parameters, test any lifting functionality
and meet safety requirements in accordance with all applicable codes and
standards. If encoderless TorqProve is desired, you must certify the safety of the
application. To acknowledge that you have read this “Attention” and properly
certified their encoderless application, bit 3 (“EnclsTrqProv”) of [Mtr Options Cfg],
parameter 40 must be changed to a “1.” This action removes Alarm 28, “TP Encls
Config” and allow bit 1 of Parameter 1100 to be changed to a “1” enabling
encoderless TorqProve.
External Brake Resistor ATTENTION: The drive does not offer protection for externally mounted brake
resistors. A risk of fire exists if external braking resistors are not protected.
External resistor packages must be self-protected from over temperature or a
circuit equivalent to the one shown here must be supplied.
Three-Phase
AC Input Power Off Power On
(Input Contactor) M
M
R (L1) M
S (L2)
T (L3) Power Source DB Resistor Thermostat
This circuit is designed to remove input voltage to the drive if the line voltage is
high and forces dynamic braking to operate continuously.
Technical Support Options What You Need When You Call Tech Support
To run a Tech Support wizard in DriveExplorer, select Wizards from the Actions
menu. In DriveExecutive, select Wizards from the Tools menu. Or, click the
button. Follow the prompts to complete the wizard.
IMPORTANT The Tech Support wizard cannot be accessed when the Control Bar is launched.
The block diagrams in this appendix are applicable to firmware revision 11.002
and earlier only.
Flow diagrams on the following pages illustrate the PowerFlex 753 drive control
algorithms.
Diagram Page
Flux Vector Overview 361
VF, SV Overview 362
Speed/Position Feedback 363
Speed Control - Reference Overview 364
Speed Control - Reference (1) 365
Speed Control - Reference (2) 366
Speed Control - Reference (3) 367
Speed Control - Reference (4) 368
Speed Control - Reference (5) 369
Speed Control - Regulator (FV) 370
Position Control - Reference 371
Position Control - Regulator 372
Position Control - Aux Functions 373
Position Control - Homing 374
Torque Control - Overview (IM) 375
Torque Control - Overview (IPM) 376
Torque Control - Reference Scale & Trim 377
Torque Control - Torque 378
Torque Control - Current (IM) 379
Torque Control - Current (IPM) 380
Process Control (1) 381
Process Control (2) 382
MOP Control 383
Embedded Inputs & Outputs - Digital 384
Embedded Inputs & Outputs - Analog 385
22-Series Option Inputs & Outputs - Digital 386
22-Series Option Inputs & Outputs - Analog 387
11-Series Inputs & Outputs - Digital 388
11-Series Inputs & Outputs - Analog 389
11-Series Inputs & Outputs - ATEX 390
Control Logic 391
Inverter Overload IT 392
Variable Boost Voltage Overview 393
Symbol Legend: (1) These diagrams are for reference only and may
Drive Option Module Requires port number. not accurately reflect all logical control signals;
Parameters Parameters
actual functionality is implied by the approximated
Read Only Parameter diagrams. Accuracy of these diagrams is not
guaranteed.
Read / Write Parameter
Read Only Parameter with Bit Enumeration
Read / Write Parameter with Bit Enumeration
Notes:
The block diagrams in this appendix are applicable to firmware revision 11.002
and earlier only.
Flow diagrams on the following pages illustrate the PowerFlex® 755 drive
control algorithms.
Diagram Page
Flux Vector Overview 397
VF, SV Overview 398
Speed/Position Feedback 399
Speed Control - Reference Overview 400
Speed Control - Reference (1) 401
Speed Control - Reference (2) 402
Speed Control - Reference (3) 403
Speed Control - Reference (4) 404
Speed Control - Reference (5) 405
Speed Control - Regulator (FV) 406
Position Control - Reference 407
Position Control - Regulator 408
Position Control - Aux Functions 409
Position Control - Phase Locked Loop 410
Position Control - Position CAM 411
Position Control - Profiler/Indexer (1) 412
Position Control - Profiler/Indexer (2), Homing 413
Position Control / Auxiliary Functions - Roll Position Indicator 414
Position Control - Spindle Orientation 415
Position Control / Auxiliary Functions - Position Oriented Torque Boost 416
Torque Control - Overview (IM & SPM) 417
Torque Control - Overview (IPM) 418
Torque Control - Reference Scale & Trim 419
Torque Control - Torque 420
Torque Control - Current (IM & SPM) 421
Torque Control - Current (IPM) 422
Torque Control - Inertia Adaption 423
Torque Control - Load Observer / Estimator 424
Process Control (1) 425
Process Control (2) 426
MOP Control 427
22-Series Inputs & Outputs - Digital 428
22-Series Inputs & Outputs - Analog 429
11-Series Inputs & Outputs - Digital 430
11-Series Inputs & Outputs - Analog 431
Diagram Page
11-Series Inputs & Outputs - ATEX 432
Control Logic 433
Inverter Overload IT 434
Friction Compensation 435
Variable Boost Voltage Overview - Function Inputs/Outputs 436
Diagnostic Tools 437
High-Speed Trend Wizard 438
Symbol Legend: (1) These diagrams are for reference only and may
Drive Option Module Requires port number. not accurately reflect all logical control signals;
Parameters Parameters
actual functionality is implied by the approximated
Read Only Parameter diagrams. Accuracy of these diagrams is not
guaranteed.
Read / Write Parameter
Read Only Parameter with Bit Enumeration
Read / Write Parameter with Bit Enumeration
Application Notes
Voltage Tolerance Drive Rating Nominal Line Nominal Motor Drive Full Power Drive Operating
Voltage Voltage Range Range
380…400 380 380 380…528 342…528
400 400 400…528
480 460 460…528
Drive Full Power Range = Nominal Motor Voltage to Drive Rated Voltage 10 %.
Rated current is available across the entire Drive Full Power Range
Drive Operating Range = Lowest Nominal Motor Voltage - 10 % to Drive Rated Voltage 10 %.
Drive Output is linearly derated when Actual Line Voltage is less than the Nominal
Motor Voltage
Hp @ Motor (Drive Output)
Example:
At 342V Actual Line Voltage, the maximum power the 5 Hp, 460V motor can
produce is 3.7 Hp at 44.6 Hz.
5 Hp
Hp @ Motor (Drive Output)
3.7 Hp
No Drive
Output
342V 480V
460V 528V
Actual Line Voltage (Drive Input)
PowerFlex 755 Lifting/ TorqProve™ is a PowerFlex® 755 drive feature that is intended for applications
where proper coordination between motor control and a mechanical brake is
Torque Proving required. Before releasing a mechanical brake, the drive checks motor output
phase continuity and verify proper motor control (torque proving). The drive
also verifies that the mechanical brake has control of the load before the releasing
drive control (brake proving). After the drive sets the brake, motor movement is
monitored to ensure the brake can hold the load.
IMPORTANT Brake Slip detection and Float capability (ability to hold load at zero speed) are
not available in encoderless TorqProve.
All times between Drive Actions are programmable and can be made very small
(i.e. Brake Release Time can be 0.1 seconds)
(1) For torque proving to function properly, wire a mechanical brake to a Brake
Relay
relay output on a digital I/O option module. On the I/O module, set P10
R0NO
[RO0 Sel] to Port 0, P1103 [Trq Prove Status] Bit 4 “Brake Set” and set R0C
P6 [Dig Out Invert] Bit 0 “Relay Out 0” = 1.
Control
Voltage
It is possible to use the Start-Up routine to tune the motor (See page 17).
However, it is recommended to disconnect the motor from the hoist/crane
equipment during the routine.
Crane Set up with Encoder These setup instructions assume the following.
Feedback • Drive and motor size have been carefully selected
• External brake resistor has been properly sized
• The drive is at factory defaults.
If not, unplug the output relay terminal block and issue a reset to factory
defaults for the HOST and all PORTS. Plug terminal block back in.
• Programming is done via DriveExecutive™ or DriveExplorer™
• Crane control is done via Run forward / Run Reverse inputs
• Mechanical brake control is wired to Output Relay 0
• The drive is equipped with an incremental (20-750-ENC-1) or dual
incremental encoder board (20-750-DENC-1)
• The encoder is mounted on the back of the motor (not behind the
gearbox)
• Encoder specification: Quadrature differential (A, A-, B, B-), Line driver
output, Minimum 1000PPR 5V, or 12V signals (12V preferred)
Static Tune
This routine measures the motor characteristics with the brake set (brake closed).
Rotate Tune
This routine gives better results if connected equipment allows. This routine
requires the mechanical brake to open and the motor be allowed to run at
minimum of 70 % of nominal speed.
Inertia Tune
This routine measures the time to accelerate the system to the nominal speed.
Static Tune
IMPORTANT The crane can be started via the crane control unit.
2. Run crane with the crane control unit and verify that the direction is
correct.
If crane direction is not correct, change motor direction.
Drive Parameter Setting
P40 [Mtr Options Cfg] Bit 4 “Mtr Lead Rev” = 1 (Reversed)
Run crane with the crane control unit and verify that the direction is now
correct.
Move crane hook to a position that allows sufficient travel in both
directions.
Rotate Tune
During a Rotate Tune routine, the motor runs for 20 seconds in the commanded
direction. In Flux vector control, the Rotate Tune routine can be executed in a no
load or lightly loaded condition such as the motor connected to a gearbox, cable
drum, or cable and hook.
IMPORTANT Ensure that the Rotate Tune routine can be stopped if an end travel condition is
likely to occur.
If the Rotate Tune routine fails due to a motor load, rerun the Static Tune routine
and skip this routine.
Check tuning results in P73 [IR Voltage Drop], P74 Ixo Voltage Drop],
and P75 [Flux Current Ref ].
Inertia Tune
The Inertia Tune routine measures the time to accelerate the system (with load)
by using P71 [Autotune Torque] to the nominal speed. The test speed can be
limited by reducing P520 [Max Fwd Speed] and P521 [Max Rev Speed]. The
fastest test is achieved with P71 [Autotune Torque] set to a high value and P520
[Max Fwd Speed] and P521 [Max Rev Speed] set to a low value.
Because loads vary in crane applications, the result of an Inertia Tune is more or
less irrelevant as it is for one condition only.
IMPORTANT Ensure that the Inertia Tune routine can be stopped if an end travel condition is
likely to occur.
When using an encoder, the drive and motor can hold zero speed with full
load even with an opened mechanical brake.
Program preset speeds according to Speed Select inputs that are used.
Input Status (1 = Input Actuated) Auto Reference
Source
DI Speed Sel 2 DI Speed Sel 1 DI Speed Sel 0
0 0 0 Reference A
0 0 1 Reference A
0 1 0 Reference B
0 1 1 Preset Speed 3
1 0 0 Preset Speed 4
1 0 1 Preset Speed 5
1 1 0 Preset Speed 6
1 1 1 Preset Speed 7
Torque Prove
Increase this setting if the drive faults on F20 [TorqPrv Spd Band].
5. Set speed deviation level.
Drive Parameter Setting
P1106 [SpdBand Intgrtr] 0.060 Secs (Default)
Increase this setting if the drive faults on F20 [TorqPrv Spd Band].
6. Set brake release time.
Drive Parameter Setting
P1107 [Brk Release Time] 0.100 Secs (Default)
Sets the number of motor revolutions the motor is allowed to lower the
load when a brake slip has been detected.
Sets the time to maintain zero speed with brake open when the run
command has been released.
Setup Complete
The drive is now set up and Torque Prove for the mechanical brake control is
activated. The load can now be applied.
DriveObserver™ can be used to optimize the speed loop tuning. Use a 30 second
time scaling on the X-axis
12. Use DriveObserver to configure the following traces.
Drive Parameter Setting
P3 [Mtr Vel Fdbk] Scaled to minimum and maximum speed limits.
P594 [Ramped Spd Ref] Scaled to minimum and maximum speed limits.
P7 [Output Current] Scaled to current limit value.
P11 [DC Bus Volts] Default scaling.
P5 [Torque Cur Fdbk] (Optional) Default scaling.
Run the crane up and down under full load. If necessary, adjust
acceleration and deceleration rates.
Troubleshooting
F4 “Undervoltage”
• If the mains supply is still present, reduce the undervoltage level at P461
[UnderVltg Level].
F5 “Overvoltage”
• Monitor the DC Bus voltage while operating the crane. When lowering
the load, limit the DC bus voltage to 750V DC.
• Verify that the external resistor is correctly connected / wired
• Verify that the parameter settings as stated in Point 1.
• Monitor bit 20 DB active of P935 [Drive Status 1]. This bit comes on
when dynamic braking is active.
Rotate Tune
This routine gives better results if connected equipment allows. This routine
requires the mechanical brake to open and the motor be allowed to run at
minimum of 70 % of nominal speed.
Inertia Tune
This routine measures the time to accelerate the system to the nominal speed.
Static Tune
IMPORTANT The crane can be started via the crane control unit.
2. Run crane with the crane control unit and verify that the direction is
correct.
If crane direction is not correct, change motor direction.
Drive Parameter Setting
P40 [Mtr Options Cfg] Bit 4 “Mtr Lead Rev” = 1 (Reversed)
Run crane with the crane control unit and verify that the direction is now
correct.
Move crane hook to a position that allows sufficient travel in both
directions.
Rotate Tune
During a Rotate Tune routine, the motor runs for 20 seconds in the commanded
direction. The Rotate Tune routine must be executed in a no load or lightly
loaded condition such as the motor connected to a gearbox, cable drum, or cable
and hook.
IMPORTANT Ensure that the Rotate Tune routine can be stopped if an end travel condition is
likely to occur.
If the Rotate Tune routine fails due to motor load, rerun the Static Tune routine
and skip this routine.
Check tuning results in P73 [IR Voltage Drop], P74 Ixo Voltage Drop],
and P75 [Flux Current Ref ].
Inertia Tune
The Inertia Tune routine measures the time to accelerate the system (with load)
by using P71 [Autotune Torque] to the nominal speed. The test speed can be
limited by reducing P520 [Max Fwd Speed] and P521 [Max Rev Speed]. The
fastest test is achieved with P71 [Autotune Torque] set to a high value and P520
[Max Fwd Speed] and P521 [Max Rev Speed] set to a low value.
Because loads vary in crane applications, the result of an Inertia Tune is more or
less irrelevant as it is for one condition only.
IMPORTANT Ensure that the Inertia Tune routine can be stopped if an end travel condition is
likely to occur.
Program preset speeds according to Speed Select inputs that are used.
Input Status (1 = Input Actuated) Auto Reference
DI Speed Sel 2 DI Speed Sel 1 DI Speed Sel 0 Source
0 0 0 Reference A
0 0 1 Reference A
0 1 0 Reference B
0 1 1 Preset Speed 3
1 0 0 Preset Speed 4
1 0 1 Preset Speed 5
1 1 0 Preset Speed 6
1 1 1 Preset Speed 7
P645 [Speed Reg Kp] = P636 [Speed Reg BW] x P76 [Total Inertia] = BW x J (Inertia)
Torque Prove
IMPORTANT After Torque Prove is activated, the drive is in an alarm state as described on
page 356. Carefully read the Attention statement and acknowledge it by
setting the required parameter.
This setting can be lowered once the system has been tuned. The lower this
value, the faster the protection.
3. Set speed deviation level.
Drive Parameter Setting
P1106 [SpdBand Intgrtr] 0.200 Secs (Default)
This setting can be lowered once the system has been tuned. The lower this
value, the faster the protection.
4. Set brake float tolerance.
Drive Parameter Setting
P1111 [Float Tolerance] 2...3 times Slip Frequency of Motor.
Sets the level where the mechanical brake sets in encoderless mode.
Setup Complete
The drive is now set up and Torque Prove for the mechanical brake control is
activated. The load can now be applied.
DriveObserver can be used to optimize the speed loop tuning. Use a 30 second
time scaling on the X-axis
5. Use DriveObserver to configure the following traces.
Drive Parameter Setting
P3 [Mtr Vel Fdbk] Scaled to minimum and maximum speed limits.
P594 [Ramped Spd Ref] Scaled to minimum and maximum speed limits.
P7 [Output Current] Scaled to current limit value.
P11 [DC Bus Volts] Default scaling.
P5 [Torque Cur Fdbk] (Optional) Default scaling.
Run the crane up and down under full load. Adjust acceleration and
deceleration rates if necessary.
Troubleshooting
F4 “Undervoltage”
• If the mains supply is still present, reduce the undervoltage level at P461
[UnderVltg Level].
F5 “Overvoltage”
• Monitor the DC Bus voltage while operating the crane. When lowering
the load, limit the DC bus voltage to 750V DC.
• Verify that the external resistor is correctly connected / wired
• Verify that the parameter settings as stated in Point 1.
• Monitor bit 20 DB active of P935 [Drive Status 1]. This bit comes on
when dynamic braking is active.
The Pump Off function is used to change the speed of or stop the pump jack
automatically, based on torque feedback from the motor. This function is useful
for maximizing well production and reducing mechanical wear.
Configure P1187 [Pump Off Config] in one of two ways to detect a Pump Off.
• Down Stroke Torque method: Setting 0 “Automatic” or 1 “Position”
The pump jack down stroke torque is based on a detected waveform.
• Cycle Torque method: Setting 2 “Cycle”
The pump jack down stroke torque is based on a full pump stroke cycle.
Setup
To use the Pump Off feature, the drive must operate in flux vector (FV) control
mode. This mode requires that you enter motor nameplate data and complete a
motor autotune routine. Gearbox ratio and sheave size data are also required.
Pump off control can be set to use a torque baseline, which is created when the
drive is first run or from a fixed set point. The fixed set point is useful if the drive
cannot detect a signature waveform due to well conditions. The drive does not
create a set point that is based on what could be a pump off condition.
The down stroke torque can change position on some wells due to slippage in the
system. In these cases, the peaks and valleys of the torque waveform move enough
that the position reconnect does not work properly. This slippage can be seen on
the position test point in that the position continues to reset early. To work on
these pumps, the torque waveform over one cycle is averaged.
Complete the table with the motor nameplate and pump data listed.
Motor Data
Motor Nameplate Volts V
Motor Nameplate FLA A
Motor Nameplate Hertz Hz
Motor Nameplate RPM RPM
Motor Nameplate Power Hp
Motor Poles Pole
Pump Data
Gearbox Sheave Diameter in.
Gearbox Ratio :
Gearbox Rating kin#
Motor Sheave Diameter in.
Enter the motor data from above and adjust parameter settings.
Parameter Setting
Parameter Access Level
P301 [Access Level] 2 “Expert”
Motor Nameplate Data
P25 [Motor NP Volts] Motor nameplate voltage.
P26 [Motor NP Amps] Motor nameplate current.
P27 [Motor NP Hertz] Motor nameplate frequency.
P28 [Motor NP RPM] Motor nameplate speed.
P29 [Mtr NP Pwr Units] 0 “HP” or 1 “kW”
P30 [Motor NP Power] Motor nameplate power rating.
P31 [Motor Poles] Number of motor poles.
Motor Control
P35 [Motor Ctrl Mode] 3 “Induction FV”
The drive can be tuned to the motor. Autotune routines can be accessed directly
or through the Start Up menu.
When tuning, it is preferred that the motor is uncoupled from the pump jack and
a Rotate Tune routine be performed. If this action is not possible, perform a Static
Tune routine.
1. Verify that the motor is turning in the forward direction by jogging the
motor. Face the motor shaft and verify clockwise rotation. If necessary,
correct the direction of rotation by using one of the following methods.
a. Swap any two motor leads. This method is recommended to help avoid
confusion later.
b. Change the motor direction by configuring drive firmware.
Drive Parameter Setting
P40 [Mtr Options Cfg] Bit 4 “Mtr Lead Rev” = 1 (Reversed)
2. Once direction is established, enter the Rotate Tune parameter setting.
Drive Parameter Setting
P70 [Autotune] 3 “Rotate Tune”
3. Press Start and allow the drive to complete the Autotune routine.
When complete, the motor can now be coupled to the pump jack.
The following parameter settings assume that a dynamic brake resistor is used.
Parameter Setting
Brake Features
P372 [Bus Reg Mode A] 2 “Dyn Brake” (1)
P382 [DB Resistor Type] 1 “External”
P383 [DB Ext Ohms] Based on performance preference.
P384 [DB Ext Watts] Based on performance preference.
P385 [DB ExtPulseWatts] Based on performance preference.
Motor Overload
P409 [Dec Inhibit Actn] 0 “Ignore”
Load Limits
P426 [Regen Power Lmt] Set to match the value that is calculated for P671 [Neg Torque Limit], see
below this table.
(1) If no dynamic braking resistor is used, set P372 [Bus Reg Mode A] to 1 “Adjust Freq” (Default).
Speed is sacrificed for bus regulation and P524 [Overspeed Limit] must be adjusted.
The following positive and negative torque limits are calculated on powerup and
entered by the drive.
• P670 [Pos Torque Limit] is calculated using the motor parameters.
• P671 [Neg Torque Limit] is calculated using the dynamic-brake resistor
ohmic value and rated torque of the motor. If a dynamic brake resistor is
not used, the default negative torque limit is used.
Change P426 [Regen Power Lmt] to match the value in P671 [Neg Torque
Limit] to maximize dynamic brake performance.
If this parameter does not reset to 0 “Disabled,” set P1187 [Pump Off
Config] to option 2 “Cycle.” In Cycle mode, the entire cycle torque is used
as the down-stroke torque used in the original pump off detection. There is
no need to set the top of stroke in this mode.
You can see waveforms similar to the waveforms in Figure 76. Monitor the
Pump Jack and verify the Pump Off Action.
Fine-Tuning
P1195 [Pump Off Level], P1196 [Pump Off Speed], and P1197 [Pump Off
Time] all contribute to the productivity of the well and must be adjusted. For
more information read the parameter descriptions in Chapter 3.
Occasionally the position starts to drift relative to the torque signature. If drift
occurs, set P1188 [Pump Off Setup] Bit 1 “Pos Offset” to 1. See Figure 77 for an
example of what this drift would look like.
Notice how the position has drifted relative to the torque. This drift causes the
incorrect part of the waveform to be averaged as the down stroke torque and
results in a false pump off condition. The drift can be corrected by setting the
position offset bits properly.
Sleep Mode
If P1189 [Pump Off Action] is set to 1 “Always Stop,” 2 “Stop After 1,” or 3 “Stop
After 2,” the Sleep Wake function must be configured. Set the following
parameters.
Parameter Setting
Start Features
P350 [Sleep Wake Mode] 1 “Direct” (Enabled)
P351 [SleepWake RefSel] 1207 (Entered through the Numeric Edit tab.)
P355 [Wake Time] Desired restart time (64800 seconds maximum).
The following steps are a general outline of how the initial Pump Off control is
configured in the PowerFlex 753. The default configuration uses the down stroke
torque with P1187 [Pump Off Config] set to 0 “Automatic” or 1 “Position” and
P1190 [Pump Off Control] set to 1 “Baseline Set.”
1. Pump off control requires the drive to be “At Speed.” Check P935 [Drive
Status 1] Bit 8 to verify this operating condition.
2. When P935 [Drive Status 1] Bit 8 “At Speed” = 1, the internal pump jack
at speed bit is set and the current speed command is saved.
3. The next ten down stroke torques are sampled and summed.
4. The average of the down stroke torques is saved as the baseline for the
current speed.
5. P1191 [Pump Off Status] Bit 6 “Pump Stable” = 1.
If the second sample is also less than or greater than the fixed setpoint by
the percentage set in P1195 [Pump Off Level], a Pump Off condition is
detected.
8. When the reduced speed is reached, P935 [Drive Status 1] Bit 8 “At
Speed” = 1, the next ten down stroke torques are sampled and summed.
9. The average of the down stroke torques is saved as the baseline for the new
speed. P1191 [Pump Off Status] Bit 6 “Pump Stable” is reset.
10. The pump jack runs at the reduced speed for the length of time set in
P1197 [Pump Off Time] then the pump jack resumes pumping at the base
speed command. (Step 6 in this sequence.)
If P1189 [Pump Off Action] is set to 3 “Stop After 2,” go to Step 11.
Whenever the operator changes the base speed command, the process
starts over at Step 1 in this sequence. This action does not apply to speed
changes that are triggered by P1189 [Pump Off Action] when a pump off
condition is detected.
11. While running at the first reduced Pump Off Speed, every fifth stroke is
compared to the new baseline for a pump off condition.
If the down-stroke torque samples remain stable during the time set in
P1197 [Pump Off Time], the following occurs:
• Commanded speed returns to the original base speed
• Down stroke torque samples are compared against the original baseline.
(Step 6 in this sequence.)
If two down stroke torque samples are less than or greater than the new
baseline by the percentage set in P1195 [Pump Off Level], the following
occurs:
• The Pump Off condition persists
• The percentage set in P1196 [Pump Off Speed] lowers the commanded
speed a second time.
12. When the second reduced speed is reached, P935 [Drive Status 1] Bit 8
“At Speed” = 1, the next ten down stroke torques are sampled and
summed.
13. The average of the down stroke torques is saved as the baseline for the
second new speed. P1191 [Pump Off Status] Bit 6 “Pump Stable” is reset.
14. The pump jack runs at the second reduced speed for the length of time set
in P1197 [Pump Off Time] and resumes pumping at the base speed
command. (Step 6 in this sequence.)
15. While running at the second reduced Pump Off Speed, every fifth stroke is
compared to the second new baseline for a persistent pump off condition.
If the down-stroke torque samples remain stable during the time set in
P1197 [Pump Off Time], the following occurs:
• The commanded speed returns to the original base speed
• The down stroke torque samples are compared against the original
baseline. (Step 6 in this sequence.)
If two down stroke samples are less than or greater than the second new
baseline by the percentage set in P1195 [Pump Off Level], the following
occurs:
• The Pump Off condition persists
• The drive stops for the length of time set in P353 [Sleep Time]
16. When P353 [Sleep Time] expires, the pump jack restarts and runs under
normal conditions. (Step 6 in this sequence.)
When P1189 [Pump Off Action] is set to 2 “Stop After 1,” the drive stops for the
length of time set in P353 [Sleep Time] after one reduction of speed. (Step 11 in
this sequence.)
When P1189 [Pump Off Action] is set to 1 “Always Stop,” the drive stops for the
length of time set in P353 [Sleep Time] at the first detection of a Pump Off
condition. When P353 [Sleep Time] expires, the pump jack restarts and runs
under normal conditions. (Step 6 in this sequence.)
When P1192 [Pump Cycle Store] does not change back to 0 “disable,” the drive
has not been able to detect a pump-jack torque signature waveform to use as a
baseline. A fixed set point is required to run the well. See the next section.
The following is a general outline of how the initial Pump Off control is
configured in the PowerFlex 753. This configuration uses cycle torque data with
P1187 [Pump Off Config] set to 2 “Cycle” and P1190 [Pump Off Control] set
to 2 “Fixed Setpt.”
1. Pump off control requires the drive to be “At Speed.” Check P935 [Drive
Status 1] Bit 8 to verify this operating condition.
2. When P935 [Drive Status 1] Bit 8 “At Speed” = 1, the internal pump jack
at speed bit is set and the current speed command is saved. The At Speed
bit is no longer scrutinized until the speed command is changed or the
drive is stopped.
The next three strokes are used to allow the pump to settle out.
3. P1191 [Pump Off Status] Bit 6 “Pump Stable” = 1.
4. The pump jack is running under normal conditions.
If the down-stroke torque sample is less than or greater than the baseline by
the percentage set in P1195 [Pump Off Level], the following occurs:
• P1191 [Pump Off Status] Bit 5 “PumpOff Alarm”= 1
• The drive waits for a second sample
If the second sample is also less than or greater than the baseline by the
percentage set in P1195 [Pump Off Level], a Pump Off condition is
detected.
When a Pump Off condition exists, the drive follows the setting of P1189
[Pump Off Action]. The process starts over at Step 1 in this sequence and
five strokes occur to allow the pump to settle out.
Whenever the operator changes the base speed command, the process starts over
at Step 1 in this sequence.
When P1187 [Pump Off Config] is set to 2 “Cycle,” the full stroke torque is used
for pump off detection. A separate position counter is enabled, which uses the
gear ratio and speed feedback to create a position. The gear ratio must be set
correctly for this action to work.
• The position increments every 2 ms based on output frequency. The
torque is added to a buffer and a counter increments.
• When the position counter reaches 10,000, the counter is reset to 0. The
torque buffer is divided by the counter to create the average torque for the
cycle.
• This torque is the full cycle torque and is then used as the down stroke
torque was used in baseline set detection.
Predictive Maintenance with The PowerFlex 753 and 755 drives contain algorithms for Predictive
Maintenance that are used to improve the “up-time” of machines, processes, and
Logix facilities. These algorithms monitor the lifespan of certain components. They can
be used to alert personnel when the components are nearing the end of their
lifespan so the components can be replaced before they fail.
There are algorithms for drive fans, relay contacts on digital outputs, motor
bearings, motor lubrication, machine bearings, and machine lubrication. See the
Predictive Maintenance group in the Protection folder starting on page 103 for
more information.
• [Event Level] is the amount of Elapsed Time (in percent of Total Life)
when you want the drive to warn the user of an impending failure
• [Event Action] is the action set to take place when the drive reaches the
Event Level. It can be set to the following options: Ignore, Alarm, Fault
Minor, Fault Coast Stop, Fault Ramp Stop, or Fault Current Limit Stop.
The alarm and fault actions stop the drive or prevent it from starting. If using a
controller and a network interface such as EtherNet/IP, the logic and notification
can be handled at the controller level. Configure the [Event Action] parameter to
“Ignore” and use the controller to monitor the [Remaining Life] parameter.
When the [Remaining Life] parameter reaches the [Event Level] parameter
value, the controller sends a message that alerts the user on the HMI (example,
PanelView™ or FactoryTalk® View).
On wall mount drives, write explicit messages that read the [Remaining Life]
parameter. Write the logic that compares the [Remaining Life] parameter to the
[Event Level] parameter. The logic triggers a message when the [Event Level]
parameter is reached.
There can be multiple power structures in parallel on floor mount drives; and
therefore, multiple sets of fans, which make the predictive maintenance more
complicated than on wall mount drives.
A frame 10 drive has three power structures, and three sets of cabinet fans,
heatsink fans, and internal stirring fans.
C1 C2 C3
Cabinet Fans Cabinet Fans Cabinet Fans
You must calculate the [Remaining Life] parameter values for the cabinet fans in
each power structure. This calculation is required anytime the [Elapsed Life]
parameter of one power structure differs from another. This difference can occur
when one power structure has been replaced or serviced separately from the
others.
Example Code
This example code calculates the [Remaining Life] value of the cabinet fan for
the first power structure. For frames 9 and 10, use similar logic for the other
cabinet fans. Use similar logic to calculate the [Remaining Life] of the heatsink
fans and the internal stirring fans.
1. Use a timer instruction to set a sensible time interval for reading the data.
See Figure 78.
2. Use a message instruction to retrieve the Total Life value. See Figure 79.
b. In the Message Type field, click the down arrow to select CIP Generic.
c. In the Service Type field, click the down arrow to select Get Attribute
Single.
d. In the Class field, enter 93 (hex); use the EtherNet/IP DPI Parameter
Object.
e. Set the Instance to 482. This field defines the parameter that you want
to obtain.
f. Set the Attribute to 9. This field defines that you want to retrieve the
parameter value.
g. Click the Communication tab. See Figure 81.
h. In the Path field, enter the drive name to configure the communication
path of the message instruction to that drive.
In this case, the drive name in the Logix I/O tree is “_DriveName.”
i. The value for Total Life returns in the double integer (DINT) data
format.
The raw data = Hours x 100. Divide by 100 to get the Total Life in
hours. The CPT block (see Figure 82) performs this division.
4. Use a message instruction to retrieve the [Elapsed Life] value for the
cabinet fan from converter 1. [Elapsed Life] data returns with a floating
point (Real) data format. See Figure 83.
b. In the Message Type field, click the down arrow to select CIP Generic.
c. In the Service Type field, click the down arrow to select Get Attribute
Single.
d. In the Class field, enter 93 (hex); use the EtherNet/IP DPI Parameter
Object.
e. Set the Instance to 27786. This field defines the parameter that you
want to obtain.
The Instance is calculated by adding an offset of 27648 (dec) (as
determined by the PowerFlex 750 Ethernet Communications Manual)
to the converter 1 [C1 CBFanElpsdLife] parameter number (P138).
27648 (offset) 138 (parameter number) = 27786
f. Set the Attribute to 9. This field defines that you want to retrieve the
parameter value.
h. In the Path field, enter the drive name to configure the communication
path of the message instruction to that drive.
In this case, the drive name in the Logix I/O tree is “_DriveName.”
i. The [Elapsed Life] data returns with a floating point (Real) data
format. The raw data is already in hours. See Figure 86.
Notes:
Using DeviceLogix
IMPORTANT The Human Interface Module (HIM) CopyCat function does not work with the
following firmware versions.
• PowerFlex 753 firmware version 1.005
• PowerFlex 755 firmware versions 1.009 or 1.010.
Only the drive software tools that are listed here can be used to program the
DeviceLogix component in PowerFlex 750-Series drives. Other DeviceLogix
Editors, such as RSNetWorx™ for DeviceNet, cannot be used.
IMPORTANT DeviceLogix projects that are created with PowerFlex 755 firmware versions
1.009 or 1.010 do not work with firmware version 2.002 or greater. These
projects must be opened and adjusted in an editor (for example DriveExplorer
or DriveExecutive) before being downloaded to the drive.
Note the following feature differences between the drive firmware releases:
PowerFlex 755 v1.xx PowerFlex 753 v1.xx
PowerFlex 755 v2.xx
DeviceLogix Library Version 3 Version 4
Maximum number of function blocks 90 225
Program update time per number of 5 ms (fixed): 1…45 blocks 5 ms (fixed): 1…45 blocks
blocks used 10 ms (fixed): 46…90 blocks 10 ms (fixed): 46…90 blocks
15 ms (fixed): 91…135 blocks
20 ms (fixed): 136…180 blocks
25 ms (fixed): 181…225 blocks
Note: PowerFlex 755 v1.xxx drives can be flash updated to v2.xxx to take
advantage of the new features in the Version 4 release of the DeviceLogix library
and the increased number of function blocks.
The PowerFlex 750-Series DeviceLogix can provide basic logic capability for
applications that can allow a 5…25 ms scan time depending on program size, plus
the time it takes to update the I/O. It can be used in both networked and stand-
alone environments. It can also operate autonomous of the drive. For example, it
can continue executing if the drive is faulted, or disconnected from AC input
power (requires PowerFlex 750-Series 24V DC auxiliary power supply option,
catalog number 20-750-APS).
Function Block Elements The following function block elements are available:
Process
Filter
Select/Limit
Statistical
Timer/Counter
Compare
Compute/Math
Move/Logical
Macro Block
(1)
Bit and Analog I/O do not count against the Function Block total. All other
elements count, with each instance equal to one Function Block.
The DeviceLogix Editor provides a graphical interface, within which you can
configure Function Blocks and provide local control in the drive. DeviceLogix
Editor navigation and programming basics is not covered in this manual. See the
DeviceLogix System User Manual, publication RA-UM003 for more
information.
Macro Blocks
You can create up to three Macro Blocks, and each can be used 10 times. The
selections are empty until you create a Macro Block. You can also create the icon
text that is associated with each Macro Block.
The DeviceLogix controller in Port 14 uses (48) bit inputs, (48) bit outputs, (24)
analog inputs, and (17) analog outputs to interact with the other ports in the
drive (both drive and peripheral parameters).
Bit Inputs
Bit inputs are used to connect to real-world input devices (push buttons,
photoeyes, and so forth) that are wired to an I/O option module in the drive,
monitor drive status, or to read a bit in a bit-enumerated parameter.
Bit Outputs
Bit Outputs are used to connect to real-world output devices (pilot lights, relays,
and so forth) that are wired to an I/O option module in the drive, to control the
drive directly via Logic Command bits, or to write a bit in a bit-enumerated
parameter.
Analog Inputs
Analog Inputs are typically used to connect to real-world input devices (sensor,
potentiometer, and so forth) that are wired to an I/O option module in the drive,
monitor drive Feedback, read the Real-Time Clock, or to read a drive / peripheral
parameter.
Note: Hardware Analog Inputs are available in the PowerFlex 753 and v2.xxx
(and higher) PowerFlex 755 drives.
Analog Outputs
Analog Outputs are typically used to connect to real-world output devices (meter
panel, valve, and so forth) that are wired to an I/O option module in the drive,
control the Reference to the drive, or to write a drive / peripheral parameter.
Note: Hardware Analog Outputs are available in the PowerFlex 753 and v2.xxx
(and higher) PowerFlex 755 drives.
The DeviceLogix Analog In/Out parameters support different data types. For
example, P17 [DLX In 01] is a Real whereas P32 [DLX In 16] is a DINT. Be sure
to assign a DLX In / Out to a parameter that has the same data type.
Function Block elements also support different data types. Click the Properties
Button in the upper right-hand corner of each element to display the
Function Block properties. The Function Data Type field displays the supported
data types. If Real DLX Ins are used with a Function Block element configured
for DINT (typical default), the fraction is truncated.
Each DLX In and DLX Out is a Datalink and cannot be directly mapped to each
other or another Datalink, such as a Datalink in the Port 13 Embedded
EtherNet/IP. Use the DeviceLogix internal scratchpad registers to pass data
between the Datalinks.
DLX In 01 reads DLX Real SP1 and can now be used as an Analog Input in the
DeviceLogix program.
DLX Real SP1 is the intermediary register that allows the two Datalinks to work
together.
The DeviceLogix program controls an Analog Output value in DLX Out 01,
which is written to DLX Real SP2.
DLX Real SP2 is the intermediary register that allows the two Datalinks to work
together.
PowerFlex 753 (all) and PowerFlex 755 v2.xxx (and higher) Datalinks
and internal DeviceLogix scratchpad registers (P82…P105)
Each DLX In and DLX Out is a Datalink and cannot be directly mapped to each
other or another Datalink, such as a Datalink in the Port 13 Embedded
EtherNet/IP. Although the same method used with PowerFlex 755 v1.xxx
firmware can be employed, there is a more efficient method that does not require
a DeviceLogix Datalink to be used.
DLX Real InSP1 can now be used as a Hardware Analog Input and used directly
with a Function Block (a DeviceLogix Datalink is not required).
DLX Real OutSP1 can now be used as a Hardware Analog Output and used
directly with a Function Block (a DeviceLogix Datalink is not required).
This example demonstrates how a selector switch operation similar to the feature
in the PowerFlex 700S can be achieved through the embedded DeviceLogix in
the PowerFlex 750-Series drive. A selector switch is simulated in the drive by
using a combination of inputs to produce multiple outputs. Digital inputs in the
drive are used to output configurable multiple preset speeds (75 Hz, 85 Hz, 95
Hz, and 105 Hz) to P571 [Preset Speed 1]. It is assumed that the 750-Series drive
has an I/O module that is installed in Port 4.
The following truth table represents the inputs and outputs for a 4 position
selector switch.
Inputs Outputs
Input 1 Input 2 Binary Output Selector Switch
Output
0 0 0 Output A
0 1 1 Output B
1 0 2 Output C
1 1 3 Output D
The Logic Map offers a high-level explanation of how these outputs are achieved.
Digital Input 1 00
DLX
DIP 1 Output A
01
Output B
DLX
Out 1
10 Output C
Digital Input 2
DLX Output D
DIP 2 11
Discrete Inputs in the Drive are used for Inputs 1 and Input 2. Output A, B, C,
and D is linked to DeviceLogix Scratchpad Registers. The scratchpad feature
allows further flexibility to modify the values of these outputs.
The resulting output can be linked to a parameter and be used to support drive
applications, such as configuring multiple preset speeds and point-to-point
positioning. In this example, it controls Preset Speed 1.
Parameter Configuration
75.000000
DevLogix In 01
14 SEL
13 BAND Select
11 BNOT 12 BNOT Boolean And 1
EnableIn
Boolean Not Boolean Not 1 75.000000 75.000000
EnableIn In1 DevLogix Out 01
1 1 1
EnableIn EnableIn In1 In2
1 1
In In In2 SelectorIn
the following figure.
85.000000
DevLogix In 02
Functional Block Programming
10 SEL
2 BOR 3 BAND 9 BAND Select
Boolean Or Boolean And Boolean And 1
EnableIn
1 1 1 0.000000
EnableIn EnableIn EnableIn In1
0 0 0
In1 In1 In1 In2
In2 In2 In2 SelectorIn
105.000000 5 SEL
DevLogix In 04
0 1 BAND Select
DIP 1
Boolean And 6 BNOT 1
EnableIn
1 Boolean Not 0.000000
EnableIn In1
0 1
In1 EnableIn In2
1
In2 In SelectorIn
The Selector Switch Operation example consists of 14 blocks that are shown in
Using DeviceLogix Appendix D
This example demonstrates how a scale block operation similar to the feature in
the PowerFlex 700VC can be achieved through the embedded DeviceLogix in
the PowerFlex 750-Series drive. A Scale Block scales a parameter value and the
input of the block is linked to a parameter that is desired to be scaled. The scale
block also has both input and output high limits and low limit parameters.
Scale In Hi determines the high value for the input to the scale block.
Scale Out Hi determines the corresponding high value for the output of the scale
block.
Scale In Low determines the low value for the input to the scale block.
Scale Out Lo determines the corresponding low value for the output of the scale
block.
Scale Out Value of the block is then available for user to link to any parameter
that accepts links.
Parameter Configuration
2 SEL
Check if input is out of range Use Scale In Value unless out of range
Select (clamp at either low or high limit)
1 GRT 1
EnableIn
0.000000 0.000000 5 SEL
Greater Than (A>B) DevLogix In 01 In1
Scale In Value 1 1800.000000
EnableIn DevLogix In 03 In2 Select
following figure.
6 SUB
Upstream Conveyor
Downstream Conveyor
Parameter Configuration
This example consists of four blocks that are shown in the following figure.
Flip-Flop circuit
1st time ON / 2nd time OFF on so on
Parts Counter
1 CTU 2 BAND 4 SETD
Part Present Output to control
Photoeye Count Up Boolean And Set Dominant the diverter
1 1 1
EnableIn EnableIn EnableIn
0 0 0 0 0
DIP 1 CUEnable In1 Set DOP 1
Reset In2 Reset
3 BAND
Boolean And Because loop-back is performed,
1
EnableIn ">>" is used to determine order
0
In1
In2
This example demonstrates how basic control logic can be used for simple
applications. It is assumed that the PowerFlex 755 has an I/O module installed in
Port 4.
Inflow
High-Level Sensor
Low-Level Sensor
Outflow
Parameter Configuration
CONTROL CIRCUIT
Figure 91 - Control Circuit
SpdRef Sel 0
8 SETD
Set Dominant
Run at High Rate
EnableIn
Stop is momentarily
DIP 2 asserted ( 2 secs)
2 BAND 4 BAND 5 PULR
Boolean And Boolean And Pulse Timer with Reset
Low Level EnableIn EnableIn EnableIn
Sensor In1 In1 TimerEnable Stop
In2 In2 Reset
DIP 3 In3
10 BAND
Low Level
Sensor Boolean And
EnableIn
DIP 3 In1
In2
12 BOR 13 SETD
Figure 92 - Fault/Alarm Circuit
15 TONR 16 SETD
Too Much Time
Timer On Delay with Reset Set Dominant Alarm
Using DeviceLogix
EnableIn EnableIn
Active TimerEnable Set DOP 3
Reset Reset
• Run the drive Monday through Friday between 7:45 a.m. and 5:15 p.m
This example demonstrates how to utilize the PowerFlex 750-Series drive Real-
495
Appendix D
496
Appendix D
Monday - Friday
1
Forward
2 LEQ 1
Less Than or SpdRef Sel 0
Eql (A<=B)
1
EnableIn
1
SourceA
SourceB 8:00 - 16:59
1 1 1
0.545
0.571
5 LES
Less Than (A<B)
1
EnableIn
1
SourceA
Parameter Configuration
13 BOR
Preset Speed 1
Speed Ref A Sel
8 GEQ
13 0
Minute SourceA
SourceB 17:00 - 17:14
10 EQU 12 BAND
Equal Boolean And
The following parameters are configured for this example:
1 1
EnableIn EnableIn
0 0
SourceA In1
SourceB In2
Description
11 LES
Less Than (A<B)
1
Operating speed of drive
This example consists of 15 blocks that are shown in the following figure.
EnableIn
1
SourceA
SourceB
Appendix E
Compatible Allen-Bradley The following table contains a list of specifications for Allen-Bradley servo
motors compatible with PowerFlex 750-Series drives. This information is
Servo Motors provided to help configure PowerFlex 750-Series drives with the appropriate
servo motor data. For information regarding compatibility and configuration of
any Allen-Bradley servo motors (including RDB Series Direct Drive Motors) and
third-party PM motors that are not listed here, contact Allen-Bradley Drives
Technical Support.
When using a PowerFlex 755 drive to control a permanent magnet motor, the
motor feedback device must have a resolution so that the number of pulses per
revolution (PPR) is an exponent of two.
Model Number Motor NP Volts Motor NP Amps Motor NP Motor NP RPM Motor NP Motor Current peak System Cont. Stall Motor Max
(line to line V rms) (A rms) Hertz (Hz) (oper. rpm) Power (kW) Poles (A rms) Torque (N•m) RPM
(rpm)
MPL-A330P 230 8.5 280.7 4210 1.80 8 26.9 4.08 5000
MPL-A420P 230 9.0 268.7 4030 2.00 8 32.5 4.74 5000
MPL-A430P 230 11.9 234.0 3510 2.20 8 47.4 5.99 5000
MPL-A430H 230 8.6 184.7 2770 1.80 8 31.8 6.21 3500
MPL-A4520P 230 12.4 234.0 3510 2.20 8 35.4 5.99 5000
MPL-A4520K 230 10.6 223.3 3350 2.10 8 30.4 5.99 4000
MPL-A4530F 230 9.5 144.7 2170 1.90 8 29.7 8.36 2800
MPL-A4530K 230 14.4 196.0 2940 2.50 8 43.8 8.13 4000
MPL-A4540C 230 6.6 93.3 1400 1.50 8 20.5 10.20 1500
MPL-A4540F 230 13.0 162.0 2430 2.60 8 38.2 10.20 3000
MPL-A520K 230 16.3 208.0 3120 3.50 8 46.0 10.70 4000
MPL-A540K 230 29.3 180.7 2710 5.50 8 84.9 19.40 4000
MPL-A560F 230 29.3 125.3 1880 5.50 8 84.9 27.90 3000
Model Number Motor NP Volts Motor NP Amps Motor NP Motor NP RPM Motor NP Motor Current peak System Cont. Stall Motor Max
(line to line V rms) (A rms) Hertz (Hz) (oper. rpm) Power (kW) Poles (A rms) Torque (N•m) RPM
(rpm)
MPG-A110-091 230 17.0 184.0 1840 1.60 12 33.2 8.30 3500
IMPORTANT Not all drive functions are accessible when used in an Integrated Motion on
EtherNet/IP application.
Introduction The Integrated Motion on EtherNet/IP application is a feature with v2.xxx and
higher firmware PowerFlex® 755 drives. It provides a common user experience as
Kinetix® 6500 drives when used with Logix controllers (v19 and higher) on an
EtherNet/IP network.
• Same motion profile in RSLogix 5000® provides a common configuration
experience. The PowerFlex® 755 drive uses the Motion Properties/Axis
Properties and the same motion attributes as the Kinetix® 6500 servo drive.
• Same RSLogix 5000® motion instructions provide a common
programming experience. An extra motion instruction, MDS – Motion
Drive Start, has also been added to allow a ramped start with “Flying Start”
capability (ability to start into a rotating motor).
Two options are available for integrating PowerFlex 755 drives with Logix
controllers:
Before using the Associated Axes page, each feedback module present in the drive
must be defined on the Module Definition dialog box. The Module Definition
dialog box is accessed from the General tab of the Module Properties dialog box
for the drive.
After each feedback module has been defined, a drive hardware feedback channel
must be selected for each feedback device. A list defines each available channel by
the control-pod port number of the feedback module and the channel within
that port. A sequential alphabetic character is used to identify each available
feedback channel for a module. For example, if a feedback module contains two
channels, they are identified as “Channel A” and “Channel B.”
The correct wiring for an encoder in this system depends on three things:
• The type of feedback module
• The type of encoder
• Which hardware feedback channel is used to connect the encoder (A or B)
If there is only one way to wire an encoder to a feedback module, then either
hardware Channel A or Channel B can be selected for the feedback module.
Table 7 lists the allowed Integrated Motion on EtherNet/IP Feedback types and
the correct encoder connection terminals when the feedback module is a
Universal Feedback module, 20-750-UFB-1. It also identifies how the two
“Device Select” parameters on the 20-750-UFB-1 module are configured in each
case.
The “Digital AqB” Feedback Type is a special case. If only one of the channels on
a particular 20-750-UFB-1 module is configured to “Digital AqB”, then the A, B,
and Z terminals are used, regardless of whether this type is assigned to Channel A
or Channel B. If both channels are configured to “Digital AqB”, then Channel A
uses the A, B, Z terminals, and Channel B uses the terminals that are labeled
“Sine” and “Cosine”. In this case, they are expected to carry normal AqB encoder
signals. These two cases are included in the table.
See the Feedback Options table located in the PowerFlex 750-Series AC Drives
Technical Data, publication 750-TD001, for compatible and non-compatible
combinations.
ATTENTION: When enabling the Torque Prove/Brake Slip detection, the axis
application type must be Constant Speed, Tracking, or Custom with Velocity
Integral enabled. Failure to do so results in unstable operation upon brake
release, because torque pre-load is not applied.
IMPORTANT The Stop Type Action cannot be set to Disable and Coast when using torque prove/
brake slip detection.
IMPORTANT Do not use the MSO, MAJ, and MAM commands when running a TorqProve application
without encoder feedback. Start the axis with the MDS instruction and stop the axis
the with MSF instruction.
IMPORTANT Not all drive functions are accessible when used in an Integrated Motion on
EtherNet/IP application.
Velocity Mode using the Motion Drive Start (MDS) Instruction to Operate the Axis
Velocity or Position Modes using a Motion Servo On (MSO) and Move Instructions to Control the
Axis
Settings
The following parameters are accessed via the Axis Properties -> Parameter List
Category.
Table 8 - Axis Properties Parameters
Parameter Name Description
AutoSagConfiguration Enables the drive to control the load to a no slip condition by repeatedly
attempting to set the brake and test for slip until the load no longer slips.
If set to zero, the drive detects a brake slip and holds the load at zero
speed.
AutoSagSlipIncrement The distance in position/feedback units that the brake is allowed to slip
before enabling the Auto Sag routine to control a brake slip event. An
encoder is required to operate.
AutoSagStart Enables the routine that monitors the encoder for brake slip when the
power structure is disabled. If the brake slips more than the value of
AutoSagSlipIncrement, the power structure is enabled and the Auto Sag
routine begins. The AutoSagConfiguration parameter must also be
enabled. AutoSagStart is not used when encoderless operation is
enabled.
BrakeProveRampTime The time that is required to ramp the torque reference from 100 % to
zero during the brake slip test.
BrakeSlipTolerance Sets the number of motor shaft revolutions allowed during the brake
slippage test. Drive torque is reduced to check for brake slippage. When
slippage occurs, the drive allows the number of motor shaft revolutions
before regaining control. BrakeSlipTolerance is not used when
encoderless operation is enabled.
BrakeTestTorque Percentage of motor rated torque that is used to test the brake before
releasing on the brake test. Any setting above 0 enables the brake test
routine before releasing the brake for normal motion of the axis.
BrakeTestTorque is only active with encoder feedback.
MechanicalBrakeEngageDelay The time that is required for the brake to mechanically engage the
system before the brake slip test begins in encoder feedback mode. In
Encoderless, it is the time that the axis will remain active after the brake
is commanded to set before the axis power structure is disabled
IMPORTANT When a system is configured for operation and the program is downloaded to the
processor, the Speed Deviation Band is set to 0 and can cause a speed deviation fault
with TorqProve when a move is attempted. To correct this error, an Enhanced Attribute
message must be sent to the drive to configure it. Send a ‘Real’ value from 10…25%
to Attribute 2724 decimal or AA4 Hex.
Follow these basic steps to add and configure an I/O module for a PowerFlex 755
drive.
1. In the Module Definition dialog box for the drive, right-click and add an
I/O module (new peripheral device) to Port 7.
The I/O module has already been added to the drive in this example.
2. In the Module Properties dialog box for the drive, on the Digital Inputs
tab, select the appropriate digital input functions.
3. In the Module Properties dialog box for the drive, on the Digital Outputs
tab, select the appropriate digital output functions.
You can configure 20-bit or 24-bit effective resolution for the following feedback
devices:
• Hiperface
• Heidenhain SC
• SSI SC
Set the desired effective resolution on the Motor Feedback tab of the Axis
Properties dialog box for the axis associated with the drive. This feature is
available in PowerFlex 755 firmware revision 12.001 and later and Studio 5000
Logix Designer® version 28.00.02 or later.
Parameter / Instance The following table provides the relationship between PowerFlex 755 drive
parameters and the Integrated Motion on EtherNet/IP attributes. If a parameter
Attribute Mapping is not listed, it is not accessible and its function is not available.
Table 9 Parameter/Instance to Attribute Mapping
Drive Integrated Motion
Parameter No. Parameter Name Integrated Motion on EtherNet/IP Instance
P1 Output Frequency Output Frequency
P1 Output Frequency Output Frequency, I/O Card
P5 Torque Cur Fdbk Iq Current Feedback
P5 Torque Cur Fdbk Torque Current Feedback, I/O Card
P6 Flux Cur Fdbk Id Current Feedback
P7 Output Current Output Current
P8 Output Voltage Output Voltage
P9 Output Power Output Power
P10 Output Powr Fctr Output Power Factor, Sets Port 7
P11 DC Bus Volts DC Bus Voltage
P12 DC Bus Memory DC Bus Voltage - Nominal
P20 Rated Volts Inverter Rated Output Voltage
P20 Rated Volts Inverter Rated Output Voltage, Sets Port 7
P21 Rated Amps Inverter Rated Output Current
P22 Rated kW Inverter Rated Output Power
P25 Motor NP Volts Motor Rated Voltage
P26 Motor NP Amps Motor Rated Continuous Current
P27 Motor NP Hertz Induction Motor Rated Frequency
P28 Motor NP RPM Rotary Motor Rated Speed
P30 Motor NP Power Motor Rated Output Power
P30 Motor NP Power Motor Rated Output Power, Sets Port 7
P31 Motor Poles Rotary Motor Poles
P36 Maximum Voltage Maximum Voltage
P37 Maximum Freq Maximum Frequency
P44 Flux Up Time Flux Up Time
P50 Stability Filter Stability Filter, I/O Card
P60 Start Acc Boost Start Boost
P60 Start Acc Boost Start Boost, I/O Card
P61 Run Boost Run Boost
P62 Break Voltage Break Voltage
P63 Break Frequency Break Frequency
P65 VHz Curve Frequency Control Method
P73 IR Voltage Drop Induction Motor Stator Resistance
P74 Ixo Voltage Drop Induction Motor Stator Leakage Reactance
P75 Flux Current Ref Induction Motor Flux Current
P76 Total Inertia Kj
P81 PM PriEnc Offset Commutation Offset
P82 PM AltEnc Offset PM Motor Alternate Encoder Offset, I/O Card
P86 PM CEMF Voltage PM Motor Rotary Voltage Constant
Motor Overload
The PowerFlex 755 parameter 940 [Drive OL Count] indicates power unit
overload (I2T) in percentage. The value of this parameter remains at 0 until 100
% of Rated Current is reached. At 100 % of Rated Current, Overload
measurement begins and the power unit overload fault occurs.
When the PowerFlex 755 drive is in integrated motion mode, Logix allows
configuration of the Positive or Negative Overtravel inputs on an I/O module in
Port 7 of the drive. After the inputs are configured in the drive firmware, if the
Positive or Negative Overtravel Input is activated, the drive firmware generates a
Positive or Negative Overtravel fault. When the fault occurs the drive axis coasts
to a stop. This fault action is not configurable.
Pre-charge OK Input
This feature extends the precharge input monitoring capability to the PowerFlex
755 drive in integrated motion. The event processing is as follows:
Brake Output
This feature provides for the configuration of the Brake Output functionality via
a relay output to the PowerFlex 755 in integrated motion only.
Regeneration OK Input
This feature adds the Regeneration OK Input functionality to the PowerFlex 755
drive in integrated motion only.
Note: This configuration is only valid when an auxiliary power supply is used for
control power with frames 1…7 drives or when a 24 auxiliary power supply is used
on frames 8…10 drives.
This feature requires the drive firmware to map analog inputs and outputs on
configured I/O modules (installed in Port 7) for use in Studio 5000 Logix
Designer® by using the existing attributes. Access to the analog data is available by
selecting the attributes in the Axis Properties - Drive Parameters tab of the axis.
The PowerFlex 755 drive has two Analog Outputs that are available for use.
The functionality supports the current motor thermostat range for status trip and
reset in parameter mode. However, this functionality is not suitable for Allen-
Bradley® MPL and MPM motors due to the varying hardware capacities and
thermostat ranges of the Kinetix and 22-Series I/O modules.
Integrated motion supports SSI Rotary Full Digital Feedback types. The drive
also supports these feedback devices that are connected to the Universal
Feedback module (20-750-UFB-1) in parameter mode. This feedback type can
now be configured for use with the PowerFlex 755 drive in integrated motion.
Configuration of the new feedback type is accessible from the Axis Properties -
Feedback tab.
The PowerFlex 755 drive supports 24-bit resolution configuration for the
following feedback types in parameter mode:
• Sine/Cosine (rotary and linear)
• Hiperface (rotary only)
• EnDat Sine/Cosine (rotary only)
• EnDat Digital (rotary only)
• SSI SC (rotary only)
The feature allows these feedback types to be configured for 24-bit effective
resolution in integration motion mode. The 24-bit effective resolution
configuration is accessible from the Axis Properties - Feedback tab.
Enhanced Attributes Enhanced attributes are accessed via an MSG instruction in RSLogix 5000.
These values are the same for all enhanced attribute writes. Only the Attribute
number and Source Element changes.
IMPORTANT Execute message commands each time the Integrated Motion on the EtherNet/
IP network connection is established. Message commands are necessary
because the controller defaults all drive parameters when it establishes the
Integrated Motion on the EtherNet/IP network connection.
I/O Parameters
Table 15 - I/O Parameter Numeric Order
Drive Integrated Motion
Parameter No. Parameter Name Base 10 Base 16 Enhanced Attribute Data Type
70 Anlg Out Type 2820 B04 Anlg Out Type DINT
Faults The following table shows the correlation between PowerFlex 755 faults and the
respective faults that are returned to the Logix controller and RSLogix 5000
software. The returned fault numbers and text are common with the Kinetix
6500.
Note: A fault code/message that is displayed on a HIM does not match what is
returned to the Logix controller and potentially displayed on an HMI or viewed
in RSLogix 5000 software.
Also an Enhanced Attribute message to the drive to configure the brake speed
deviation to zero must be used or a configuration error occurs. Send a ‘Real’ value
of 0 to Attribute 2724 Dec or AA4 Hex to set the brake speed deviation to zero.
Additional Resources The following documents contain more information on how to implement
Integrated Motion on EtherNet/IP with PowerFlex 755 drives.
No. 275 – Main Control Board 79 Torque Control (755) 417, 418
No. 75 – Option Module 249, 259 Boost
Anlg Out0 Stpt Limit Alarm 316
No. 276 – Main Control Board 79 Position Oriented Torque 202
No. 76 – Option Module 249, 259 Start, Acceleration, and Run 58
Anlg Out0 Val Torque 201
No. 282 – Main Control Board 80 BOOTP (No. 36) 230
No. 82 – Option Module 250, 260 BOOTP Server
Anlg Out1 Data (No. 87) 260 IP Addressing 19
Anlg Out1 DataHi (No. 88) 260 Brake Off Adj n (No. 402, 403) 95
Anlg Out1 DataLo (No. 89) 260 Brake Test Torq (No. 1114) 176
Anlg Out1 Hi (No. 90) 260 Braking
Anlg Out1 Lo (No. 91) 260 Flux Braking 94
Anlg Out1 Sel (No. 85) 260 Parameters 92
Anlg Out1 Stpt (No. 86) 260 Break Frequency (No. 63) 58
Anlg Out1 Val (No. 92) 260 Break Voltage (No. 62) 58
Application Notes 439 Brk Alarm Travel (No. 1109) 175
Applications Parameters 171 Brk Release Time (No. 1107) 175
At Limit Status (No. 945) 160 Brk Set Time (No. 1108) 175
ATEX Brk Slip Count (No. 1110) 176
Faults and Alarms 344 Bus Limit ACR Ki (No. 378) 92
Auto Manual Control Parameters 86 Bus Limit ACR Kp (No. 379) 92
Auto Mask (No. 325) 86 Bus Limit Kd (No. 377) 92
Auto Retry Fault (No. 347) 88 Bus Limit Kp (No. 376) 92
Auto Rstrt Delay (No. 349) 88 Bus Reg Ki (No. 380) 92
Auto Rstrt Tries (No. 348) 88 Bus Reg Kp (No. 381) 93
Autotune (No. 70) 59 Bus Reg Level (No. 375) 92
Autotune Parameters 59 Bus Reg Lvl Cfg (No. 374) 92
Autotune Torque (No. 71) 59 Bus Reg Mode n (No. 372, 373) 92
Aux Vel Fdbk Sel (No. 132) 67 Bus Utilization (No. 42) 55
Aux Vel FdbkFltr (No. 133) 67
Aux Vel Feedback (No. 134) 67 C
C1 L31 Line Volt (No. 127) 222
B C1 Testpt Val 1 (No. 141, 143) 222
Basic Parameter View 24 Cascaded Config (No. 20) 291
Block Diagrams 359 CbFan Derate (No. 481) 103
Control Logic (753) 388 CbFan ElpsdLife (No. 483) 103
Control Logic (755) 430, 431, 432, 433 CbFan EventActn (No. 486) 104
Diagnostic Tools 437 CbFan EventLevel (No. 485) 104
Flux Vector Overview (753) 361 CbFan RemainLife (No. 484) 104
Flux Vector Overview (755) 397
Friction Compensation 435, 436 CbFan TotalLife (No. 482) 103
High Speed Trend Wizard 438 Clear Flt Owner (No. 923) 151
Inputs and Outputs (753) 384 Cn AC Line Freq (No. 123, 223) 221
Inputs and Outputs (755) 428 Cn Alarm Status1 (No. 107, 207) 220
Inverter Overload (753) 392, 393 Cn CbFanElpsdLif (No. 138, 238) 222
Inverter Overload (755) 434
MOP Control (753) 383 Cn DC Bus Volt (No. 119, 219) 221
MOP Control (755) 427 Cn Fault Status1 (No. 105, 205) 220
Position Control (753) 371 Cn Fault Status2 (No. 106, 206) 220
Position Control (755) 407 Cn GateBoardTemp (No. 122, 222) 221
Process Control (753) 381 Cn Gnd Current (No. 118, 218) 221
Process Control (755) 425
Speed and Position Feedback (753) 363 Cn Heatsink Temp (No. 120, 220) 221
Speed and Position Feedback (755) 399 Cn L1 Phase Curr (No. 115, 215) 221
Speed Control (753) 364 Cn L12 Line Volt (No. 125, 225) 222
Speed Control (755) 400 Cn L2 Phase Curr (No. 116, 216) 221
Torque Control (753) 375, 376
Cn L23 Line Volt (No. 126, 226) 222 DC Offset Ctrl (No. 1154) 179
Cn L3 Phase Curr (No. 117, 217) 221 Dead Time Comp (No. 1153) 179
Cn PredMainReset (No. 137, 237) 222 Dec Inhibit Actn (No. 409) 95
Cn Rated Amps (No. 3, 4) 217, 223 Decel Ref Speed (No. 50) 294
Cn SCR Temp (No. 121, 221) 221 Decel Time n (No. 537, 538) 110
Cn Testpt Sel n (No. 140, 142, 240, 242) 222 Default Parameter Settings 307
Cn Testpt Val 1 (No. 141, 143, 241, 243) 222 Delayed Spd Ref (No. 139) 68, 70, 94, 112, 146, 179,
Comm Flt Action (No. 54) 232 203, 204, 205
Commanded SpdRef (No. 2) 50 DeviceLogix 479
Commanded Trq (No. 4) 50 DI Abort Profile (No. 1220) 188
Common Symptoms, Troubleshooting 353 DI Abort Step (No. 1219) 187
Communication Control Parameters 146, 147 DI Accel 2 (No. 179) 71
Communications DI Aux Fault (No. 157) 69
Parameters 146 DI BusReg Mode B (No. 186) 71
Status Indicator LEDs 18 DI Clear Fault (No. 156) 69
Condition Sts 1 (No. 937) 158 DI Coast Stop (No. 160) 69
Config Flt Code (No. 70) 290 DI Cur Lmt Stop (No. 159) 69
Configuration File Parameters 82 DI Decel 2 (No. 180) 71
Control Configuration Parameters 83 DI Enable (No. 155) 69
Control Logic DI Fiber SyncEna (No. 1129) 178
Block Diagram (753) 388 DI Fiber TravDis (No. 1130) 178
Block Diagram (755) 430, 431, 432, 433
Controller, DriveLogix 10 DI Find Home (No. 732) 135
Conventions, Manual 11 DI FloatMicroPsn (No. 1102) 175
Converter Actn (No. 17) 218 DI Fwd Dec Limit (No. 197) 72
Counts Per Unit (No. 1215) 186 DI Fwd End Limit (No. 196) 72
CRC Flt Cfg (No. 964) 167 DI Fwd Reverse (No. 162) 69
Cross Reference DI HOA Start (No. 176) 70
Faults and Alarms 321 DI Hold Step (No. 1218) 187
Current Limit Kd (No. 428) 97 DI Indx Step (No. 772) 138
Current Limit Ki (No. 429) 97 DI Indx StepPrst (No. 774) 138
Current Limit Kp (No. 430) 98 DI Indx StepRev (No. 773) 138
Current Limit n (No. 422, 423) 97 DI Jog 1 (No. 166) 70
Current Lmt Sel (No. 421) 97 DI Jog 1 Forward (No. 167) 70
Current Rate Lmt (No. 425) 97 DI Jog 1 Reverse (No. 168) 70
DI Jog 2 (No. 169) 70
DI Jog 2 Forward (No. 170) 70
D DI Jog 2 Reverse (No. 171) 70
Data In nn (No. 895…902) 149 DI ManRef AnlgHi (No. 564) 112
Data Out nn (No. 905…912) 149 DI ManRef AnlgLo (No. 565) 112
Day Stroke Count (No. 1205) 184 DI ManRef Sel (No. 563) 112
DB Ext Ohms (No. 383) 93 DI Manual Ctrl (No. 172) 70
DB Ext Watts (No. 384) 93 DI MOP Dec (No. 178) 71
DB ExtPulseWatts (No. 385) 93 DI MOP Inc (No. 177) 71
DB Resistor Type (No. 382) 93 DI NHdwr OvrTrvl (No. 201) 73
DC Brake (No. 393) 94 DI OL Home Limit (No. 734) 135
DC Brake Ki (No. 396) 95 DI PCAM Start (No. 1474) 199
DC Brake Kp (No. 397) 95 DI PHdwr OvrTrvl (No. 200) 73
DC Brake Level (No. 394) 94 DI PID Enable (No. 191) 72
DC Brake Time (No. 395) 95 DI PID Hold (No. 192) 72
DC Brk Vd Fltr (No. 399) 95 DI PID Invert (No. 194) 72
DC Brk Vq Fltr (No. 398) 95 DI PID Reset (No. 193) 72
DC Bus Mem Reset (No. 464) 101 DI Prchrg Seal (No. 190) 72
DC Bus Memory (No. 12) 50 DI Precharge (No. 189) 71
DC Bus Volts (No. 11) 50 DI PumpOff Disbl (No. 1206) 184
DI Pwr Loss (No. 188) 71 DLX DigIn Sts (No. 49) 239
DI PwrLoss ModeB (No. 187) 71 DLX DigOut Sts (No. 50) 239
DI Redefine Psn (No. 733) 135 DLX DigOut Sts2 (No. 51) 240
DI Rev Dec Limit (No. 199) 73 DLX DINT InSPn (No. 98…101) 241
DI Rev End Limit (No. 198) 73 DLX DINT OutSPn (No. 102…105) 241
DI Run (No. 163) 69 DLX DINT SPn (No. 70…77) 241
DI Run Forward (No. 164) 22, 69 DLX DIP nn (No. 33…48) 239
DI Run Reverse (No. 165) 70 DLX In nn (No. 17…32) 239
DI Speed Sel n (No. 173…175) 70 DLX Operation (No. 53) 240
DI SpTqPs Sel n (No. 181, 182) 71 DLX Out nn (No. 1…16) 239
DI Start (No. 161) 69 DLX Prog Cond (No. 52) 240
DI Stop (No. 158) 69 DLX Real InSPn (No. 82…89) 241
DI Stop Mode B (No. 185) 71 DLX Real OutSPn (No. 90…97) 241
DI StrtStep Selnn (No. 1222…1226) 188 DLX Real SPnn (No. 54…69) 241
DI Torque StptA (No. 195) 72 DM Input (No. 58) 296
DI Vel Override (No. 1221) 188 Door Out Mode (No. 74) 296
Diagnostic Tools Door Out Type (No. 57) 296
Block Diagram 437 DPI Datalinks Parameters 149
Diagnostics Parameters 153 DPI Logic Rslt (No. 882) 147
Dig In Filt DPI Ports 16
No. 223 – Main Control Board 74 DPI Ramp Rslt (No. 881) 147
No. 3 – Option Module 242, 252 DPI Ref Rslt (No. 880) 147
Dig In Filt Mask
Drive Data Parameters 51
No. 2 – Option Module 242, 252
No. 222 – Main Control Board 22, 74 Drive Logic Rslt (No. 879) 147
Dig In Sts (No. 1) 242, 252 Drive Memory Parameter 87
Dig Out Invert Drive OL Count (No. 940) 159
No. 226 – Main Control Board 75 Drive OL Mode (No. 420) 97
No. 6 – Option Module 243, 253 Drive Ramp Rslt (No. 884) 147
Dig Out Setpoint Drive Ref Rslt (No. 883) 147
No. 227 – Main Control Board 75 Drive State 303
No. 7 – Option Module 243, 253 Drive Status 1 (No. 935) 155
Dig Out Sts
Drive Status 2 (No. 936) 157
No. 225 – Main Control Board 75
No. 5 – Option Module 242, 252 Drive Temp C (No. 944) 159
Digital In Cfg (No. 150) 69 Drive Temp Pct (No. 943) 159
Digital In Sts (No. 220) 74 DriveLogix Controller 10
Digital Input Conflicts 16 Droop Compensation Parameters 117
Digital Input Functions Parameters 69, 70 Droop RPM at FLA (No. 620) 117
Digital Outputs Parameters 75 Dual Incremental Encoder
Dir Owner (No. 922) 150 Faults and Alarms 345
Direct Position Parameters 137 Parameters 266
Duty Rating (No. 306) 83
Direction Mode (No. 308) 83
Dynamic Braking
Direction Mon (No. 42) 293
Parameters 93
Direction Tol (No. 43) 293 Setup 92
Displaying Parameters 308 Type Select 93
DL From Net nn (No. 1…16) 230
DL To Net nn (No. 17…32) 230
DLs Fr Peer Act (No. 77) 234
E
DLs Fr Peer Cfg (No. 76) 234 Econ AccDec Ki (No. 48) 55
DLs From Net Act (No. 34) 230 Econ AccDec Kp (No. 49) 55
DLs To Net Act (No. 35) 230 Econ At Ref Ki (No. 47) 55
DLs To Peer Act (No. 88) 235 Effctv I Rating (No. 21) 212
DLs To Peer Cfg (No. 87) 235 Elapsed kWH (No. 14) 51
DLX Bool SPn (No. 78…81) 241 Elapsed MWH (No. 13) 50
Elapsed Run Time (No. 15) 51
IGBT Temp Pct (No. 941) 159 Motor Thermostat Input 518
In Alarm Status (No. 107, 207) 214 Overtravel Input 517
In DC Bus Volt (No. 119, 219) 215 Pre-charge Input 517
Regeneration OK Input 518
In Fault Status (No. 105, 205) 214 SSI Full Rotary 519
In Gnd Current (No. 118, 218) 215 Torque Prove 507
In Heatsink Temp (No. 120, 220) 215 Integrated Motion Applications
In HSFan Speed (No. 124, 224) 215 HIM Restrictions 308
In HSFanElpsdLif (No. 128) 216 Interp Control (No. 755) 136
In IGBT Temp (No. 121, 221) 215 Interp Psn Input (No. 756) 136
In InFan 1 Speed (No. 125, 225) 215 Interp Psn Out (No. 759) 136
In InFan 2 Speed (No. 126, 226) 215 Interp Trq Input (No. 758) 136
In InFanElpsdLif (No. 129, 229) 216 Interp Trq Out (No. 761) 136
In Pos Psn Band (No. 726) 132 Interp Vel Input (No. 757) 136
In Pos Psn Dwell (No. 727) 133 Interp Vel Out (No. 760) 136
In PredMainReset (No. 127, 227) 216 Interpolator Parameters 136
In Rated Amps (No. 3, 4) 212 Inverter Overload
In Testpt Sel n (No. 140, 142, 240, 242) 216 Block Diagram (753) 392, 393
In Testpt Val n (No. 141, 143, 241, 243) 216 Block Diagram (755) 434
IO Diag Status (No. 69) 300
In U Phase Curr (No. 115, 215) 215
IP Addr Cfg n (No. 38…41) 231
In V Phase Curr (No. 116, 216) 215
IP Address Switches 19
In W Phase Curr (No. 117, 217) 215
IPM AltOffstComp (No. 1647) 62
InAdp LdObs Mode (No. 704) 127
IPM Bus Prot (No. 1629) 65
Inert Comp LPFBW (No. 698) 126
IPM Max Cur (No. 1640) 65
InertAdptFltrBW (No. 710) 128
IPM Max Spd (No. 1641) 65
Inertia Acc Gain (No. 696) 126
IPM PriOffstComp (No. 1646) 62
Inertia Adapt BW (No. 705) 127
IPM TrqTrim HLim (No. 1644) 65
Inertia Adaption Parameters 127
IPM TrqTrim Ki (No. 1643) 65
Inertia Comp Out (No. 699) 126
IPM TrqTrim Kp (No. 1642) 65
Inertia Compensation Parameters 126
IPM TrqTrim LLim (No. 1645) 65
Inertia CompMode (No. 695) 126
IPM_Ld_0_pct (No. 1635) 62
Inertia Dec Gain (No. 697) 126
IPM_Ld_100_pct (No. 1636) 62
Inertia Test Lmt (No. 77) 60
IPM_Lg_100_pct (No. 1633) 62
InertiaAdaptGain (No. 706) 127
IPM_Lg_125_pct (No. 1634) 62
InertiaTrqAdd (No. 708) 128
IPM_Lg_25_pct (No. 1630) 62
InFan Derate (No. 495) 105
IPM_Lg_50_pct (No. 1631) 62
InFan ElpsdLife (No. 497) 106
IPM_Lg_75_pct (No. 1632) 62
InFan EventActn (No. 500) 106
IPMVdFFwdLqIqWe (No. 1639) 65
InFan EventLevel (No. 499) 106
IPMVqFFwdCemf (No. 1637) 65
InFan RemainLife (No. 498) 106
IPMVqFFwdLdIdWe (No. 1638) 65
InFan ResetLog (No. 501) 106
Iq Lo FreqCur Kp (No. 432) 98
InFan TotalLife (No. 496) 105
IR Voltage Drop (No. 73) 59
InPhase Loss Lvl (No. 463) 101
Ixo Voltage Drop (No. 74) 59
InPhase LossActn (No. 462) 101
Inputs and Outputs
Block Diagram (753) 384 J
Block Diagram (755) 428
Jerk Gain (No. 433) 98
Integrated Motion
24-bit Device Feedback 519 Jog Acc Dec Time (No. 539) 110
Analog Input 518 Jog Owner (No. 921) 150
Analog Output 518 Jog Speed n (No. 556, 557) 111
Brake Output 517 Jumper J4 Analog Input Mode 77
Contactor Enable Output 518 Jumper Out Fault 317
Digital Input 518
Digital Output 518
Motor Overload 517 L
Peak2 Cfg (No. 1044) 170 PLL LPFilter BW (No. 802) 141
PeakDetect1 Out (No. 1041) 169 PLL Psn Out Fltr (No. 806) 142
PeakDetect2 Out (No. 1046) 170 PLL Psn Ref Sel (No. 799) 141
Peer Flt Action (No. 56) 233 PLL Psn Stpt (No. 800) 141
Permanent Magnet Motors 501 PLL Rvls Input (No. 805) 141
Compatiblity 497 PLL Rvls Output (No. 812) 142
Parameters 60 PLL Speed Out (No. 807) 142
Phase Delay Comp (No. 108) 64 PLL Speed OutAdv (No. 808) 142
Phase Lock Loop Parameters 140 PLL Virt Enc RPM (No. 803) 141
Phase Loss Count (No. 7) 265 PM AltEnc Offset (No. 82) 61
PID Cfg (No. 1065) 171 PM CEMF Voltage (No. 86) 61
PID Control (No. 1066) 171 PM Cfg (No. 80) 60
PID Deadband (No. 1083) 173 PM Dir Test Cur (No. 93) 61
PID Deriv Time (No. 1088) 173 PM IR Voltage (No. 87) 61
PID Error Meter (No. 1092) 173 PM IXd Voltage (No. 89) 61
PID FBLoss SpSel (No. 1075) 172 PM IXq Voltage (No. 88) 61
PID FBLoss TqSel (No. 1076) 172 PM IXqVoltage125 (No. 120) 62
PID Fdbk (No. 1077) 172 PM OfstTst CRamp (No. 84) 61, 62
PID Fdbk AnlgHi (No. 1073) 172 PM OfstTst Cur (No. 83) 61
PID Fdbk AnlgLo (No. 1074) 172 PM OfstTst FRamp (No. 85) 51, 61, 65
PID Fdbk Meter (No. 1091) 173 PM PriEnc Offset (No. 81) 60
PID Fdbk Mult (No. 1078) 172 PM Vqs Reg Ki (No. 92) 61
PID Fdbk Sel (No. 1072) 172 PM Vqs Reg Kp (No. 91) 61
PID Int Time (No. 1087) 173 Pn 240VSplyVolts (No. 112, 212) 227
PID Lower Limit (No. 1082) 172 Pn Alarm Status1 (No. 107, 207) 226
PID LP Filter BW (No. 1084) 173 Pn Board Status (No. 104, 204) 225
PID Output Meter (No. 1093) 174 Pn CbFanElpsdLif (No. 138, 238) 227
PID Output Mult (No. 1080) 172 Pn DC Bus Volts (No. 110, 210) 227
PID Output Sel (No. 1079) 172 Pn Fault Status1 (No. 105, 205) 226
PID Preload (No. 1085) 173 Pn Fault Status2 (No. 106, 206) 226
PID Prop Gain (No. 1086) 173 Pn GateBoardTemp (No. 122, 222) 227
PID Ref AnlgHi (No. 1068) 171 Pn Main DC Volts (No. 111, 211) 227
PID Ref AnlgLo (No. 1069) 171 Pn PredMainReset (No. 137, 237) 227
PID Ref Meter (No. 1090) 173 Pn Testpt Sel n (No. 140, 142, 240, 242) 228
PID Ref Mult (No. 1071) 171 Pn Testpt Val n (No. 141, 143, 241, 243) 228
PID Ref Sel (No. 1067) 171 Point to Point Parameters 138
PID Setpoint (No. 1070) 171 Port Connections 16
PID Status (No. 1089) 173 Port Mask Act (No. 885) 148
PID Upper Limit (No. 1081) 172 Port n Reference (No. 871…878) 147
PkDtct Stpt DInt (No. 1036) 168 Port Number (No. 33) 230
PkDtct Stpt Real (No. 1035) 168 Port Verification 353
PkDtct1 In Sel (No. 1037) 168 Ports, DPI 16
PkDtct1PresetSel (No. 1038) 168 Pos Torque Limit (No. 670) 124
PkDtct2 In Sel (No. 1042) 169 Position Control
PkDtct2PresetSel (No. 1043) 169 Block Diagram (753) 371
PLL BW (No. 801) 141 Block Diagram (755) 407
PLL Control (No. 795) 140 Position Control (No. 721) 131
PLL Enc Out (No. 809) 142 Position Control Parameters 131
PLL Enc Out Adv (No. 810) 142 Position Homing Parameters 134
PLL EPR Input (No. 804) 141 Position Offset Parameters 143
PLL EPR Output (No. 811) 142 Position Oriented Torque Boost 202
PLL Ext Spd Sel (No. 796) 140 Block Diagram 416
PLL Ext Spd Stpt (No. 797) 141 Position Regulator Parameters 144
PLL Ext SpdScale (No. 798) 141 Position Watch Parameters 136
RP Rvls Output (No. 1508) 201 Security Code (No. 18) 289
RP Unit Out (No. 1512) 201 Security Parameters 148
RP Unit Scale (No. 1510) 201 Selected Spd Ref (No. 592) 115
RP Unwind (No. 1509) 201 Selected Trq Ref (No. 685) 125
Run Boost (No. 61) 58 Servo Lock Gain (No. 642) 119
Servo Motors 497, 501
Set Top ofStroke (No. 1193) 183
S SFAdapt CnvrgLmt (No. 116) 65
S Curve Accel (No. 540) 110 SFAdapt CnvrgLvl (No. 115) 64
S Curve Decel (No. 541) 110 SFAdapt SlewLmt (No. 113) 64
Safe Accel Limit (No. 65) 297 SFAdapt SlewRate (No. 114) 64
Safe Max Speed (No. 62) 297 Shear Pin Cfg (No. 434) 98
Safe Speed Limit (No. 55) 295 Shear Pin n Actn (No. 435, 438) 98
Safe Speed Monitor Shear Pin n Time (No. 437, 440) 98
Module Status 270 Shear Pinn Level (No. 436, 439) 98
Parameters 289
Signature ID (No. 10) 289
Safe Stop Input (No. 44) 294
Simulator Fdbk (No. 138) 68
Safe Stop Type (No. 45) 294
Single Incremental Encoder
Safety Mode (No. 21) 291
Faults and Alarms 344
Safety Port Sts (No. 946) 160 Parameters 263
Save MOP Ref (No. 559) 112 Single-Phase Output Configuration 178
ScaleBlk Int 00 (No. 1902) 152 Skip Speed Band (No. 529) 110
ScaleBlk Int 01 (No. 1906) 152 Skip Speed n (No. 526…528) 110
ScaleBlk Int 02 (No. 1910) 152 SLAT Dwell Time (No. 315) 85
ScaleBlk Int 03 (No. 1914) 152 SLAT Err Stpt (No. 314) 85
ScaleBlk Int 04 (No. 1918) 152 Sleep Level (No. 352) 90
ScaleBlk Int 05 (No. 1922) 152 Sleep Time (No. 353) 90
ScaleBlk Int 06 (No. 1926) 152 Sleep Wake 89
ScaleBlk Int 07 (No. 1930) 152 Sleep Wake Mode (No. 350) 89
ScaleBlk Real 00 (No. 1903) 152 SleepWake RefSel (No. 351) 90
ScaleBlk Real 01 (No. 1907) 152 Slip Adapt Iqs (No. 112) 64
ScaleBlk Real 02 (No. 1911) 152 Slip Comp BW (No. 622) 117
ScaleBlk Real 03 (No. 1915) 152 Slip Compensation Parameters 117
ScaleBlk Real 04 (No. 1919) 152 Slip Reg Enable (No. 100) 63
ScaleBlk Real 05 (No. 1923) 152 Slip Reg Ki (No. 101) 63
ScaleBlk Real 06 (No. 1927) 152 Slip Reg Kp (No. 102) 63
ScaleBlk Real 07 (No. 1931) 152 Slip RPM at FLA (No. 621) 117
ScaleBlk Scal 00 (No. 1901) 152 SLS Out Mode (No. 73) 291
ScaleBlk Scal 01 (No. 1905) 152 SO Accel Time (No. 1591) 206
ScaleBlk Scal 02 (No. 1909) 152 SO Cnts per Rvls (No. 1587) 206
ScaleBlk Scal 03 (No. 1913) 152 SO Config (No. 1580) 205
ScaleBlk Scal 04 (No. 1917) 152 SO Decel Time (No. 1592) 207
ScaleBlk Scal 05 (No. 1921) 152 SO EPR Input (No. 1584) 206
ScaleBlk Scal 06 (No. 1925) 152 SO Fwd Vel Lmt (No. 1593) 207
ScaleBlk Scal 07 (No. 1929) 152 SO Offset (No. 1583) 206
ScaleBlk Sel 00 (No. 1900) 152 SO Position Out (No. 1589) 206
ScaleBlk Sel 01 (No. 1904) 152 SO Rev Vel Lmt (No. 1594) 207
ScaleBlk Sel 02 (No. 1908) 152 SO Rvls Input (No. 1585) 206
ScaleBlk Sel 03 (No. 1912) 152 SO Rvls Output (No. 1586) 206
ScaleBlk Sel 04 (No. 1916) 152 SO Setpoint (No. 1582) 206
ScaleBlk Sel 05 (No. 1920) 152 SO Status (No. 1581) 206
ScaleBlk Sel 06 (No. 1924) 152 SO Unit Out (No. 1590) 206
ScaleBlk Sel 07 (No. 1928) 152 SO Unit Scale (No. 1588) 206
SCR Temp (No. 24) 218 Spd Err Fltr BW (No. 644) 120
Spd Loop Damping (No. 653) 121 SReg OutFltr BW (No. 659) 122
Spd Options Ctrl (No. 635) 118 SReg OutFltr Sel (No. 657) 122
Spd Ref Filter (No. 588) 113 SReg OutFltrGain (No. 658) 122
Spd Ref Fltr BW (No. 589) 113 SReg Output (No. 660) 122
Spd Ref FltrGain (No. 590) 113 SReg Trq Preset (No. 652) 121
Spd Ref n AnlgHi (No. 547, 552) 111 SS Out Mode (No. 72) 291
Spd Ref n AnlgLo (No. 548, 553) 111 Stab Angle Gain (No. 52) 55
Spd Ref n Mult (No. 549, 554) 111 Stab Volt Gain (No. 51) 55
Spd Ref n Sel (No. 545, 550) 111 Stability Filter (No. 50) 55
Spd Ref n Stpt (No. 546, 551) 111 Standstill Pos (No. 49) 294
Spd Ref Scale (No. 555) 111 Standstill Speed (No. 48) 294
Spd Ref Sel Sts (No. 591) 114 Start Acc Boost (No. 60) 58
Spd Reg Int Out (No. 654) 122 Start At PowerUp (No. 345) 87
Spd Reg Neg Lmt (No. 656) 122 Start Features Parameters 87
Spd Reg Pos Lmt (No. 655) 122 Start Inhibits (No. 933) 154
Spd Trim Source (No. 617) 116 Start Owner (No. 920) 150
SpdBand Intgrtr (No. 1106) 175 Start Up
SpdReg AntiBckup (No. 643) 119 Check List 15
SpdTrimPrcRefSrc (No. 616) 116 Status Indicators 18, 303
SpdTrqPsn Mode n (No. 309…312) 84 Communication Adapters 18
Speed and Position Feedback Status Parameters 153
Block Diagram (753) 363 Statusn at Fault (No. 954, 955) 162
Block Diagram (755) 399 Step n Accel (No. 1232…1382) 189
Speed Comp Gain (No. 666) 123 Step n Action (No. 1238…1388) 193
Speed Comp Out (No. 667) 123 Step n Batch (No. 1236…1386) 192
Speed Comp Sel (No. 665) 123 Step n Decel (No. 1233…1383) 190
Speed Compensation Parameters 123 Step n Dig In (No. 1239…1389) 194
Speed Control Step n Dwell (No. 1235…1385) 192
Block Diagram (753) 364 Step n Next (No. 1237…1387) 193
Block Diagram (755) 400 Step n Type (No. 1230…1380) 188
Speed Control Parameters 109 Step n Value (No. 1234…1384) 191
Speed Dev Band (No. 1105) 175 Step n Velocity (No. 1231…1381) 189
Speed Error (No. 641) 119 Stop Decel Tol (No. 51) 294
Speed Hysteresis (No. 56) 295 Stop Dwell Time (No. 392) 94
Speed Limits Parameters 109, 110 Stop Mode n (No. 370, 371) 91
Speed Rate Ref (No. 596) 115 Stop Mon Delay (No. 46) 294
Speed Ref Source (No. 930) 153 Stop Owner (No. 919) 150
Speed Reference Parameters 111 Stroke Per Min (No. 1202) 184
Speed References 70 Stroke Pos Count (No. 1201) 184
Speed Reg BW (No. 636) 118 Subnet Cfg n (No. 42…45) 231
Speed Reg Ki (No. 647) 120 Support, Product 357
Speed Reg Kp (No. 645) 120 SVC Boost Filter (No. 64) 58
Speed Reg Max Kp (No. 646) 120 Sync Time (No. 1122) 177
Speed Regulation Sys Rated Amps
Setting Gains for Primary and Alternate Feedback No. 1 – Converter 217, 223
Sources 118 No. 1 – Inverter 212
Speed Regulator Parameters 118 Sys Rated Volts
Speed Torque Position 84 No. 2 – Converter 217, 223
Speed Trim Parameters 115 No. 2 – Inverter 212
Speed Units (No. 300) 82
Spindle Orientation Configuration 205
Spindle Orientation Parameters 205, 206
T
SReg FB Fltr BW (No. 639) 119 Technical Support
SReg FB Fltr Sel (No. 637) 119 Contacting 357
Testpoint Fval n (No. 971…983) 167
SReg FB FltrGain (No. 638) 119
Testpoint Lval n (No. 972…984) 167 Trim Ref n Stpt (No. 601, 605) 115
Testpoint Sel n Trim Refn AnlgHi (No. 602, 606) 116
No. 30, 32 – Converter 219, 224 Trim Refn AnlgLo (No. 603, 607) 116
No. 30, 32 – Inverter 213 TrmPct Refn AnHi (No. 610, 614) 116
No. 970…982 – Main Control Board 167 TrmPct Refn AnLo (No. 611, 615) 116
Testpoint Val n
TrmPct Refn Sel (No. 608, 612) 116
No. 31, 33 – Converter 219, 224
No. 31, 33 – Inverter 213 TrmPct Refn Stpt (No. 609, 613) 116
Testpoints Parameters 167 Troubleshooting 301
To Peer Enable (No. 91) 236 Common Symptoms 353
To Peer Period (No. 89) 236 Crane Setup Encoderless 458
Crane Setup with Encoder 450
To Peer Skip (No. 90) 236 Trq Adapt En (No. 107) 64
TO0 Level (No. 22) 244, 254 Trq Adapt Speed (No. 106) 64
TO0 Level (No. 242) 76 Trq Comp Mode (No. 109) 64
TO0 Level CmpSts (No. 23) 244, 254 Trq Comp Mtring (No. 110) 64
TO0 Level CmpSts (No. 243) 76 Trq Comp Regen (No. 111) 64
TO0 Level Sel (No. 21) 244, 254 Trq Lmt SlewRate (No. 1104) 175
TO0 Level Sel (No. 241) 76 Trq Prove Cfg (No. 1100) 174
TO0 Off Time (No. 245) 77 Trq Prove Setup (No. 1101) 174
TO0 Off Time (No. 25) 245, 255 Trq Prove Status (No. 1103) 175
TO0 On Time (No. 24) 244, 254 Trq Ref n AnlgHi (No. 677, 682) 124
TO0 On Time (No. 244) 77 Trq Ref n AnlgLo (No. 678, 683) 124
TO0 Sel (No. 20) 244, 254 Trq Ref n Mult (No. 679, 684) 124
TO0 Sel (No. 240) 76 Trq Ref n Sel (No. 675, 680) 124
TO1 Level (No. 32) 245, 255 Trq Ref n Stpt (No. 676, 681) 124
TO1 Level CmpSts (No. 33) 245, 255 Type 2 Alarms (No. 961) 165
TO1 Level Sel (No. 31) 245, 255
TO1 Off Time (No. 35) 245, 255
TO1 On Time (No. 34) 245, 255 U
TO1 Sel (No. 30) 245, 255 UnderVltg Action (No. 460) 101
TorqAlarm Action (No. 1168) 180 UnderVltg Level (No. 461) 101
TorqAlarm Config (No. 1169) 180 Units Traveled (No. 1212) 185
TorqAlarm Dwell (No. 1170) 180 Universal Feedback Module
TorqAlarm Level (No. 1171) 180 Parameters 271
TorqAlarm TOActn (No. 1173) 180 User Home Psn (No. 738) 135
TorqAlm Timeout (No. 1172) 180 UserData Int 00...31 (No. 1700...1731) 152
Torque Boost Parameters 201 UserData Int 00...31 (No. 1800...31) 152
Torque Control
Block Diagram (753) 375, 376
Block Diagram (755) 417, 418 V
Torque Cur Fdbk (No. 5) 50 VB Accel Rate (No. 1541) 204
Torque Limits Parameters 124 VB Config (No. 1535) 203
Torque Prove 507 VB Cur Thresh (No. 1550) 205
Torque Prove Parameters 174 VB Current Hyst (No. 1549) 205
Torque Reference Parameters 124 VB Current Rate (No. 1548) 205
Torque Setpoint (No. 1194) 183 VB Decel Rate (No. 1542) 204
Torque Step (No. 686) 125 VB Filt Flux Cur (No. 1547) 204
Total Gear Ratio (No. 1174) 181 VB Flux Lag Freq (No. 1546) 204
Total Inertia (No. 76) 59 VB Flux Thresh (No. 1545) 204
Traverse VB Frequency (No. 1543) 204
Fiber Control 177 VB Maximum (No. 1540) 204
Increment and Decrement 177 VB Min Freq (No. 1544) 204
Traverse Dec (No. 1124) 177 VB Minimum (No. 1539) 204
Traverse Inc (No. 1123) 177 VB Rate Lag Freq (No. 1551) 205
Trim Ref n Sel (No. 600, 604) 115 VB Status (No. 1536) 203
Technical Support Center Knowledgebase Articles, How-to Videos, FAQs, Chat, User https://rockwellautomation.custhelp.com/
Forums, and Product Notification Updates.
Local Technical Support Phone Numbers Locate the phone number for your country. http://www.rockwellautomation.com/global/support/get-support-now.page
Find the Direct Dial Code for your product. Use the code to
Direct Dial Codes route your call directly to a technical support engineer. http://www.rockwellautomation.com/global/support/direct-dial.page
Documentation Feedback
Your comments will help us serve your documentation needs better. If you have any suggestions on how to improve this document, complete the
How Are We Doing? form at http://literature.rockwellautomation.com/idc/groups/literature/documents/du/ra-du002_-en-e.pdf.
Rockwell Automation maintains current product environmental information on its website at http://www.rockwellautomation.com/rockwellautomation/about-us/sustainability-ethics/product-environmental-compliance.page.
Allen-Bradley, DeviceLogix, DPI, DriveExecutive, DriveExplorer, DriveTools, Kinetix, PowerFlex, Rockwell Software, Rockwell Automation, RSLogix 5000, RSNetWorx, SCANPort, and Studio 5000 Logix Designer are trademarks of Rockwell
Automation, Inc.
Rockwell Otomasyon Ticaret A.Ş., Kar Plaza İş Merkezi E Blok Kat:6 34752 İçerenköy, İstanbul, Tel: +90 (216) 5698400